Agenda packet — Gardena City Council, December 12, 2023 (part 6 of 11)

The Contractor shall abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping and sprinkling with water in keeping with the AQMD and NPDES requirements. Debris, soil or other matter shall not be washed into storm drains but shall be collected and disposed of in a legal, responsible manner.

The construction area shall be cleaned with a power sweeper at the end of every workday and when deemed necessary by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the work areas. Earth dams will not be permitted in paved areas. Use temporary sandbags to control the site perimeter. At the completion of the project sandbags shall become the property of the City of Gardena and shall be remain in place.

The Contractor shall not spill on haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed immediately, and the area cleaned.

Stockpiling of construction materials or debris on City right-of-way shall be in accordance with the NPDES permit and shall be approved by the inspector. At the completion of work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all work areas.
3-12.2 Air Pollution and Surface Maintenance Control. The Contractor shall obtain a construction water meter from Golden State Water including required deposit and fees. The Contractor shall pay for the water used, at the current water rates. All arrangements for GP-9
construction water shall be made by contractor with Golden State Water at Contractor expense. 3-12.4. Storage of Equipment and Material.
3-12.4.1 General. All costs associated with the disposal of all excavated or demolition materials, including any gate fees, shall be paid by the Contractor. These costs shall be included in the bid price for the applicable bid items.

Prior to any excavated or demolition material being removed from the construction site the Contractor shall notify the City as to the hauling route and destination for disposal. If the location for disposal is other than a county landfill then the Contractor shall provide the City with written permission and release of liability for the City from the owner of the property where the material will be deposited.

The City has an exclusive agreement with Waste Resources, Inc. and no other firm may provide bulk trash bins in the event the work requires this service. 3-12.4.2 Storage in Public Streets. Construction equipment shall not be stored at the construction site, any public street or publicly owned facilities without approval of the City.

Contractor shall store equipment at a contractor’s rental yard.

All excavated material that is to be hauled to and disposed of at a County landfill site by the Contractor is subject to a County gate fee based on tonnage. 3-12.5.4 Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements. Any facilities, structures, water lines, landscaping, surfaces, signs, pavement markings, painted curbs, house numbers, etc., which are damaged during construction shall be restored to the satisfaction of the City. Damaged water lines shall be repaired immediately at no additional cost to the city. 3-12.5.5 Access to Private Property. The Contractor shall be aware that business and residential access must be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall schedule operations to minimize interference with access to private property.

The main access way to any business or home shall not be completely blocked for more than one four-hour period a day except blockage shall be limited to one twenty-four (24) hour period when concrete is poured.

Temporary access ways shall be provided from the street to the main access way of all businesses and homes by use of traffic rated steel plates or any other method approved by the city.

Payment for this item shall be included in the applicable contract work item. 3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY.
3-13.3 Warranty. In addition to the guarantees as required in Section 1-7.2 and 3-13.3 of the Standard Specifications, the Faithful Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for a period of one year after acceptance of the work by the Agency to insure that defects, which may appear within said period, will be repaired, replaced, or corrected by the Contractor, at his own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer within thirty (30) days after written notice thereof by the Agency.

SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIAL
GP-10
4-1 GENERAL.
4-1.1 Warranty of Title. No materials, supplies or equipment for the work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest therein or any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier.

The Contractor warrants clear and good title to all materials, supplies and equipment installed and incorporated in the work, and agrees upon completion of all work to deliver the premises, together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the Agency free from any claims, liens, encumbrances or charges, and further agrees that neither he nor any person, firm or corporation furnishing any material or labor for work covered by the Contract shall have any right to a lien upon the premises or any improvement or appurtenance thereon; provided, that this shall not preclude the Contractor from installing metering devices or other equipment of utility companies the title of which is commonly retained by the utility company. Nothing contained in this section, however, shall defeat or impair the right of such persons furnishing materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor, which are in the hands of the Agency.

The provisions of this section shall be inserted in all subcontractor’s and material contracts, and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into regarding such materials.

SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBLITIES
5-4 INSURANCE. In lieu of Section 5-4 of the Standard Specifications, refer to the City Contract Documents Section, CD-10, for detail requirements. 5-5 ANTITRUST CLAIMS. By entry into this Contract, Contractor hereby acknowledges the terms of Section 7103.5 of the Public Contract Code and hereby offers and agrees to assign to the Agency all rights, title and interest in all causes of action it may have as outlined above. 5-7 SAFETY.
5-7.4 Hazardous Substances. As required by Public Contract Code Section 7104, if this Contract involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four (4) feet below the surface, Contractor shall promptly, and prior to disturbance of any conditions, notify the Agency of: (1) any material discovered in excavation that Contractor believes to be a hazardous waste that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site; (2) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated by the Agency; and (3) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature at the site, significantly different from those ordinarily encountered in such contract work. Upon notification, the Agency shall promptly investigate the conditions to determine whether a change order is appropriate. In the event of a dispute, Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date and shall proceed with all work to be performed under the Contract but shall retain all rights provided by the Contract and by law for making protests and resolving the dispute. 5-7.4.1Edison Energized Conductors. Contractor hereby promises and agrees that in the performance of the work specified in this Contract, it will employ and utilized only qualified persons, as hereinafter defined, to work in proximity to Edison’s secondary, primary and transmission facilities. The term “qualified person” is defined in Title 8, California Administrative Code, Section 2700, as follows:
“Qualified Person: A person who by reason of experience or instruction is familiar with GP-11
the operation to be performed and the hazards involved.” Contractor further promises and agrees that the provisions of this section shall be and are binding upon any subcontractor or subcontractors that may be retained by it, and that Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to assure compliance by said subcontractor or subcontractors with the requirements of this section. 5-7.4.2Emergency Provisions. Unusual conditions may arise on the work which will require that immediate and unusual provision be made to protect the public from danger or loss or damage to life and property, due directly or indirectly to the prosecution of the work, and it is part of the service required of the Contractor to make such provisions and to furnish such protection.

Whenever, in the opinion of the Agency, an emergency exists of which the Agency is aware and against which the Contractor has not taken sufficient precaution for the safety of the public or the protection of utilities or of adjacent structures or property which may be injured by the progress of construction; and whenever, in the opinion of the Agency, immediate action shall be considered necessary in order to protect public or private personnel or property interests, or prevent likely loss of human life or damage on account of the operations under the Contract, then in that event the Agency may provide suitable protection to said interests by causing such work to be done and material to be furnished, as in the opinion of the Agency may seem reasonable and necessary, all at the expense of the Contractor.

SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK
6-1.1 Construction Schedule. The Contractor’s proposed construction schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the preconstruction meeting. Any schedule for long lead items shall be accompanied by written statements from each supplier or equipment indicating an anticipated schedule of delivery.

The Contractor shall include in his bid all costs to perform the work under this contract in stages.

The Contractor shall begin and complete work in each stage prior to starting work in subsequent stages unless previous permission is obtained from the Engineer. The contractor shall stage the work to allow parking on the next adjacent streets. Restricting parking on multiple adjoining streets shall require approval of the engineer.
6-1.2 Commencement of the Work. City may establish a Notice to Proceed (NTP) date no later than thirty (30) calendar days after the date of the contract execution. Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed, the Engineer will schedule a preconstruction meeting with the Contractor to review the proposed construction schedule and delivery dates, arrange utility coordination, discuss construction methods and clarify inspection procedures.

The names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor and subcontractors, or their representatives, shall be filed with the Public Works Manager and the County Sheriff’s Department or the City Police Department prior to beginning work.

The Contractor shall also notify the City of Gardena and the owners of all utilities and substructures within the Project area not less than 48 hours prior to starting construction. The following utility companies list of names and telephone numbers is intended for the convenience of the contractor and is not guaranteed to be complete or correct:

COMPANY CONTACT TELEPHONE NO.

GP-12
Southern California Edison
Joshua Remlio (Planner)
Ron Whitaker (Inspector)
562.756.3241
310.710.9606
Southern California Gas Melissa Fukunaga: Tech Services Planning: Attn - Lead Planner
213.231.7281
AT&T Craig Chinen 310.408.4518
Gardena Police Dispatch 310.3237911
L.A. County Fire Dept. 310.323.7911
Charter Communications Jose Ortiz 310.429.3459
Crown Castle Hector Aguilera 951.454.5111
Waste Resources of Gardena Lorena Rodriguez 310.366.7600 Golden State Water Co. Conde Ventura 310.436.6950 x107
Joseph Salcido 310.660.0320 x101
L.A. County Flood Control Daryll Chenoweth 626.458.3129 L.A. Sanitation District Jon Ganz 562.908.4288
Metropolitan Water District Civil Eng. Substructures Section 213.217.7059 Chevron Pipeline Dave Zerler 310.669.4014
Underground Service Alert 800.422.4133
The Contractor shall submit periodic Progress reports to the Engineer by the tenth day of each month. The report shall include an updated Construction Schedule. Any deviations from the original schedule shall be explained. Progress payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding reports.
6-1.3 Working Day. The Contractor’s working hours shall be limited to the hours between 7:30 A.M. and 4:30 P.M., Monday through Friday except holidays. No work which will cause loud or disruptive noise to adjacent residents and “No Parking” enforcement shall begin prior to 8:00 a.m. nor terminate later than 4:30 p.m. Deviation from normal working hours will not be allowed unless written permission has been duly obtained beforehand from the office of the City Engineer. The Contractor shall provide adequate light for proper prosecution of the work, for the safety of the workmen and the public, and for proper inspection.

If the Contractor works beyond the allowed working hours without prior written approval from the Engineer, the Contractor may be charged Five Hundred ($500) for each occurrence as required by the Engineer. The amount will be deducted from a progress payment or bond.

Contractor hereby acknowledges and shall be required to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section 1810 et seq. According to those sections, eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day’s work. Contractor shall pay to the Agency a penalty of Twenty-Five Dollars ($25.00) for each worker employed in the execution of this Contract by Contractor, or by any Subcontractor, for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any calendar day or forty (40) hours in any one (1) calendar week, except when payment for overtime is made at not less than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the basic rate for that worker.

In the event of either a requested or emergency deviation, inspection service fees will be charged against the Contractor. The service fees will be calculated at overtime rates including benefits, overhead and travel time. The service fees will be deducted from any amounts due to the Contractor.

GP-13
6-1.4 Notice and Service Thereof. Any notice required or given by one party to the other under the contract shall be in writing and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice or by a duly authorized representative of such party. Any such notice shall not be effective for any purpose whatever unless served in the following manner:

Notice shall be given to the Agency by personal delivery thereof to the City of Gardena Engineer or by depositing the same in the United States mail enclosed in a sealed envelope, registered and with postage prepaid, addressed to:

Public Works Department
City of Gardena
1717 W. 162nd Street
Gardena, CA 90247-3778
Notice shall be given to the Contractor by personal delivery thereof to said Contractor or to his authorized representative at the site of the project, or by depositing the same in the United States mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to said Contractor at the address established for the conduct of the work under this Contract, postage prepaid and registered.

Notice shall be given to the Surety, or any other person, by personal delivery to said Surety or other person, or by depositing the same in the United States Mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to such Surety or persons at the address of said Surety or persons last communicated to the party giving the notice, postage prepaid and registered.

Notification of Property Owners and Tenants - The Contractor shall notify each property owner and/or tenant in the project area (See Appendix C) in writing five (10) working days prior to the start of construction. If pedestrian or vehicular access to private property is to be blocked, the Contractor shall again notify each property owner and/or tenant in writing five (5) working days prior to construction activities. The Contractor shall provide additional notices when a lapse time occurs during each phase/segment work.

The written notice shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to being delivered.
6-2 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK.

6-2.1 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work. Until the formal acceptance of the work by the Agency, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall, subject to the insurance protection furnished in accordance with the Section 1-7.6 and 5-4 hereof, bear the risk of accident, loss or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and otherwise correct damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before its acceptance.

In case of suspension of work from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and the proper temporary storage thereof. 6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION.
6-3.1 General. The contract time shall begin per the City’s written notification. Work must be completed within working days specified for the project. In addition, the Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours in advance of the actual commencement of work.

No work shall be undertaken during the City’s holiday closures. It is the Contractor’s GP-14
responsibility to determine the City’s closure dates.
6-9 LIQUDATED DAMAGES. The amount of liquidated damages is hereby amended to $5,000 for each consecutive calendar day.

SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK.
7-1.2 Method of Measure. The quantities shown on the Bid Schedule are approximate only. The Contractor will be paid for the actual quantities of work based on approved field measurements as provided for in these Specifications. The City reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any item or portion of work to be performed or materials furnished, or to delete any item, in accordance with the Specifications. Additional bid item work shall be completed within the total working days in these specifications. Additional working days may be allowed with the approval of the engineer.

The Contractor shall provide Schedule of Value prior to pre-construction meeting for lump sum bid items.

Any conflict between the listed bid schedule and/or schedule of values versus actual quantities will be addressed during construction by either increasing or decreasing the payment per bid unit price/schedule of values and the GREENBOOK Section 2-7. 7-3 PAYMENT.
7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. The Engineer will authorize monthly partial/progress payments per Section 7-3.2 of the Standard Specifications. Contractor’s monthly invoice shall be submitted on company letterhead. Each invoice submitted shall include: project name, date of invoice, progress payment number, and purchase order number. All bid items shall be included on each invoice and include unit, unit price bid, original quantity, amount, previous payment quantity and amount, current invoice payment quantity and amount, total project payment quantity and amount. In addition, any approved change orders shall be listed on invoice. Payment to Contractor typically takes 30 days from submittal of approved invoice.

However, payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding reports required by the Contract Documents.
7-3.3 Delivered Materials. The City will NOT honor or make any progress payments for materials ordered and delivered to the job site by the Contractor unless prior approval is obtained from the Engineer.
7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK.
7-4.3 EXTRA WORK. When work is performed on a "time and materials" basis, the following percentages shall be added to the Contractor's cost and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits:
1) Labor ...........................................................20 2) Materials ...........................................................15 3) Equipment Rental .........................................................15 4) Other Items and Expenditures .....................................15 To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as compensation for bonding.

GP-15
When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established above shall be applied to the Subcontractor's actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor.

SECTION 8 – FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL
8-2 FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES. The Contractor shall provide the class of field office indicated below:

Class "A" Class "B" Class "C"
In the event none of the boxes are marked above, no specific field office will be required, and the use therefore of any field office will be at the Contractor's discretion. The location of any field office shall be as provided on the plans, in these Specifications or as designated by the Engineer.

END OF GENERAL PROVISIONS
TP-1

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS (GREENBOOK)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 2 - CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (Page TP-1)
SECTION 200 ROCK MATERIALS
SECTION 201 CONCRETE, MORTAR AND RELATED MATERIALS
SECTION 202 MASONRY MATERIALS
SECTION 203 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
SECTION 204 LUMBER AND TREATMENT WITH PRESERVATIVES (NO CHANGE) SECTION 205 PILES (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 206 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 207 GRAVITY PIPE
SECTION 208 PIPE JOINT TYPES AND MATERIALS (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 209 PRESSURE PIPE
SECTION 210 PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
SECTION 211 MATERIAL TESTS
SECTION 212 WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM VALVES AND APPURTENANCES SECTION 213 ENGINEERING GEOSYNTHETICS (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 214 TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS, AND

PAVEMENT MARKERS
SECTION 215 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE MANHOLES (PRCMH)(NO

CHANGE)
SECTION 216 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX (NO CHANGE) SECTION 217 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS (NO CHANGE)
PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION METHODS (Page TP-16)
SECTION 300 EARTHWORK
SECTION 301 SUBGRADE PREPARATION, TREATED MATERIALS AND

PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS
SECTION 302 ROADWAY SURFACING
SECTION 303 CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 304 METAL FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 305 PILE DRIVING AND TIMBER CONSTRUCTION (NO CHANGE) SECTION 306 OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 307 JACKING AND TUNNELING (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 308 MICROTUNNELING (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 309 MONUMENTS (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 310 PAINTING
SECTION 311 SPECIAL PROTECTIVE MATERIALS (NO CHANGE)
SECTION 314 TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS, AND

PAVEMENT MARKERS
TP-2
PART 6 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL (Page TP-45)
SECTION 600 ACCESS
SECTION 601 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION AND

MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES
PART 8 – LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION (Page TP-47)
SECTION 800 MATERIALS
SECTION 801 INSTALLATION
TP-3

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS (GREENBOOK)
PREFACE: All work and materials shall conform to the "Standard Specification for Public Works Construction", 2021 edition, except as modified by the contract and these Technical Provisions.

Incidental Work - All work and materials required by the plans and specifications, and not specifically listed in the bid schedule items of work, shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made therefore. Incidental items shall include, but not be limited to, mobilization; implementation of the SWPPP and Best Management Practices for the protection of storm drain structures; adjusting utility access covers to grade; saw cutting; excavation and disposal of materials; survey; traffic control and coordination of utilities.

PART 2 - CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
SECTION 200 - ROCK PRODUCTS
200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS
200-1.1 General
Aggregate base material for all asphaltic concrete and concrete paving shall be per Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Community Aquatic and Senior Center by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A. 200-1.4 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete

1. Non-Slip Aggregate: Fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery, factory graded, packaged rust proof.
200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS
200-2.1 General
Crushed Miscellaneous Base (CMB) shall be used as the untreated base material.

SECTION 201 - CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS
201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
201-1.1 Requirements
201-1.1.1 General. Add the following below paragraph 7:

TP-4
The cement utilized shall be Type II/V, per the project Geotech report. No substitution of materials shall be permitted. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner’s Representative with a copy of the mix design to be used and with a legible certified weight-master’s certificate for each load of P.C.C. delivered to the project. Portland Cement Concrete delivered to the project site having a water content and/or slump greater than that specified in the mix design shall be rejected and removed from the project site.

Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified State of California licensed civil engineer to provide a concrete mix design for each class of concrete in accordance with UBC Section 1905. Concrete mix design submittals shall bear the stamp and signature of the engineer approving the mix design as being consistent with project specifications and geotechnical report.
201-1.1.2 Concrete specified by class: The strength of concrete shall be 3,250 psi for all concrete not otherwise specified with a maximum slump of four inches (4") for all concrete flatwork, walls, curb, gutter, walks, aprons, footings, foundations, sidewalks, access ramps, curbs and gutters, and cross gutters, mow curbs, columns, thrust blocks, seating, monument signs, etc. Portland cement concrete shall be Class 560-C-3250 unless shown otherwise on the plans.
201-1.1.3 The Water Cement Ratio (W/C) shall be 0.50 maximum, per the project Geotech report.
201-1.1. Concrete Specified by Compressive Strength

1. All material shall comply with the latest editions of the American Concrete Institute (ACI) and Uniform Building Code. Testing of Portland cement concrete shall apply to all site concrete including but not limited to: concrete paving, walls, footing, etc.

2. Product Data:
a) Submit complete materials list of items proposed for the work. Identify material source.
b) Submit admixture, curing compound, retarder, and accessory item product data. c) Submit material certificates for aggregates, reinforcing, and join fillers.

3. Submit concrete delivery tickets to Quality Control Manager. Show the following:
a) Batch number
b) Mix by class or sack content with maximum size aggregate c) Admixture
d) Air content
e) Slump
f) Time of loading

4. Submit concrete test reports.

TP-5

5. Owner will provide field quality control testing and inspection during concrete operations.

6. Contractor shall provide adequate notice, cooperate with, provide access to the work, obtain samples, and assist test agency and their representatives in execution of their function.

7. Strength Verification
Contractor should present mix design to Owner Inspector for approval prior to pour.

Contractor shall provide copies of concrete tickets verifying the strength requirements for every truck load of concrete (see also item 3 above). 201-1.1.5 Test for Portland Cement Concrete
Concrete Installer
Contractor shall provide evidence to indicate successful experience in concrete placement and finishing work similar to that specified herein and who can demonstrate such successful experience through past project documentation and references.

1. Experience Period: Minimum five (5) years’ experience. 2 Demonstration of Experience: Ten (10) projects which have been completed within the past twenty-four (24) months utilizing similar products, scope, and complexity.

3. Supervision: Placement and finishing of concrete work shall be performed under the supervision of a person having a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the placement and finishing of products specified herein.

4. Previous projects shall be located in Los Angeles, Orange, Riverside, Ventura or San Bernardino Counties. A listing of projects and addresses shall be provided with the bid and shall be reviewed and approved by the City prior to award of the bid.

Installer qualifications shall be submitted to construction manager with copies to the Architect for information purposes. Three (3) copies of previous experience shall be provided.

5. The above prequalifications refer to any and all site / exterior concrete work identified on plans.
201-1.2 Materials
201-1.2.1 Portland Cement

1. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, containing 85% by weight of calcium oxide.

TP-6

2. Lime Putty: Make from hydrated lime conforming to ASTM C207, pulverized to such fineness that 100% will pass a 50 mesh sieve. Mix lime in water, run through screen into box and age 48 hours.

3. Cement shall be Type II/V Portland Cement.
201-1.4 Mixing
201-1.4.3 Transit Mixer
Mixes

a. Provide ASTM C94 ready-mixed concrete. Batch mixing at site not acceptable.

1. Strength: 3,250 psi minimum at 28 days for all concrete flatwork, curbs, seating, ramps, plaza area, etc.

2. Slump Range: 2” to 4” maximum
b. Coarse aggregate shall consist of 3/4” aggregate - 3/8” aggregate for pump mix. c. Provide an approved water-reducing admixture in all concrete. d. Provide an air-entraining admixture in all concrete. Air content 5% to 7%. e. Indicate water added to mix at job site on each delivery ticket. Show quantity of water added. Site water tempered mixes exceeding specified slump range will be rejected as not complying with specifications requirements. 201-2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE
201-2.2 Reinforcing Steel. [Add the following paragraph immediately after the first paragraph]:

Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 steel conforming to ASTM A 615 with 2-inch minimum cover unless shown otherwise on the plans.

Payment.

Payment for steel reinforcement shall be included in the lump sum contract price for all related items, i.e., concrete ramps, walks, walls, structures, footings. 201-3.1 Expansion Joint Filler and Joint Sealants
201-3.2 Premolded Joint Filler
TP-7
Expansion joint material shall be Deck-O-Foam by W.R. Meadows Corporation or approved equal – 1/4″ in dimension. Install per manufacturers specifications (909) 469-2606.
201-4 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
Curing compound shall be ASTM 309 or better. Concrete cure and seal shall be “clear” by Davis Colors, or approved equal.
201-4.4 Concrete Sealer
Concrete sealer shall be Siloxane WB Concentrate sealer or approved equal. Dilution to be 1:9 minimum to 1:7 maximum. Provided by Mike Davis of Innovative Concrete Products and Marketing, Inc. Phone: (949) 498-7077. Concrete sealer to be applied to all sidewalks and the Monument Sign.

SECTION 202 - MASONRY MATERIALS
202-2.1 Materials: [Add the followings]:

1. Codes: Materials and work shall conform to the governing building code. In case of conflict between the codes, the more stringent shall govern.

2. Samples: Submit samples of all block to be used in the work.

3. Protection: Safeguard all materials against injury in transit, delivery, storage, sorting, installation, cleaning, and until final acceptance of the completed work. Store cement and lime in rainproof sheds with elevated floors. Store sand on tightly floored space, protected against mixing with ground or other materials.

4. Quality of construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. 202-2.1.1 Masonry Materials [Add the following]:

1. Concrete Block:

The concrete blocks shall conform to the requirements shown on the plans and shall be nominal size and of uniform color.
202.2.2 Mortar, Grout, and Water

1. Mortar [Add the following]:

Mortar. Mortar for laying masonry units shall consist, by volume, of 1 part Portland cement, ½ part lime putty, 3 parts sand, and shall conform to ASTM C270. If plastic type cement is used, the lime putty shall be omitted. Each batch of mortar shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed. Mortar for split face concrete block construction shall be integral color, color to be selected. Mortar for rock cobble construction shall be natural grey.

TP-8
Mortar shall be colored to match integral color masonry block units. Coloring shall be chemically inert, fade resistant mineral oxide, or synthetic type.

2. Grout. [Replace with the following]:

Grout for filling masonry units shall consist, by volume, of 1 part Portland cement and 3 parts sand. Sufficient water shall be added to create grout of fluid consistency. Grout shall be natural in color.

3. Pea Gravel. Clean, hard, containing not more than 5% by weight of flat, thin, elongated, friable, or laminated pieces; uniformly graded with not over 5% passing a no. 8 sieve to 100% passing a 3/8” sieve.

4. Lime. ASTM C207, Type S, containing 85% by weight of calcium oxide.

5. Lime Putty. Make from hydrated lime conforming to ASTM C207, pulverized to such fineness that 100% will pass a 50 mesh sieve. Mix lime in water, run through screen in to box, and age 48 hours.

Mortar and grout not used within 30 minutes after leaving mixer will not be permitted on the work. Retempering of mix will not be allowed.
202-2.2.2 Masonry, Sealants, and Waterproofing

1. Sealants [Add the following]:
a. Masonry: “All guard” concrete masonry sealer as manufactured by Dow Corning, or approved equal.

2. Waterproofing [Add the following]:
a. Waterproofing membrane (Miradri 860) and protective membrane (Miradri Protection Course 200V) as manufactured by Nicolon Mirafi, or approved equal.

Contact James Heidt and Assoc. 818-248-9677. Apply per manufacturer’s specifications.
b. All drainage incorporated into waterproofing system, as indicated on drawings, shall be tied into storm drain lines indicated on civil engineer’s drawings.

Drainlines shall be Sch. 40 PVC and slope at 1% min.
c. Contractor shall identify and provide for drainline and drainline rock alignment in field. Alignment shall consider and avoid conflict with all other site work. Drainline alignment shall be reviewed and approved by Quality Control Manager prior to installation and be indicated on as-builts as prepared by Contractor. Installation of drainline shall be included in cost of construction.

SECTION 203 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
203-5 SLURRY SEAL
TP-9
203-5.1 General
Slurry seal shall be emulsion-aggregate slurry (EAS) conforming to 203-5.4. 203-5.2 Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry (EAS)
203-5.2.1 General
Emulsion-aggregate slurring (EAS) shall be Type I-CQS-1h conforming to 203-3 203-5.2 Materials
203-5.2.2 Emulsified Asphalt
Emulsified asphalt shall be of quick set type.
203-5.2.5 Latex
Latex shall be Ultrapave 65K produced by the Textile Rubber and Cement Company, Inc., or equal approved by the Engineer in advance of ordering the latex additive. It shall be added to the emulsified asphalt by the co-mill method at the emulsion plant at the rate of 2½ percent of weight of the emulsified asphalt.

Latex-added emulsified asphalt shall be kept in a suspended state by an agitating mixer and mixed every three days.
(Use Section 203-6 for conventional AC.)
203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE
203-6.1 General.

Asphalt concrete shall conform to the provisions of Subsection 400-1, “Rock Product,” and Subsection 400-4, "Asphalt Concrete".

The viscosity grade of paving asphalt shall be AR 4000. The mix designs and asphalt content shall be as follows:
3/4″ (III-B-3) Base Course 5.6%
1/2″ (III-C-3) Surface Course 5.8%
3/8″ (III-D) Leveling Course, Asphalt Concrete Dike, or Miscellaneous A.C.

Placement (sidewalks and driveways) 6.8%
203-6.5 Type III Asphalt Concrete Mixtures
Asphalt concrete finish course and leveling course shall be Type III-C3-PG 64-10 (20% max RAP). Asphalt concrete base course shall be Type III-B2-PG 64-10 (20% max RAP). (Use Section 203-11 for rubberized AC.)
TP-10
203-11 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM)
203-11.3 Composition and Grading
Asphalt rubber hot mix finish course shall be ARHM-GG-C.

SECTION 207 – GRAVITY PIPE
207-17 PVC PLASTIC PIPE
207.17.1 General
A. PVC PLASTIC PIPE

1. PVC plastic pipe (SDR-35) shall conform to the requirements of Section 207-17 of the Standard Specifications. Pipe class to be referenced in table 207-17.1.

PVC plastic pipe shall be constructed to the lines and grads shown on the plans for designated sizes and shall comply with the construction methods set forth in Section 306of the Standard Specifications.

2. PVC plastic pipe shall be measured and paid for at the contract unit bid price per linear foot for each designated size in accordance with Sections 306of the Standard Specifications and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in reinforced PVC plastic pipe, complete in place, as shown on the plans, and as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

B. SANITARY SEWER PIPELINE (4” AND 6” PVC)

1. Sanitary Sewer (4” And 6” PVC) “C” installation shall conform to the following standards and specifications.

1. PVC Pipe ASTM D-2321
Pipe bedding for PVC sewer pipe shall be ½-inch crushed rock per Section 200-1.2 of the SSPWC.

The material used for construction of gravity sewer collection system shall be new and unused PVC pipe and shall conform to the specifications as set forth in SSPWC Subsection 207-17. All pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034 and shall have a minimum SDR of 35.

Testing shall conform to SSPWC Sections 306-7.8.2.2 (Water Exfiltration) and 306-

7.8.2.4 (Air Pressure). Should any section of pipeline fail to pass these tests, the pipe shall be removed and repaired or replaced, and re-tested, until it satisfactorily passes the test.

TP-11

2. Payment for Sanitary Sewer pipe will be in accordance with Subsection 306-15 of the SSPWC and additionally shall include fittings, permanent and temporary resurfacing and replacing striping in kind.

C. PRIVATE PVC WATERLINES (1/2” to 3”)

1. Methods and Materials: Installation of PVC (C-900) waterline shall conform to SSPWC subsection 207-17.1 and 306. PVC pipe shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on the plans for designated sizes.

2. Testing shall conform to SSPWC Sections 306-7.8.2.2 (Water Exfiltration) and 306-

7.8.2.4 (Air Pressure). Should any section of pipeline fail to pass these tests, the pipe shall be removed and repaired or replaced, and re-tested, until it satisfactorily passes the test.

D. TRENCHES FOR PRIVATE WATER AND SEWER

1. This section covers trenching for water and sewer pipes and trenching for any other utility (i.e. drainage pipe) not covered by another Section of the specifications.

Contractor shall locate all known utilities prior to trenching for new pipelines. The Contractor at the Contractor’s expense shall repair any damage to existing or new electrical, telephone or communication, gas, sewer, water, and storm drain, and irrigation facilities.

2. Trench Safety: Before beginning excavation for a trench five feet or more in depth, the Contractor shall submit to and shall receive the acceptance (approval) of the Engineer of a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground. Such plan shall be submitted at least five days before the Contractor intends to begin work on the trench.

If such plan varies from the shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer.

Nothing herein shall be deemed to allow the use of shoring, sloping, or protective system less effective than that required by the Constriction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety. No excavation shall start until the Engineer has accepted the Contractor’s shoring plans and Contractor has obtained a permit from State Division of Industrial Safety and given a copy of the permit to engineer.

The Contractor shall provide and install adequate sheeting, shoring, and bracing, or equivalent method for the protection of life or limb, which shall conform to the applicable safety orders, when applicable. Nothing in these specifications shall be construed as imposing tort liability on the Owner or any of its employees.

E. TRENCH BACKFILL

1. Imported Trench Backfill
TP-12
Imported trench backfill shall be required when native trench material has a moisture content greater than 4% above the optimum moisture content as measured in accordance with ASTM 1557, or does not meet the gradation requirements for imported trench backfill given below.

Imported trench backfill shall include material one foot above the pipe up to the existing pavement structural section.

All imported trench backfill material shall be a quarry waste or similar material with 100% passing a 3” screen, no more than 15% passing a #200 sieve and a sand equivalent of 20 minimum using California Test Method No. 217.

F. SANITARY SEPARATION

1. Sanitary separation shall be maintained as required in the Owner and/or State Standard details. The Engineer shall be notified immediately upon discovery of conflicting sewer laterals. A field determination will then be made by the Engineer as to which method of sanitary separation shall be used.

SECTION 209 – PRESSURE PIPE
209-1 IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
209-1.1 Ductile Iron Pipe
209-1.1.2 Materials
All flanged pipe joints shall be joined utilizing Type 316 Stainless Steel nuts, washers and hexhead bolts. Gasket shall be full-faced, cloth reinforced Buna-N rubber.

Flex and transition couplings used to join pipes in water main construction shall have all threaded parts and joining hardware fabricated from Type 316 Stainless Steel.

Pipe harness assemblies, valve and fitting restraints and shackle-clamp assemblies shall be joined utilizing Type 316 Stainless Steel all-thread rod, nuts, bolts and washers. Clamps, shackles and other hardware may be carbon steel or ductile iron where appropriate, but must be coated liberally with corrosion protective mastic compound.

Bolted connectors fabricated from stainless steel shall have threaded parts coated liberally with an approved anti-seize compound.

All bolted and threaded fasteners shall be manufactured in the United States of America and shall conform to the minimum requirements for strength, material construction and dimension as established by the ASTM and the ANSI Specifications. All fasteners shall be accompanied by written certification from the manufacturer stating compliance with the appropriate specification.

TP-13
All mechanical joints shall be restrained joints.

Water main fittings shall be manufactured in accord with AWWA C110 (ANSI A21-10) and shall be ductile iron. Cast Iron fittings shall not be accepted. Compact body fittings (AWWA C153) will not be permitted unless otherwise specified. Mechanical joint fittings shall be manufactured in accord with AWWA C110 and shall have retainer glands. All flanged pipe and fitting shall be shop fabricated, not field fabricated. Adapter flanges shall be ANSI B16.5 pattern, Class 150 flanges. Bolts and nuts for all installations shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel. Threads shall be coated with a liberal amount of anti-seize compound. Flange gaskets shall be full-faced Buna-N, nylon impregnated rubber.

Ductile iron pipe fittings and valves buried underground shall be protected with a polyethylene encasement (plastic film wrap) in accord with AWWA C105 (ANSI A 21.5). Wrap shall be loose 8-mil thick polyethylene.

SECTION 210 PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
210-1 PAINT
210-1.4 Paint Materials.

Submittals:

1. Materials List:
a. The Contractor shall furnish the articles, equipment, materials, or processes specified by name in the Contract Drawings and specifications. No substitutions will be allowed without prior written approval of the Owner. b. Complete material list shall be submitted prior to performing any work. Material list shall include the manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used.
c. Equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Owner may be rejected and the Contractor required to remove such materials from the site at his own expense.
d. Approval of any item, alternate, or substitute, indicates only that the products or products apparently meet the requirements of the Contract Drawings and specifications on the basis of the information or sample submitted. 210-1.5.1 Metal fabrications: Priming and painting of all metal fabrications shall be as per Section 304-2.3.2.
210-1.6.1 General. [Replace the following]:

The paint for traffic striping and marking shall be as specified in Section 310.

TP-14
The paint for concrete curbs shall be the following, or an approved equal:

A. J.E. Bauer Company #2133 A-9 Red.

B. J.E. Bauer Company #2134 A-9 Green.

C. J.E. Bauer Company #1864 A-9 Blue.

Thinner shall not be mixed with paint. Paint shall dry "tack-free" within thirty (30) minutes. Paint used for pavement legends and striping shall be a compound of paint and glass beads. 210-1.6.5 Reflective Material. Shall be as specified in Section 310. 210-3 General [Replace with the following]:

All metal fabrications shall be metalized per Section 304.

SECTION 211 – MATERIAL TESTS
211-2 COMPACTION TESTS
211-2.1 Laboratory Maximum Density [Replace with the following]:

Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate new construction may be used as fill material subject to Soils Engineer's inspection and approval. 211-2.2 Field Density
Field density tests will be made by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer during the course of construction at the expense of the Owner. If field density tests indicate that any portion of the compacted subgrade has density lower than that specified, the Contractor shall rework that portion until the specified density is obtained.

Retest of areas which have failed compaction will be performed by the Owner’s Soils Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. All fill material and subgrade compaction shall be as noted in project soils report as prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.

SECTION 212 – WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 212-5 VALVES
212-5.2 Butterfly Valves
212-5.2.1 General
All butterfly valves shall be of the tight-closing, rubber-seat type, conforming to the design standards of ANSI/AWWA C504 latest revision, except where noted herein.

Valves shall be bubble-tight at the rated pressure in either direction and shall be TP-15
suitable for throttling service and/or operation after longs periods of inactivity.

Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 Certified or have similar certification up and above AWWA. All butterfly valves shall be from the same manufacturer. Valves shall be manufactured by the Henry Pratt Co. or approved equal.

All valve bodies shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126, Class B with ANSI B16.1 flange drilling. All valves shall have 316 stainless steel exterior body bolts. Discs shall be of the concentric design. Valve discs shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 with a 316 stainless steel edge. Valves shall have a one piece through shaft of 18-8 stainless steel, corresponding to the requirements of AWWA C504, latest revision. The shafts shall fasten to the disc by means of a threaded disc pin or through pin providing a positive leak proof connection of the shaft to the disc.

Seats shall be simultaneously bonded and vulcanized to the body of the valve. All interior surfaces in contact with water, excluding stainless steel and disc shall be rubber lined or epoxy coated. Valves with the rubber seat located on the valve disc will not be permitted. Seats shall be designed so that no adjustments or maintenance is required.

All shaft bearings shall be of the self-lubricating, corrosion-resistant, sleeve type.

Bearings shall be designed for horizontal and/or vertical shaft loading. Shaft packing shall be self-adjusting and suitable for pressure or vacuum service. The flow path for valves shall be fully rubber lined. The valve disc shall be Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated with an AWWA NSF-61 coating system or liquid epoxy on wetted interior surfaces 16 mils, holiday free. Exterior coating shall have 16 mils of liquid epoxy. All valves to be painted at the factory by the valve manufacture.

All valves shall be hydrostatic and leak tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C504, latest revision with the following modification: Valves shall be tested and rated at 200 PSI to facilitate field system hydro-test. All valves to be tested with the actuator installed as a complete unit by the valve manufacture. Provide certified test reports with all valve shipments. Manufacturer furnishing valves shall present proof of compliance with ANSI/AWWA C504, latest revision. The valve actuators are to be installed and tested at the factory by the valve manufacture. All actuators shall be provided with 316 stainless steel exterior body bolts.

SECTION 214 – TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND

PAVEMENT MARKERS
214-4 PAINT FOR STRIPING AND MARKINGS
214-4.1 General
Temporary striping shall be Rapid Dry paint. Final striping shall be reflectorized thermoplastic.

For blue paint for ADA Parking Stalls, paint shall be Waterborne Traffic Line paint. 214-6 PAVEMENT MARKERS
TP-16
All pavement markers shall comply with Section 85 of the State of California Standard Specifications.
214-6.3 Non-Reflective Pavement Markers
214-6.3.1 General
All new non-reflective pavement markers Types A and AY shall be ceramic. 214-6.4 Retroreflective Pavement Markers
214-6.4.1 General
All retroreflective pavement markers shall be 3M Series 290 with glass-covered faces, or approved equal.

PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION METHODS
SECTION 300- EARTHWORK
SECTION 300.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.
300-1.1 General:

1. All site grading, earthwork preparation, presaturation, compaction, etc. shall be as outlined in these specifications and the plan documents, and per project soils report prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.

2. All clearing and grubbing, grading and earthwork shall be performed per plans, technical specifications and in accordance with the Geotechnical Report.

3. Following Owner approval of Contractor, herbicide (Roundup or approved equal), and prior to the pulverization process (See Section 301) Contractor shall apply herbicide to all existing turf areas designated for removal within all proposed synthetic turf areas and not within 5’ of the dripline of the adjacent existing trees. Any and all turf within 5’ of existing trees shall be manually surface-scalped down to the beginning of the root zone and removed.

Contractor shall have a Licensed Pest Control Advisor submit to the Owner a Pest Control Recommendation for the application of any pesticide/herbicide on Owner property. It must be applied by a Qualified Applicator. Both of these licensees are regulated by the California State Department of Pesticide Regulation. All chemicals shall be applied in accordance with registered label instruction and manufacturer’s recommendations.

The turf kill process shall last for a period of not less than 15 days to kill all living plant material (except existing trees). During the turf kill process, the area shall be allowed to dry out.

TP-17
Following complete turf kill (to be approved by Engineer) scalp turf areas down to the beginning of root zone. Any and all turf within 5’ of drip line of trees shall be manually scalped down to the beginning of the root zone. Remove all scalped turf from the project site per Section 300-1.3.

Following turf kill and removal, process exposed subgrade per Section 301.

4. Any and all earthwork/demolition within 5’ of dripline of existing trees shall be conducted with the oversight/supervision of the City Arborist to verify no damage shall be imparted to existing trees.

5. Perform grading within contract limits, grading around trees, including adjacent transition areas to new elevations, levels, profiles, and contours indicated.

6. Any existing tree roots encountered which are 2” or greater in dimension shall be hand dug/excavated. Cutting of any roots 2” or larger in dimension will be performed under the supervision and approval of the City Arborist. No ripping of existing roots 2” or larger in dimension shall be permitted.

7. Removal of existing trees as noted on demolition plan shall include stump grinding of existing roots to a depth of 24”. Contractor shall provide Owner approved backfill of stump ground holes. Resultant grade shall be compacted to 85% unless otherwise noted on plans or Geotech Report. Finish grade shall be smoothly feathered and transitioned to adjacent grade.

Site Grading

1. Perform grading within contract limits, including adjacent transition areas to new elevations, levels, profiles, and contours indicated. Check subgrade surfaces parallel to finished surface grades. Provide uniform levels and slopes between new elevations and existing grades.

2. Grade surfaces to assure areas drain away from structures and to prevent ponding and pockets of surface drainage. Check subgrade surfaces. Subgrade shall be free from irregular surface changes and as follows:
a. The subgrade at any point shall not vary more than 0.10 foot above or below the grade established by the Improvement Plans if the structural section indicates placing surfacing on native material.
b. The subgrade at any point shall not vary more than 0.10 feet above the grade established by the Improvement Plans if the structural section indicates placing an aggregate base or sub-base material on native materials. c. Precise Grading: Fine grades shall be set to the grades/elevations established by the improvement plans.
d. Paved Areas: Shape surface of fine grade areas to line, grade, and crosssection indicated. Check compacted subgrade. Subgrade shall be suitable to TP-18
receive paving base materials, per Standard Specifications. Subgrade tolerance plus 0, minus 1/2".
e. Granular Base: Check subgrade surface. Subgrade surface shall be smooth and even, free of voids, to the required subgrade elevation. Compacted subgrade shall be suitable to receive granular base materials per Standard Specifications. Tolerance 1/2" in 10'.

3. Uniformly distribute and spread soil. Provide additional imported topsoil, if required, per Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021 in the Appendix to complete the work. Use loose, dry weed-free topsoil. Do not use muddy topsoil. Place during dry weather.

4. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles, and contours of fine grades.

5. Remove stones, roots, weeds, and debris while spreading topsoil materials. Rake surface clean of stones 1" or larger in any dimension and all debris. Provide surfaces suitable for soil preparation provided under lawn and planting work. Contractor shall be responsible for ‘rock picking’ and removal of all rocks, stones, and boulders one (1) inch in diameter and greater in all areas not requiring concrete paving. Removal of rocks from site shall be in compliance with state and local codes.

6. Perform grading within contract limits, including adjacent transition areas to new elevations, levels, profiles, and contours indicated. Grading and earthwork for the new construction shall include excavation of the existing grade as necessary to “key” in to existing grade the proposed surface. Spoils from such operations shall be relocated and stock piled by the contractor. Provide subgrade surfaces parallel to finished surface grades. Provide uniform levels and slopes between new elevations and existing grades.
300-1.2 Preservation of Property
Consult the records and Contract Drawings of adjacent work and of existing services and utilities which may affect site work operations.
300-1.3 Removal and Disposal of Materials
Removal and disposal of material shall be done by Owner approved licensed and Franchised Commercial Solid Waste Haulers. A current list of approved haulers can be found on the Owner’s website at: http://newportbeachca.gov/index.aspx?page=157 and then selecting the link for Franchised Haulers List.
300-1.1 General
The work shall be done in accordance with Section 300-1.1 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction except as modified and supplemented herein.

The Contractor shall dispose of all excess or waste material and shall include all fees for such disposal in the appropriate bid items.

TP-19
The Contractor shall maintain the job site in a clean and safe condition. The Contractor shall remove any broken concrete, debris or other deleterious material from the job site at the end of each workday or as directed by the Engineer. All areas of roadway removal and replacement shall have a minimum trench width of 3-feet to facilitate maximum compaction. Contractor shall meet with the Engineer to mark out the areas of roadway removal and replacement.

Non reinforced concrete and asphalt wastes generated from the job site shall be disposed of at a facility that crushes such materials for reuse. Excess soil and other recyclable solid wastes shall not be disposed of at a sanitary landfill.

The Contractor shall maintain monthly tonnage records of total solid wastes generated and solid wastes disposed of at a sanitary landfill. The Contractor shall report said tonnage monthly to the Engineer and provide appropriate confirmation documentation from the recycling facility. All material disposal manifests shall be provided to the Engineer prior to release of final retention.

The Contractor shall dispose of all excess or waste material and shall include all fees for such disposal in the appropriate bid items
Concrete Curb, Walk, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Driveway, and Alley Intersections.

Concrete shall be removed to neatly sawed edges with saw cuts made to a minimum depth of two (2) inches. Joins to existing pavement lines shall be full depth sawcuts. Final removal between the sawcut lines may be accomplished by the use of jackhammers or sledgehammers. Pavement breakers or stompers will not be permitted on the job. The Engineer must approve final removal accomplished by other means.

Miscellaneous:

In addition to the work outlined in Subsection 300-1 of the Standard Specifications, the following items of work are included under Clearing and Grubbing unless otherwise covered by a specific bid item.

1. Maintain dust control at all times by watering; including developing water supply and furnishing and placing all water required for work done in the contract, including water used for extra work.

2. Provide for traffic control and all signs, barricades, striping and flashers necessary to maintain proper control, per approved Traffic Control Plans (as provided by contractor)

3. Protection and maintenance of utilities, trees. fences, walls, and other facilities within the construction zone, except those specifically directed by the Owner Representative to be removed or relocated.

4. Other items of work as directed in these Special Provisions.

5. Remove asphalt concrete paving and base material.

TP-20

6. Remove PCC concrete.
300-1.5 Solid Waste Diversion
Non-reinforced clean concrete and asphalt wastes generated from the job site shall be disposed of at a facility that crushes such materials for reuse. Excess soil and other recyclable solid wastes shall not be disposed of at a sanitary landfill.

Miscellaneous:

1. Maintain dust control at all times by watering; including developing water supply and furnishing and placing all water required for work done in the contract, including water used for extra work.

2. Provide for traffic control and all signs, barricades, striping and flashers necessary to maintain proper control, per approved Traffic Control Plans (as provided by contractor)

4. Other items of work as directed in these Special Provisions.

5. Remove asphalt concrete paving and base material.

6. Remove PCC concrete.
300-2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Trenching/grading Adjacent to Existing Trees.
“The Contractor is responsible for clearing and grubbing, pruning and selectively removing tree roots that interfere with the work. The Contractor shall submit recommendations by its subcontracting arborist to the Owner for review for safely pruning and removing tree roots. No roots shall be pruned or removed unless this submittal is returned to the Contractor as satisfactory. Prior to the submittal, the Contractor shall arrange to meet with the Owner’s Arborist at the site to discuss Owner standards and requirements.

TP-21
If required, the submittal shall adhere to the following guidelines.

1. Root Pruning
a. Whenever possible, root pruning shall only be done on one side of the tree unless specifically authorized by the Owner’s Arborist.
b. Roots shall be cleanly severed using a root-pruning machine, axe or comparable tool.

2. Arbitrary Root Cut
a. A straight cut with a root-cutting machine shall be made. b. The cut shall be a maximum 14” below grade for sidewalks and 26” for curbs, and shall be made as far away from the tree base as possible.

3. Selective Root Pruning
a. This process involves selectively removing offending roots when a tree trunk or root flare is less than 3 (three) feet from the sidewalk and/or the size, species or condition of the tree warrants a root cut to be hazardous to the tree or when there is only one minor offending root to be removed and/or the damage is minimal (i.e., only one panel uplifted, etc.)
b. Selective root pruning shall be performed with an ax or stump-grinding machine instead of a root-pruning machine.
c. All tree roots that are within the sidewalk construction area shall be removed or shaved down.
d. Roots greater than two inches in diameter that must be removed, must be pre-approved by the Owner’s Arborist.
e. Roots shall be selected for removal on the basis that will have the least impact on the health and stability for the tree.

Where it is necessary to excavate/grade adjacent to existing trees, the Contractor shall use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation in areas where two (2) inch and larger roots occur shall be done by hand. All roots two (2) inches and larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap, to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a ditching machine is run close to trees having roots smaller than two (2) inches in diameter, the wall of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through. Trenches adjacent to trees should be closed within twenty-four (24) hours; and where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be kept shaded with burlap or canvas.

Any and all grading within 5’ of dripline of existing trees shall be performed under the supervision of the Owner.

TP-22
300-2.6 Surplus Material
All surplus material including excavation, asphalt, concrete, etc. shall be disposed of in a legal manner, in compliance with the City of Gardena Recycling Program and at the expense of the Contractor.
300-3 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
300-3.1 General
Footings shall bear on approved undisturbed bearing soil. 300-3.4 Inspection [Add the following after the first paragraph]:

1. Contractor shall provide adequate notice, cooperate with, provide access to their work, obtain samples, and assist testing agency and their representatives in execution of their function.

2. Fill Materials: Contractor shall provide testing of proposed import materials to verify suitability for use, gradation of material, moisture-density relation by ASTM D1557 and percent of organic materials.

3. When, during progress of work, field tests indicate that installed compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, provide additional compaction until specified density is achieved or remove and replace defective materials with new materials as directed by the Owner Representative. Cost of additional labor, materials, and testing to attain specified density shall be at Contractor's expense.

4. Do not cover or enclose work of this section before obtaining required inspections, tests, approvals, and location recording.

5. Submit reports for testing and inspection of the following, as directed by the Owner Representative.
a. Subgrade surfaces
b. Footing subgrade
300-3.5 Structure Backfill

1. All fill material is subject to testing and inspection.

2. Fill materials: shall be per project soils report as prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.

3. Granular base: per project soils report as prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.

4. Granular fill: per project soils report as prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.

TP-23

5. Obtain inspection and approval of subgrade surfaces from the Project Geotechnical Engineer prior to filling operations. Scarify, dry, and compact soft and wet areas; remove and replace unsuitable subgrade materials with an approved compacted fill material. Take corrective measures before placing fill materials.

6. Soil stabilization: When exposed subgrade surfaces become spongy during construction operations and soil stabilization is required, stabilize subgrade materials, as directed by the Owner Representative.

7. Spread approved fill material per Section 800.

8. Compaction:
a. Compact subgrade and fill material of all areas shall be as noted on project soils report as prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.
b. Water settling, puddling, and jetting of fill and backfill materials as a compaction method are not acceptable.
c. Maintain moisture content of materials, during compaction operations within required moisture range noted on project soils report as prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A and to the satisfaction of the Project Geotechnical Engineer to obtain indicated compaction density.
d. Provide adequate equipment to achieve consistent and uniform compaction of fill and backfill materials.
300-5.2 Imported Borrow
QUALITY ASSURANCE: The Soils Report shall control all aspects of this Work. If a discrepancy occurs between this specification and the Soils Report, the Soils Report shall take presidency.

A. Professional Observation: Perform Work of this Section under the inspection and approval of the Geotechnical Engineer. Give Geotechnical Engineer not less than 48 hours advance notice of readiness for inspection.

B. Source Quality Control: Obtain approval by Geotechnical Engineer of imported fill material before material is brought to site, and same approval of excavated material for use in fills or backfills prior to placing.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Conform off-site excavation, backfill, and compaction to requirements of public authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for required permits and inspections.

TP-24
SECTION 301- SUBGRADE PREPARATION, TREATED MATERIALS AND PLACEMENT

OF BASE MATERIALS
301-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
301-1.2 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A. Below any and all improvements with the exception of synthetic turf.

1. All subgrade preparation shall be performed in accordance with the Geotechnical Report, See Appendix A.

2. The upper 12 inches of the exposed subgrade should be pulverized, moisture conditioned, and recompacted to a minimum 90 percent relative compaction, in accordance with ASTM D 698.

3. Subgrade pulverization should be performed utilizing a pulverization machine (such as a Caterpillar RR-250 Road Reclaimer, or equivalent) that is capable of thoroughly pulverizing the subgrade to the satisfaction of the project geotechnical engineer.

4. Project Geotechnical Engineer shall review and approve pulverized soil to verify existing organics have been sufficiently pulverized prior to grading. Contractor shall be responsible for continued pulverization to the satisfaction of the project geotechnical engineer prior to commencing with grading operations.

B. Below any and all improvements with the exception of synthetic turf.

1. All subgrade preparation shall be performed in accordance with the Geotechnical Report, See Appendix A.
3011.6 SOIL STERILANT
301-1.6 General
All areas indicated on the plans to receive asphalt concrete pavement over native material shall be prepared in accordance with Section 300 of the Standard Specifications concerning subgrade preparation. In addition, after the compaction is completed, the Contractor shall apply a soil sterilant to the subgrade. Application shall be by spray equipment which provides good mechanical agitation and even coverage of the area to be treated. Spray equipment shall be calibrated before material is applied, and the Owner’s decision as to effectiveness of the spray equipment shall be final. Great care shall be taken to apply soil sterilant to the designated asphalt concrete areas only. Concrete or asphalt may be placed immediately after placement of soil sterilant. Soil Sterilant shall be Casaron 50W. or approved equal, as supplied by Target Specialty Products, Santa Fe Springs, CA., (800) 352-3870. 301-1.6.1 Operator's License
TP-25
The Contractor's operator applying the soil sterilant shall be licensed by the State of California, Department of Food and Agriculture and registered with the Office of the Agricultural Commissioner of Los Angeles County as a pest control applicator. 301-1.6.2 Application
Any soil sterilant which is approved in writing by a licensed pest control advisor (for the purpose to which it will apply) may be used upon acceptance by the Owner Representative.

The dye shall not stain concrete or masonry. Certification shall be furnished to the Owner Representative showing the purchase receipt and manufacturer’s recommended rate of application of the material.
301-2 UNTREATED BASE
301-2.1 General - Crushed Aggregate Base (CAB)
A. Crushed Aggregate Base shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the plans and in accordance with the methods of Section 301-2 of the Standard Specifications.

Crushed Aggregate Base shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the plans and in accordance with the methods of Section 301-2 of the Standard Specifications.

Prior to placement of Crushed Aggregate Base, the subgrade soils shall be processed, moisture-conditioned, per Project Geotechnical Report prepared by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A and recompacted to a minimum depth of 90 percent relative compaction.

SECTION 302 - ROADWAY SURFACING
302-4 SLURRY SEAL SURFACING
302-4.8 Spreading and Application
Slurry seal shall be sufficiently cured for vehicle traffic without tracking or damage to the surface by 3:00 p.m. on the same day. In case of damage done by vehicles and/or pedestrians upon slurry that has not been sufficiently cured, the Contractor shall replace all of the damaged work at the Contractor’s expense and no additional compensation shall be made by the Owner. Upon the completion of the day’s slurry seal or seal coating, streets and parking lots shall be temporarily striped within 24 hours. Final striping shall be installed no more than ten (10) working days after placement of slurry seal.

Prior to applying slurry seal, the Contractor shall clean all work surfaces and remove all loose materials, vegetation, oil, and other foreign material. Additionally, all locations with weeds shall be treated by an approved weed-killer before any slurry seal is applied. 302-4.9 Field Sampling and Testing
Upon the Engineer’s direction, the Contractor shall slurry seal test sections within the construction limits for each batch of slurry seal mix. The Contractor shall apply the slurry seal TP-26
test sections as directed by the Engineer. No slurry seal shall be applied until the test slurry seal sections have been approved the Engineer. The costs of these slurry seal tests shall be included in the contract price paid for slurry seal and no additional compensation shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor. Field samples that do not meet the requirements of Table 302-4.9.1 shall be re-tested. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cost associated with the re-testing.
302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
302-5.1 General [Replace the last paragraph with the following]:

Asphalt Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 203-6.1 as modified by these Special Provisions.

All cracks ¼-inch or greater in width shall be cleaned, have weed kill applied and sealed with a hot-applied crack sealant approved by the Engineer. In residential areas, no highway rated equipment or trucks are to be used (eg. no super trucks). Use truck and trailers or transfers.

Use of heavier rated trucks must be approved by Engineer. The top layer of asphalt concrete (finish course) shall be placed in a separate lift. Longitudinal joints between two passes of asphalt concrete shall be along a lane line. Holes, spalls, and cracks greater than 1/4-inch in width shall be filled and compacted to 95% minimum. The pavement shall then be cleaned with a power broom.
302-5.2 SEAL COAT
A. Prepare the surfaces, mix the sanded emulsified asphalt slurry seal coat material and apply 1 coat over all new paving and 2 coats over existing areas in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and referenced standards. Adjust type of slurry mixture used and application procedures based on actual project conditions and direction of placement so that a uniform distribution is obtained at all points.

1. SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE APPLICATION OF ASPHALT EMULSION SEALCOAT a. The work covered by this specification includes the design, testing, and quality control required for the proper production of an Asphalt Sealcoat product and all materials, equipment and workmanship required for the application of an Asphalt Sealcoat to an existing asphalt concrete pavement where shown on the plans, as specified in these specifications and the special provisions, and as directed by the City. b. Asphalt sealcoats under this specification shall be manufactured by uniformly blending asphalt cement, water, aggregates and various admixtures in a central plant capable of producing a minimum of 2,400 gallons per hour of finished product. Components shall be measured and recorded by weight controls that consistently incorporate all additives as required by these specifications. Blending the admixtures with the base asphalt emulsion shall be accomplished through the use of a high shear mechanical mixer to provide a uniform mixture.

TP-27
c. Asphalt Sealcoat shall be stored in a tank equipped with power driven mixing or agitation equipment capable of keeping the Asphalt Sealcoat thoroughly and uniformly mixed. The stored material shall be protected from freezing in cold weather conditions.

2. MATERIALS
a. The materials for Asphalt Sealcoat immediately prior to mixing shall conform to the following requirements:
i. The asphaltic cement shall have a penetration rating of 15 to 35 pen and an SHRP rating of PG-70-10. The asphaltic cement shall be modified to contain a minimum of 8% recycled crumb tire rubber incorporated into the asphalt cement by use of a high shear Siefer mill. The modified asphalt cement shall be combined with slate, clay, water, and admixtures to form a stable emulsion, with a pH not greater than 7.0 and solids content not less than 49%. ii. Water shall be potable and of such quality that the water will not separate from the emulsion before the sealcoat is applied.
iii. Mineral Aggregate components shall be 100% passing the #50 mesh sieve.

These components shall be natural or manufactured, consisting of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles that are clean and free from decomposed materials, organic materials and other deleterious substances. The sieve analysis of the Mineral Aggregate components shall be determined in accordance with A.S.T.M. test method c136.

3. MIX CERTIFICATION
a. At least 7 days before asphalt sealcoat placement commences, the Contractor shall submit to the City for approval a laboratory report of tests and Manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering the specific materials to be used on the project. b. The tests shall be performed by a laboratory capable of performing the applicable Asphalt Sealcoat Manufacturers Association (ASMA) recommended tests.

4. SURFACE PREPARATION
a. The surface to receive Asphalt Sealcoat must be free of all foreign material and dry immediately prior to sealcoat application. Cleaning may be by air blowing, vacuum, mechanical sweeper, washing, or other techniques as approved by the City. If washing the existing surface is used, the surface shall not have any standing water prior to application of the sealcoat. Salt, deicing agents, fertilizers, hard water deposits and other such chemicals will promote lack of bonding of the sealcoat to the existing surface and may require extraordinary cleaning measures.
b. Cracks in the asphalt surface shall be treated in accordance with City approved methods. Prior to application of sealcoat, deposits of grease or oil shall be cleaned by TP-28
scraping, burning and/or the use of approved detergents in order to promote adhesion of the sealcoat. After cleaning the areas described above, the areas shall be sealed with an oil seal. Oil seal shall be a quick drying latex emulsion with suitable admixtures manufactured specifically for the purpose of isolating the Asphalt Sealcoat from any residual oils, petroleum, grease or gas stained pavement. c. The properties of the oil seal shall be such as to be compatible with the Asphalt Sealcoat.
d. In areas where the foreign oil or grease has penetrated the asphalt concrete such that cleaning as described above is not effective, the affected areas shall be removed to the depth necessary but not less than 3/4 inch. On excessively weathered surfaces, areas such that cleaning operations leave a film of dust, or on areas previously sealed with coal tar, a tack coat of SS1h (CSS1h) asphalt emulsion conforming to ASHTO T56, shall be applied. The tack coat shall consist of One (1) part SS1h (CSS1h) with Four (4) parts water applied at a rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gal/sq yd. The tack coat must be dry prior to application of the Asphalt Sealcoat.
e. Areas of structurally unsound asphalt concrete such as alligator cracking, low spots (bird baths) or rutting must be properly repaired as required by the City, prior to placement of the Asphalt Sealcoat.
f. Asphalt Sealcoat shall not be placed on new asphalt concrete until after a 30 day minimum cure period or as directed by the Project Manager.

5. APPLICATION
a. Application of the Asphalt Sealcoat shall be by mechanical means using rubber faced squeegees, brooms, distributor bar/wand or combinations of these or other techniques approved by the manufacturer and by the City.
b. The Asphalt Sealcoat being applied shall be uniform and free flowing, free of lumps and other inconsistencies. Potable water may be added for dilution as necessary as per manufacturer's recommendation for consistency and spread-ability but shall not exceed 20% by volume or as directed by City. If, after the addition of the maximum allowable water volume the seal coat is unsuitable, the materials shall be rejected and removed from the site.
c. The Asphalt Sealcoat shall consist of two application coats of material. Additional applications may be required as directed by the City. The sealcoat must be thoroughly dry prior to application of the second or subsequent coats. d. Application of Asphalt Sealcoat in ambient temperatures in excess of 100 degrees F shall require pre-treatment of the asphalt concrete surface with a water mist. The water TP-29
must not be standing, but the surface should be damp prior to sealcoat application. This treatment is also recommended for application on porous surfaces where the water within the sealcoat may be absorbed too quickly by the existing pavement surface. e. Care will be taken to ensure that the sealcoat material is kept off of all structures and appurtenances (concrete pads or curbs, light standards, wheel stops, buildings, etc.) on or surrounding the asphalt surface. Any material that is sprayed or splashed onto these structures shall be immediately removed by whatever means necessary, without damaging the structure, at the contractor's expense.
f. Asphalt Sealcoat shall be applied uniformly over the prescribed area in continuous parallel lines in a manner so that no ridges or uncoated areas shall exist, application rates will vary depending on the texture of the existing asphalt surfaces, with rough surfaces requiring more material than smooth surfaces.
g. The following application rates are guidelines only:
i. Smooth, dense surfaces 20 gals/1,000 square feet (.18 gaUyd2) ii. Medium surfaces 30 gals/1,000 square feet (.27 gal/yd2) iii. Rough surfaces 40 gals/1,000 square feet (:36 gal/yd2) h. When the Asphalt Seal coat is to be placed on a severely weathered pavement surface with a very rough texture, the inclusion of ground copper slag additive is recommended for the first coat. The ground copper slag additive shall be 100% passing the #50 mesh sieve. The addition of the ground copper slag additive shall not exceed 4 pounds per gallon without approval of the City. The inclusion of the ground copper slag additive may require the addition of 1-3% Liquid Latex binder (Micro-lock) per gallon of undiluted Asphalt Sealcoat or as directed by City.
i. The properties of the ground copper slag additive shall be determined in accordance with Cal Test 202 testing methods.
j. The properties of the Liquid Latex shall be such as to be compatible with sealcoat product, and approved by the manufacturer

6. WEATHER
a. Asphalt Sealcoat shall only be applied when the ambient temperature is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Sealcoat shall not be applied when there is an imminent threat of rain, freezing temperatures, during rain, or when the surface contains standing water.

7. MISCELLANEOUS
a. All patching will be with a 3" asphalt lift
TP-30
b. Contractor is responsible to field measure for their final bid price. c. Traffic shall not be allowed on the Asphalt Sealcoat until the sealcoat is thoroughly cured, which in warm weather conditions, is approximately 24 hours. Minor scuffing or power steering marks may occur on a newly applied surface in warm weather. d. Notifications placed throughout the park shall state the time and date that the surfacing will take place. Suitable tow-away signs may be posted prior to the surfacing. Should work not occur on the specified day, a new notification shall be distributed. e. Irrigation watering shall be kept off for at least 24 hours prior to and 48 hours after the application of Asphalt Sealcoat.
f. Upon request, the contractor shall supply the City with scale tags for the project containing the following information: product name, project name or location, gallons/tons supplied for the project. Striping for parking and traffic flow should be done only after the sealcoat has thoroughly dried.
g. Finished dry and thoroughly set surface seal is to be smooth, tough, resilient, uniform color and free from coarse textured areas, lap marks, ridges and other surface irregularity.
h. Seal coat shall be allowed to cure before allowing traffic on the pavement. Light dusting of the area with fine sand may be used to remedy excess seal coat application. 302-5.4 Tack Coat
Tack coat material shall be Grade SS-1h emulsified asphalt 302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading. [Delete the sixth paragraph and add the following]:

The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete shall be accomplished in a single, continuous operation by means of a self-propelled mechanical spreading and finishing strike-off assembly capable of being accurately regulated and adjusted to distribute a layer of the material to a definite predetermined thickness. The machine shall be equipped with automatic screed controls. The automatic screed controls require a reference system for the automatic system to follow. This reference can be the base on which asphalt concrete is being placed, the lane next to the material being placed, or a string line. The automatic screed control can also follow a traveling reference system. A traveling reference system may be a ski attached to a control arm, which notes changes in base contours and adjust the screed automatically to compensate. A string line or traveling reference system shall be used to allow the automatic control to adjust screed height as necessary to maintain proper longitudinal (length-wise) grade of the pavement. To maintain proper transverse (width-wise) grade, the automatic screed control shall use a pendulum system attached to a beam running between the two screed pull arms.

TP-31
When paving is of a size of in a location that use of a self-propelled machine is impractical, the Owner Representative may waive the self-propelled requirement.

At those location where new asphalt concrete pavement overlay joins existing asphalt pavement, the Contractor shall rake out all aggregate 3/8 inch or larger and feather the new paving to form a smooth transition to join the existing pavement. 302-5.8 Manholes (and Other Structures)
All manholes, water valve boxes, and utility boxes shall be temporarily lowered prior to pavement cold milling. Upon completion of asphalt concrete finish course, the top of manholes, water valve boxes, and utility boxes shall be adjusted to grade to meet the smoothness requirement as specified in 302-5.6.2.
302-6 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
302-6.4 Concrete Finishes

1. General. Unless otherwise specified in this Subsection, retardant finish, broom, and steel trowel finish concrete used in the hardscape areas shall be constructed of concrete prepared as prescribed in Subsection 201-1. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall be constructed in accordance with Section 302-6 “Portland Cement Concrete Pavement’” except as modified herein.

2. Job Sample. Contractor shall pour and finish a 6' X 6' square sample of each concrete finish and color using the specified materials and construction techniques. Each sample shall include final finish color as specified, sawcut joints with crack chaser, expansion joints, and shall meet with the Owner's approval prior to placing any production concrete. Production pours are not acceptable as field samples.

Sample 6’ X 6’ concrete panels shall be prepared by Contractor for Owner’s review three weeks prior to scheduled production pours. Samples not meeting with Owner’s satisfaction shall be repoured and finished at no cost to Owner. Preparation of ‘Top Cast’ no. 5 finish samples (see Section 201-1.2.4) shall be prepared per supplier’s specifications. After approval of Job Sample

3. Subgrade Preparation: All soil material used as compacted fill or material processed in place or used to backfill trenches should be moistened, dried, or blended as necessary to achieve the optimum moisture content for compaction, and densified with relative compaction as determined by ASTM Test Method D 1557 per project Geotechnical Report, by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.

The subgrade under any sidewalks and flatwork shall be scarified to a depth of at least eight (8) inches or as recommended by the Project Soils Report (See Appendix A), and moisture shall be applied to maintain free water on the surface for at least 24 hours prior to placing concrete and the subgrade shall then be prepared without compactive effort.

TP-32
Preparation. Subgrade shall be compacted and prepared in accordance with project soils report as prepared by by Southern California Geotechnical dated November 18, 2021. See Appendix A.
302-6.7 Traffic and Use Provisions
The Contractor shall not allow vehicular traffic on new concrete until the concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi. High early strength concrete may be attained to meet the time constraints by the use of additional portland cement or chemical admixtures in accordance with Section 201-1 and with prior approval of the Engineer. The cost of high early strength concrete shall be included in the unit prices for all concrete bid items.

SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
303-1 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
303-1.1 General
Concrete structures shall conform to the provisions of the Standard Specifications and herein.

Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 billet steel conforming to ASTM A615.

The surfaces of all concrete structures shall receive a smooth trowel finish, unless otherwise specified on plans.

The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools and materials to construct reinforced Portland Cement Concrete structures and appurtenant work to grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or staked in the field. The Contractor shall submit method and sequencing for placement of P.C.C. for the Owner's Representative approval at least ten (10) working days prior to commencement of work.

Unless otherwise specified, transverse construction joints shall be placed in all reinforced sections at intervals of not less than ten (10) feet or more than fifty (50) feet. The joints shall be in the same plane for the entire structure and, for concrete thickness greater than 6-inches, shall be keyed as directed by the Owner’s Representative. 303-1.3 Forms
Forms shall be braced to withstand the pressures developed and shall be tight to prevent the loss of mortar. Formed wall surface shall be free of any unevenness greater than 1/4-inch when checked with a 10-foot straight edge.

Concrete in walls with side slopes flatter than 3/4:1 shall be placed on suitable material which has been overfilled, compacted, and trimmed to true grade. Backforms shall be used where the side slope is 3/4:1 or steeper.

A clear non-staining form release agent which will not discolor nor affect the surface texture of the concrete and does not react with any ingredients of the concrete shall be used. The cost of TP-33
Furnishing and Placing Form Release agent shall be included in the cost of Portland Cement Concrete.

All form work for concrete construction (mow curbs, paving, concrete curbs, gutters, walls, etc) shall be reviewed and approved by Owner prior to pouring of concrete. 303-1.7 Placing Reinforcement.
303-1.7.1 General
Aluminum and plastic supports for reinforcement shall not be used.

Bars shall be accurately spaced as shown on the Plans and spacing of first bar immediately adjacent to transverse construction joint shall be one-half the required spacing shown on the Plans. In no case shall the clear distance between parallel bars be less than 2-1/2 diameters of the bar, or a minimum of 2-inches. Unless otherwise shown on Plans, embedment of reinforcing steel (other than stirrups and spacers) shall be 1-1/2 inches clear depth for #8 bars or smaller, and shall be 2-inches clear for #9 bars and larger. Where placement of reinforcing steel requires alternate bars of different size embedment, requirements shall be governed by the larger bar. Stirrups and spacers shall be embedded not less than 1-inch clear depth.

Measurement of embedment shall be from the outside of the bar to the nearest concrete face.

Tack welding or butt welding of reinforcing bars will not be permitted. 303-1.7.2 Splicing
Reinforcing bars may be continuous at locations where splices are shown on the plans, at the option of the Contractor. The location of splices, except where shown on the Plans, shall be determined by the Contractor, based upon using available commercial lengths where applicable.

Splices shall consist of placing the reinforcing bars in contact and wiring them together in such a manner as to maintain the alignment of the bars and to provide minimum clearances.

No lapped splices will be permitted at locations where the concrete section is not sufficient to provide a minimum clear distance of 2-inches between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar.

The clearances to the surface of the concrete shall not be reduced. Length of lapped splices shall be as noted on Contract Drawings.

Splices of tensile reinforcement at points of maximum stress shall be avoided; however, any deviation from splices shown on the Plans shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. 303-1.8 Placing Concrete
303-1.8.1 General
The Contractor shall exercise caution in placement of concrete in walls and congested areas to ensure proper consolidation and that there are no voids, and protection of waterstops in position. Adequate provisions shall be made for visual inspection of concrete placement, consolidation and waterstop protection. Pouring of walls in lifts, use of smaller maximum TP-34
aggregate sizes, or other methods as necessary may be proposed by the Contractor and will be permitted only after evaluation by the Owner Representative. 303-1.9.2 Ordinary Surface Finish
Ordinary Surface Finish shall not apply to rock pockets which, in the opinion of the Owner Representative, are of such extent or character as to affect the strength of the structure materially or to endanger the life of the steel reinforcement. In such cases, the Owner Representative may declare the concrete defective and require the removal and replacement of the structure affected.
303-1.10 Curing. [Amend first paragraph with the following]:

Exposed concrete surfaces shall be sprayed with Type 2 curing compound at a uniform rate of one gallon per 150 square feet.

Surface retardant: Surface retarder shall be “Top Cast” No. 5 surface retarder or approved equal, provided by Dayton Superior. “Top Cast” retardant to be applied at specific paving conditions noted on plans and shall utilize Top Cast release agent, as noted on plans.

Contractor shall contact Chuck Poole of Dayton Superior Corporation (714) 287-6342 to meet on site to discuss application procedures prior to preparation of concrete samples.

Concrete sealer shall be Siloxane WB Concentrate sealer. Dilution to be 1:9 minimum to 1:7 maximum. Provided by Mike Davis of Innovative Concrete Products and Marketing, Inc.

Phone: (949) 498-7077. See manufacturer recommendations. 303-1.11 Payment [Replace paragraph one with the following]:

Portland Cement Concrete structures shall be included in the contract price and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment and doing all work required to construct the structure in conformity with the plans and specifications.

Should the Contractor request and obtain permission to use admixtures for his own benefit, he shall furnish such admixtures and incorporate them in the concrete mixture at his expense, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

Should the Owner Representative direct the Contractor to incorporate any admixtures in the concrete when their use is not required by these specifications, furnishing the admixtures and adding them to the concrete will be paid for as Extra Work a provided in Subsection 3-3, as amended by these Special Provisions.
303-4.1.1 General
Graffiti Coating

1. Graffiti Coating
All exposed concrete block at shall receive GSS-10 Graffiti Coating System (GSS100 and GSS-200 Finish Coat), or Owner approved equal. Application shall be per TP-35
manufacturer specifications. Provide 4′ x 4′ sample mock-up of sealed material for review and approval prior to production applications. 303-5 CONCRETE CURBS, CONCRETE PAVING, CONCRETE SEATING, WALKS, GUTTERS, ACCESS RAMPS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
303-5.1 Requirements
303-5.1.1 General

1. Concrete curbs, ramps, and walks shall conform to the Standard Specifications and supplied herein in conjunction with Construction Document Plans and Details.

2. Sidewalks and curb access ramps shall be opened to pedestrian access on the day following concrete placement. In addition, all forms shall be removed, irrigation systems shall be repaired, and backfill or asphalt concrete patchback shall be placed within 72 hours following concrete placement. 303-5.2 Forms
303-5.2.1 Standard Form

1. Use flexible metal, 1" lumber or plywood forms to form radius bends.

2. Install, align and level forms, stake, and brace forms in place. Maintain following grade and alignment tolerances except where accessibility concerns would bring noncompliance if tolerances were allowed. a. Top of Form: Maximum 1/8” in 10’0”.
b. Vertical Face: Maximum 1/8” in 10’0”.

3. The Contractor shall include all fine grading and compaction with regard to setting forms during concrete placement.

4. The Contractor shall notify Owner a minimum of 36 hours in advance of scheduled form board review. All form work for hardscape construction (mow curbs, concrete paving, curbs, gutters, walls, etc.) shall be reviewed and approved by Owner prior to pouring of concrete. All formwork shall be constructed utilized the projects digital base plan.

Modifications in formwork necessary for alignments to be straight, true to line with well transitioned radial, curved sections shall be provided by the contractor at no additional cost to the contractor.
303-5.4 Joints
303-5.4.1 General
TP-36

1. Provide expansion joints using pre-molded joint filler at concrete work abutting curbs, walks, and other fixed objects.
a. Locate joints as indicated. When not indicated, provide joints at maximum 24’-0” on center for curbs and walks. Align joints in abutting curbs and walks.

Contractor shall provide a joint layout play for review and approval by the Owner prior to construction of joints.
b. Install expansion joint fillers full-width and depth of joint. Recess top edge below finish to receive sealants as indicated on the details. c. Provide joint fillers in single lengths for the full slab width, whenever possible.

Fasten joint filler sections together when multiple lengths are required. d. Where intersecting joints occur join top edge and continue any spliced joints without deviation of form line or direction.
e. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement. f. Control joints shall be provided to a depth equal to 1/3 the thickness of the concrete pour.
303-5.5 Finishing
303-5.5.2 Curb
The Contractor shall install or replace curb markings that indicate sewer laterals on the face of the curb. The Contractor shall mark the curb with a chiseled “S” for sewer. A two (2) day notice to the Engineer is required for requests to the Owner to determine the location of sewer laterals.
303-5.5.4 Gutter
The Contractor shall hold the flow line tolerances to within 0.01 feet of those elevations shown on the plan.

SECTION 304 - METAL FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION FOR ALL METAL FENCING, MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS, ETC.
304-2.3 Ornamental Metal
304-2.3.1 General. The materials for ornamental metal items. 63510 304-2.3.2
TP-37

1. Fabrication: Miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view shall only be fabricated with materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including, but not limited to, pitting, seam marks, trade names, and roughness.

Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding prior to cleaning, treating or applying surface finishes.

2. Shop Assembly: Work shall be fitted, shop assembled, and ready for erection when identified on construction schedule.

3. Workmanship: Form metals to shape and size with sharp lines and angles, and with smooth surfaces and faces free from distortion. Mill fastening to a close fit.

Do all fitting true to line. Bend or form all tubing, pipe, and other members to continuous and true curves with all joints flush and neatly fastened together. All fabrications shall be square, plumb, straight, and true.

4. Jointing and Connections: Jointing and intersections shall be accurately made in true planes and tightly fitted to hairline joints. Connections shall be welded. Do not use screws unless specifically shown or required - if used, screws shall be countersunk with a metal compatible with the members being joined.

5. Welding: Welding shall conform to the requirements of the "Structural Welding Code" ASW D1.l. Where welds are exposed to views, bevel members prior to welding and weld full. Grind welds flush, smooth, level with the adjacent surfaces. Grind welds at intersecting members to sharp lines.

6. Holes: Accurately space to centers such that boles are not poorly or carelessly seamed.

7. Anchorage: Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

8. Insulation of metals from contact with masonry and different metals from contact with each other shall be provided where necessary to prevent corrosion.

9. Debur and grind smooth all welds and rough spots.

10. All ornamental metal fabrications shall receive a sandblast finish to remove all oil, grease, lint, and rust.

11. All ornamental metal fabrications shall receive 2 mil. zinc thermal sprayed metalized finish per ANSI/AWS C218.93, ASTM C633, ASTM B833-93, and SSPC-CS Guide 23.00, June 1, 1991. Contact: Zinc Nation, Inc. Contact:

Whitney Blakeslee. Phone: 949-837-1839. Contractor shall submit sample of metalizing for review and approval prior to metalizing ornamental metal items.

Contractor shall submit receipt of all metalized items and proof that all metal items were metalized per these specifications prior to painting.

12. Coating System Type
TP-38
a. System Type: Epoxy/urethane, as provided by Tnemec Company Incorporated, or approved equal, 417 East Weber Street, Compton, CA 90222. Phone 310-637-2363. Fax 310-637-4161. Web Site www.tnemec.com.

Equivalent materials of other manufacturers may be substituted only by approval of the architect. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer’s literature for each product giving the name, generic type, descriptive information solids by volume, recommended film thicknesses and a list of five projects where each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service. No request for substitution shall be considered that would decrease the film thickness of offer a change in the generic type of coating.
b. Surface Preparation: Zinc thermal sprayed metalized finish. c. Prime Coat: One coat Tnemec Intermediate, 115, 3 to 5 mils. DFT.[4] d. Finish coat: One coat Tnemec Urethane, 1028 or 1029, 2 to 3 mils. e. Color: ‘Dove Gray’ (38GR), to be approved by City.
f. Contractor shall submit proof that Tnemec paint was the material used on all metal items.

13. Provide a minimum of 2 gallons of field touch up paint to City for their on-going use.
304-2.3.3

1. Installation: Ornamental metal items and fencing shall be erected in accordance with the plans. All work shall be erected square, plumb, straight, and true.

Perform all required cutting, drilling, and filling. Accurately set and properly secure. Attach work in true planes, in alignment, properly reinforced and stiffened.

2. Embedded Items: Provide miscellaneous metal items to be embedded or installed in concrete.

3. Coordination with Related Work: Provide all anchors, sleeves, bolts, and connecting members necessary for securing metal work to other adjacent or adjoining work. Provide and install angles and other reinforcement. Do all cutting, puncturing, drilling, tapping, or modifying of adjacent or adjoining work where necessary for proper installation. Furnish all sockets, bolts, anchors, and other portions of this work to the various trades where needed that are to be built into the structure and be responsible for their accurate spacing and setting.

TP-39

4. Expansion and Contraction: Assemble and install work with adequate provisions to prevent objectionable distortion and overstressing from expansion and contraction. Construct to be weather-tight where exposed to the weather.

5. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection of miscellaneous metal items, all rusted areas, abraded areas, bolts and nuts, and all welds shall be thoroughly cleaned and spot primed with same material used for shop painting.

6. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Provide all necessary steel items required which are not specified elsewhere. All necessary supports, guides, brackets, etc., shown or required shall be provided.
304-2.3.4 Measurement and Payment. Payment for ornamental metal items and their painting shall be made as part of the lump sum contract price and no additional compensation will be allowed.

SECTION 306 – OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION
306-1 OPEN TRENCH OPERATIONS
306-1. General [Delete the first paragraph and substitute the following]:

For the purpose of shoring or bracing, a trench is defined as an excavation in which the depth is greater than five feet.
[Add the following subsections:]
Removal of ground water shall be performed to a level sufficiently below the structure subgrade to ensure a firm and stable subgrade for the construction of structures. All costs for such dewatering shall be included in the prices bid for the various items of work except as may be otherwise specified in the General Specifications.
306-1.1.6 Bracing Excavations
Trench safety and shoring of excavations shall comply with the requirements of the General Specifications. The Contractor shall be required to supply a copy of any permit required by the Division of Industrial Safety at the time of the pre-construction meeting.

The cost of furnishing and installing bracing or other provisions required for worker protection shall be borne by the Contractor. All material used for protection shall be removed from the project unless it has been approved to remain in place by the Owner Representative. 306-1.1.7 Dewatering
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times during construction, ample means and devices to promptly remove and properly dispose of all water entering the excavations or other parts of the work. No concrete footing or floor shall be laid in water, nor shall water be allowed TP-40
to rise over them until the concrete or mortar has set at least eight (8) hours. Water shall not be allowed to rise unequally against a wall for a period of twenty-eight (28) days.

Dewatering for the structures and pipelines shall commence when ground water is first encountered and shall be continuous until such time as water can be allowed to rise in accordance with the above paragraph. Dewatering shall be accomplished by well points or some other method which will ensure a dry hold and preservation of final lines and grade of the bottoms of excavation, all subject to the approval of the Owner Representative.

Disposal of water from dewatering operations shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

Payment for removal of water shall be included in the items of work which require the dewatering, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 306-1.3.4 Compaction Requirements. [Replace with the following]:

All trench backfill shall be densified to 90% minimum relative compaction. Jetting will not be permitted unless specifically approved in advance by the Owner Representative. 306-1.5.2 Permanent Resurfacing
All testing of underground installation at any given point shall be completed before the surface course is placed at that point.
306-2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, AND PROTECTION OF PIPELINE MATERIALS,

FITTINGS, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES
306-2.7 Shutdowns of Existing Pipelines
306-2.7.3 Temporary Bypasses
The Contractor will be responsible for the installation of a temporary by-pass system as described in these special provisions and the plans.

The Contractor can commence installation of new mains once the temporary by-pass system is in place and has passed a disinfection test. The Contractor shall have the by-pass line inspected by Owner personnel prior to commencing the project.

If at any time, the temporary by-pass water system is damaged, it will be the Contractor’s responsibility to repair and replace any damaged or destroyed section to the satisfaction of the Owner.

The Contractor shall adhere to the following special provisions when installing temporary bypass systems:

1. Water service shall be maintained to all customers at all times except as necessary to install the temporary by-pass system. The Contractor’s method of providing such continuous service shall be approved by the Owner prior to construction.

TP-41

2. It is recommended that 2-inch steel by-pass lines shall be installed. All temporary piping crossing streets shall be buried and paved flush with the existing surface.

3. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Owner’s Utilities Division for disinfection, bacteriological testing and certification of the by-pass systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for disinfection and flushing the by-pass systems as well as pulling the bacteriological samples and running the incubations tests for coliform bacteria.

4. The Contractor will then remove meters and connect services to temporary by-pass systems. Upon acceptance by the Owner of new water mains, after the water services have been reinstalled by the Contractor, the Contractor will disconnect the temporary by-pass system at each service connection and reinstall meters.

The temporary water main by-pass system installed at any given time shall not exceed the water services between any single alley section (from local street intersection to local street intersection) unless approved in writing by the Owner in advance of the work, including specific limits of the proposed by-pass.
306-8 PREFABRICATED PRESSURE PIPE
306-8.9 Pipeline Pressure Testing, Disinfection, and Commissioning The Contractor will be responsible for pressure testing, disinfection and flushing of the new water mains. The Contractor shall adhere to the following special provisions for pressure testing, disinfection and flushing of new water mains and services.

1. Water service shall be maintained to all customers at all times except as necessary to transfer service from the old main to the new main. The Contractor’s method of providing such continuous service shall be approved by the Owner prior to construction.

2. Contractor shall pressure test new main lines including any services prior to disinfection.

3. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Owner’s Utilities Division for disinfection, bacteriological testing and certification of the new main and services. The Contractor shall be responsible for disinfection and flushing the main and services as well as pulling the bacteriological samples and running the incubation tests for coliform bacteria.

4. Upon successful completion of the pressure testing and disinfection, the Contractor shall thoroughly flush all mains and services prior to connection to customers. Flushing of services shall be done at the new angle stop and fittings shall be utilized such that the meter box is not flooded by the flushing operation
SECTION 310 - PAINTING
310-5 PAINTING VARIOUS SURFACES
310-5.4 Painting Metal Guard Rails
TP-42
a. All exposed metal railings shall receive a protective coating as manufactured by International Protective Coatings, available from Dunn Edwards Paints, or approved equal. Apply per manufacturer’s specifications. Submit colors to Owner for review.
b. First coat Interseal 670 HS primer (color to match top coat). b. Second coat Interthane 990 HS top coat (color per plan). 310-5.6 Painting Traffic [and Parking Lot] Striping, Pavement Markings, and Curb Markings.
310-5.6.1 General. The third paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following paragraphs:

Unless otherwise shown on the plans, transitional traffic lane striping for detours shall conform to Owner Standard Plans. No lane shall encroach within five feet of an open excavation or within two feet of a longitudinal curb.
310-5.6.4 Geometry, Stripes and Traffic Lanes; and 310-5.6.5 Traffic Stripes and Markings.

The following paragraph shall preface these Subsections:

TRAFFIC SIGNING, STRIPING, MARKINGS, AND MARKERS
Description - This work consists of placing traffic signs, raised pavement markers, traffic striping, pavement legends, and markings as shown on the plans in conjunction with traffic signal work.

All work shall conform to these specifications, Owner Standard Plans and Specifications, and to any supplementary standards or specifications which may be referred to herein.

Materials - Traffic paint shall be fast dry solvent borne conforming to Section 84- 3, Painted Traffic Stripes and Pavement Markings, of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. All paint shall be reflective and shall conform to requirements of the South Coast Air Quality Management District.

Reflective raise pavement markers shall conform to Section 85, Pavement Markers, of the Caltrans specifications and to the applicable provisions of the Caltrans Standard Plans.

Sign face reflective sheeting shall be high intensity grade with protective overlay.

Construction - Application of traffic striping shall conform to applicable provisions of Section 310-5.6 of the “Standard Specifications” and Caltrans Standard Specifications.

All traffic striping shall consist of two coats of paint. A minimum of seven days shall be provided between coats and/or as directed by the Engineer.

Installation of traffic signs shall conform to applicable provisions of Section 56-2, Roadside Signs, of Caltrans specifications.

TP-43
Installation of reflective pavement markers shall conform to Section 85, Pavement Markers, of the Caltrans Standard Specifications and to the applicable provisions of the Caltrans Standard Plans. Old raised pavement markers shall be removed as directed by the Engineer.

Stencils shall conform to the Caltrans Standard Plans.

No striping work will start until the Engineer has approved the spotted or “cat-tracked” markings. No section of any street shall be left without the proper striping for more than 24 hours, or over weekends or holidays.

Traffic striping and markings shall conform to Owner Standard Plans, the Caltrans Traffic Manual, the Caltrans Maintenance Manual, American Disabilities Act and Title 24 unless otherwise shown on the plans.
310.5.6.7 Layout, Alignment, and Spotting.

The first sentence of the first paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

The Contractor shall perform all layout, alignment and spotting. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary control points for all striping and markings and shall be responsible for the completeness and accuracy thereof to the satisfaction of the Owner Representative. Traffic striping shall not vary more than H-inch in 50 feet from the alignment shown on the plans.

The following paragraph shall be added following paragraph two:

Spotting shall be completed prior to the removal of any existing stripes. Existing striping and markings shall be removed prior to painting, but in no case shall any section of street be left without the proper striping for more than 24 hours, or over weekends or holidays.
310-5.6.8 Application of Paint. Delete the third and fourth paragraphs and replace with the following:

Traffic and parking lot stall stripes and pavement markings on new surfacing shall be applied in two (2) coats, except where otherwise shown on the plans. The first coat of paint shall have dried for two (2) weeks before application of the second coat on existing surfacing, traffic stripes and pavement markings may be applied in one coat.

Add the following paragraphs:

The completed pavement markings shall have clean and well-defined edges and shall conform to the dimensions shown on the plans, except that minor variations may be accepted by the Owner Representative.

Drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint tracked by traffic shall be immediately removed from the pavement surface by blast cleaning or other methods approved by the Owner Representative. All such removal work shall be at the Contractor's expense.
310-5.6.11 Pavement Markers
All pavement markers shall comply with Section 85 of the State of California Standard Specifications. Non-reflective markers shall be ceramic. All new markers shall have glass faces of be 3M Series 290.

TP-44
SECTION 314 – TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS, AND

PAVEMENT MARKERS
314-2 REMOVAL OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 314-2.1 General
The Contractor shall remove all existing thermoplastic traffic striping and pavement markings prior to application of slurry seal by a method approved by the Engineer. 314-4.3.5 Application
Each coat of paint for any traffic stripe, including glass beads, shall be applied in one pass of the striping machine, regardless of the number, widths and patterns of individual stripes involved.

One 2-lane streets, when the first coat of the centerline stripe is applied in the same direction as the stationing increases, the right-hand spray gun of the 3 spray guns used to apply a double yellow stripe shall be used to apply a single yellow stripe. When the first coat of the centerline stripe is applied in the direction as the stationing decreases, the left-hand gun of the 3 spray gun used to apply double yellow stripe shall be used to apply a single yellow stripe.

The second coat of centerline striping shall be applied in the opposite direction that the first coat was applied.

A 1-coat, 3-inch (75 mm) wide black stripe shall be painted between the 2, 4-inch (100mm) wide yellow stripes of a double traffic stripe. If the 2, 4-inch (100 mm) wide yellow stripes are to be applied in 2 coast, the black stripe shall be applied concurrently with the second yellow stripe.

On existing pavement surfaces, traffic striping and pavement markings shall be applied in 1 coat. Paint to be applied in 1 coat shall be applied at an initial rate of 1 gallon per 107 square feet, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. The final rate shall be approved by the Engineer.

On new pavement surfaces, traffic striping (except the black stripe between the yellow stripes of the double traffic stripes_ and pavement markings shall be applied in 2 coats unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified in the Special Provisions. If the paint is applied in 2 coats, the first coat shall be thoroughly dry before the second coat is applied.

Paint is to be applied in 2 coast shall be applied at the initial trails as shown; Paint Type First Coat (sq ft per
gallon)
Second Coat (sq ft per
gallon)
Waterbone Paint 215 215
Acetone-Based
Paint
360 150
The final application rates shall be approved by the Engineer. The volume of paint applied shall be measured by inserting a calibrated rod into the paint tank. At the option of the Engineer, if the striping machine is equipped with paint gauges, the volume of paint may be determined by using the paint gauges.

Glass beads shall be mechanically applied to the surface of each coat of paint, except black paint, prior to the paint setting. Glass beads shall be embedded to a depth of one-half of their diameter. Glass beads shall be applied at a rate of 5 pounds per gallon of paint unless TP-45
otherwise specified in the special provisions or directed by the Engineer. The amount of glass beads applied shall be measured by inserting a calibrated rod into the glass bead tank of the striping machine.

PART 6 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
SECTION 600 – ACCESS
600-1 GENERAL
Ten (10) working days prior to starting work, the Contractor shall distribute construction notices to residents within 500 feet of the project, describing the project and indicating the limits of construction. The Owner will provide the notices.

Forty-eight (48) hours prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall distribute to the residents a second written notice prepared by the Owner clearly indicating specific dates in the space provided on the notices when construction operations will start for each block or street.

An interruption of work at any location in excess of 14 calendar days shall require renotification. The Contractor shall insert the applicable dates and times at the time the notices are distributed.

The written notices will be prepared by the Owner, but shall be completed and distributed by the Contractor. Errors in distribution, false starts, acts of God, strikes or other alterations of the schedule will require Contractor re-notification using an explanatory letter furnished by the Owner.
600-2 VEHICULAR ACCESS
The Contractor shall install and maintain in place “NO PARKING-TOW AWAY” signs (even if streets have posted “NO PARKING” signs) which shall be posted at least forty-eight hours in advance of the need for enforcement. The signs will be provided by the Owner at no cost to the Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to charge $2.00 per sign following any excessive abuse or wastage of the signs by the Contractor. In addition, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Owner’s Police Department at (949) 644-3717 for verification of posting at least forty-eight hours in advance of the need for enforcement. Owner “Temporary Tow-Away, No Parking” signs are available at the Public Works Department public counter.

The Contractor shall print the hours and dates of parking restriction on the “NO PARKING - TOW AWAY” sign in 2-inch high non-erase letters and numbers. A sample of the completed sign shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to posting. (Following paragraph is optional for covering street sweeping signs and parking meters and posting temporary permit parking signs.)
After posting temporary ”NO-PARKING-TOW AWAY” signs, the Contractor shall cover street sweeping signs and parking meters, on those streets adjacent to the construction with a “PERMIT PARKING ONLY” sign, in a manner approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall also cover all street sweeping signs on the opposite side of the street from where he has posted the “PERMIT PARKING ONLY” signs, in a manner approved by the Engineer.

Immediately after construction is complete and the alley is opened to traffic, the Contractor shall remove all signs and uncover the street sweeping signs. Owner “PERMIT PARKING ONLY” signs are available from the Engineer.

TP-46
600-3 PEDESTRIAN ACCESS
Pedestrian access to all storefronts, offices, residences, etc., within the limits of work must be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer to provide advance notice to any and all establishments whose access will be impacted by construction operations, particularly sidewalk construction.

SECTION 601 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION AND

MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES
601-1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install signage, barricades, delineators, yellow safety ribbons, up to four (4) changeable message signs (CMS), and any other measures deemed necessary by the Engineer to safely direct the public around areas of construction, and into and out of the affected establishments. Messages for the CMS shall be updated by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.

Project Identification Signage
Contractor shall provide the following:

A. Provide 8’ x 4’ foot long project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter to Architect’s design and colors.

B. List title of Project, names of Owner, Architect and Contractor.

C. Erect on site at Location determined by Owner.

D. Sign shall remain in place through construction period and shall be removed only after dedication of the project, or at a time determined by the Owner.

E. Provide temporary directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

F. No other signs shall be allowed except those required by law and those indicated within these Special Provisions.
601-2 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN (TCP)
Typical TC Plans
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, at least five working days prior to the preconstruction meeting, a traffic control plan showing typical closures and detour plan(s). The Contractor shall be responsible for processing and obtaining approval of a traffic control plans from the Engineer. The Contractor shall adhere to the conditions of the traffic control plan.

Typical closures shall conform to the provisions of the WORK AREA TRAFFIC CONTROL HANDBOOK (W.A.T.C.H), Latest Edition. Traffic control and detours shall incorporate the following items:

1. Emergency vehicle access shall be maintained at all times.

2. The locations and wordings of all barricades, signs, delineators, lights, warning devices, parking restrictions, and any other required details shall ensure that all pedestrian and vehicular traffic will be handled in a safe manner with a minimum of inconvenience to the public.

3. All advanced warning sign installations shall be reflectorized and/or lighted.

4. The Contractor shall accommodate the Owner’s trash collection. If the Contractor elects to work on a street or alley during its trash collection day, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to make alternative trash collection arrangements by TP-47
contacting the Owner’s Refuse Superintendent, at (949) 718-3466 and all affected property Owners.

5. At a minimum, the Contractor shall maintain one lane of traffic in each direction at all times when completing the work. Temporary striping may be required and shall be shown on the TCP.

6. The Contractor will not be allowed to close alleys or streets. Lane closures may be approved by the Owner Engineer, if necessary to complete the work if it does not cause any other impacts to residents, such as loss of street parking. The Contractor shall make special accommodations to provide access for residents with disabilities where any lane closures may exist.

7. Sidewalk closures in non-residential areas, or as determined by the Owner, shall be set with barricades and SIDEWALK CLOSED signs on barricades at the closure and SIDEWALK CLOSED USE OTHER SIDE signs on barricades at the closest crosswalk or controlled intersection.

8. Sidewalk closures in residential areas, or as determined by the Owner, shall be set with barricades and SIDEWALK CLOSED signs on barricades at the closure.

9. Bike lane closures shall have BIKE LANE CLOSED AHEAD, BIKE LANE CLOSED, and SHARE THE ROAD/BICYCLE WARNING (combination) signs mounted on barricades in order on the approach and at the closure.

10. Operation of the CYC allowing pedestrian and vehicular traffic and access to the parking lot and facility during construction.

PART 8 - LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION
SECTION 800 – MATERIALS
800-1 LANDSCAPE MATERIALS
800-1.1 Topsoil
800-1.1.1 General
Topsoil shall be Class A (imported).
800-1.2 Soil Fertilizing and Conditioning Materials
800-1.2.3 Commercial Fertilizer
Commercial Fertilizers shall be delivered in sacks with the manufacturer’s label showing weight and analysis attached to each sack.

The following commercial fertilizer and soil preparation shall be for bid purposes only.

Exact quantities and recommendations may be determined by the soil fertility and agricultural suitability test to be prepared by Waypoint Analytical or approved equal testing facility.

Contact: Joe Kiefer 714-282-8777 Tests shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner and shall be included in the base bid. Test shall be performed after final TP-48
grading has been completed and approved by the Owner. All areas to be landscaped with a slope of 3:1 or less shall be cross-ripped or otherwise tilled to a depth of 18 to 24 inches.

Uniformly spread and cultivate amendments thoroughly by means of mechanical tiller into top 6” of soil in all planting areas. Application rate per 1,000 square feet:

Commercial Fertilizer 6-24-24XB 25 pounds
Soil Sulphur 20 pounds
Granular Gypsum 100 pounds
Nitrogen stabilized sawdust (“Greenbook” – Type I Organic Amendment) 6 cu yds Planting Tablets: Provide slow-release type with potential acidity of not more than 5 percent by weight containing the following percent’s by weight of nutrients listed; 20-nitrogen, 10- phosphoric acid, 5-potash, 2.6 combined calcium, 1.6-combined Sulphur 0.35-iron (elemental) from ferrous sulfate. Provide in 21 gram tablets manufactured by Agriform, or other approved.

Landscape areas with gradients greater than 3:1 shall receive a uniformity broadcast application of the following:
300 lbs./Acre Nitroform (38-0-0, WIN 27%)
600 lbs./Acre 6-24-24XB

1. For amending of turf and general landscape areas on slopes greater than 3:1 scratch the surface of the soil, if safe and feasible to do so, prior to broadcasting fertilizers.

Fertilizers can then be broadcast at the rates indicated in the Soils Fertility and Agricultural Suitability Report per section 800-1.2.3, followed with one or two thorough irrigations to move fertilizers into the rootzone.
800-1.2.4 Organic Soil Amendment.

Paragraph 1 shall be deleted and replaced with the following: Organic Soil amendment material shall conform to Type 1 plus Redwood Shavings, as supplied by Aguinaga Company, (949) 786-9558 or equal, unless otherwise designated. Delete paragraph references to Type 2 and Type 3 soil amendments.
800-1.2.5 Mulch.

Sentence one of paragraph one shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Mulch: Provide ‘forest floor’ (0″- 4″) as supplied by Aguinaga Company, (949) 786-9558, or approved equal. Submit sample for review and approval by Owner Inspector prior to material delivery on-site.
800-1.2.6 Soil Herbicide.

Landscape areas:

A commercially manufactured non-selective herbicide (“Round-up” or approved equal) for total control of vegetation products shall meet all federal and state regulations pertaining to the use of such substances. Application and rate of application shall follow manufacturer’s recommendation. Application shall not be made until obtaining written approval from the TP-49
Owner. Following Owner approval of Contractor herbicide, Contractor shall apply herbicide to all landscape areas. Such application shall be performed in consideration of overall construction schedule and operation so as not to disrupt or interfere with the project schedule and time line.
800-1.4 Plants
800-1.4.1 General. Subsection 800-1.4.1 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

A representative number of plants may be inspected and approved at the nursery by the Owner Representative prior to shipment to the planting site. Prior to such visit, Contractor shall submit 3" x 5” color photographs of all proposed tree and shrub material for Owner's review.

Photos shall indicate proposed material and picture shall indicate material separated from the surrounding nursery stock to size and condition of proposed material to be evaluated.

Photographs of all trees shall include a person, with a height of at least 5’-6”. Photos shall be submitted seven (7) calendar days prior to specified plant material review at nursery site.

Plants shall be inspected for size and condition of root growth, insects, injuries and latent defects. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. The Owner reserves the right to reject entire lots for plants represented by defective samples. Plant condition shall be in accordance with the American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1- 1996). All plants shall have a growth habit normal to the species and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from insect pest, plant diseases, sun scalds, fresh bark abrasions, excessive abrasions, or other objectionable disfigurements. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and well hardened off. All plants shall have normal well-developed branch systems, and vigorous and fibrous root systems which are neither root nor pot-bound and are free of kinked or girdling roots. Other than the normal side pruning during the growth period, no pruning shall be done prior to inspection at the nursery. The size of the plants will correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock, or as specified in the Contract Drawings. The minimum acceptable size of all plants, measured before pruning with the branches in normal position, shall conform with the measurements, if any, specified on the Contract Drawings in the list of plants to be furnished. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner, but the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. Bare root plantings in publicly maintained areas shall be done only with special approval of Owner.

Quantities and Types. Plant materials shall be furnished in the quantities and/or spacing as shown or noted for each location, and shall be of the species, kinds, sizes, etc., as symbolized, and/or described in the Plant Legend, as indicated on the Contract Documents. The landscape Contractor is to verify all sizes and quantities on plans. Installation and use of substitute items shall not be made until the Contractor is in receipt of written approval from the Owner.

Substitution Proposals for plant material must be accompanied by substantive written proof of non-availability of material originally specified prior to bid opening. 800-1.4.2.1.9 Fertilizer.

A. Root Growth Stimulant: Stimulant shall be Tri-C Michimichi Kelp Vitamin B-l or equal, as manufactured by Cal-Liquid, Cooke, Chican, Ortho, or other approved equal.

TP-50
B. Fertilizer will not be used at time of planting. After four months, use a light application of 20:10:5 approximately 1/2 lb. nitrogen per tree cultivated into soil. 800-1.4.5 Sod (turf grass)
Turf Sod shall be Bandera Bermuda Grass (42” wide rolls), provided by West Coast Turf. Contact: John Marman (951) 272-7720.

Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Protection and Delivery of Sod:

1. Sod for site planning shall be delivered to planting site within twenty four (24) hours of harvest. Sod shall be refrigerated immediately after harvest prior to transportation. Sod shall remain moist at all times prior to planting.

2. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guarantee chemical analysis, name, trademark, purety, germination, and conformance to State law.

3. Deliver materials with legible waterproof identification labels.

4. Protect material during delivery to prevent damage.

5. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative seven days prior to delivery of all materials and shall submit an itemized list for each delivery.

B. Storage:

1. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather.

2. Protect material from damage and theft.

JOB CONDITIONS
A. Planting:

Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable according to locally accepted practices.

B. Scheduling:

Install trees and container stock plant material before Sodded Lawn and Grass installation.

REPLACEMENTS
A. Replacement
TP-51
Any materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. The Owner’s Representative shall be the sole judge as to the condition of materials. Materials to be replaced within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor within 15 days of written notification by the Owner.

Execution
A. Laying Sod:

1. Soil moisture. all areas to receive planting shall be irrigated prior to planting. Soil shall be maintained in a constant moist condition but well below field capacity.

Extreme care must be exercised to prevent over-watering to prevent soilcompaction or creating grade irregularities by heavy equipment.

2. The Contractor shall provide and install the type and quantity of turf grass sod as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. Only long roll sod of the variety specified shall be utilized.

1. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or lightly roll to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess material from sodded areas to prevent smothering.

NOTE: Mesh backing material shall be removed from sod at the time that sod is laid. The Contractor shall clean up and dispose, off-site, all mesh material and surplus sod.

4. Thoroughly water soil with a fine spray immediately after planting to saturate the sodded area to a depth of four inches.

5. After two days of thorough watering, the Contractor shall curtail watering to permit re-rolling of the sodded area to ensure proper contact with subgrade.

6. After the second rolling of the sod, the Contractor shall routinely water, fertilize and maintain sodded area until the termination of the specified maintenance period and until acceptance by the Owner.

H. Maintenance and Observation:

1. Turf type Bermuda shall be no more than 3/4 to 1 inches height at time of the first mowing. All turf areas shall be mowed, removing no more than 1/3 of the turf grass blade, and all bare spots shall be resodded prior to beginning of the maintenance period.

2. Conduct a complete review of all landscape construction items at the end of the landscape construction period to establish the time for beginning of the TP-52
maintenance period. Notify the Owner’s representative at least seven days in advance of review.

3. Maintain lawns to watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regarding and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas.

CLEAN-UP
A. After all planting operations are complete, remove all trash, excess soil, and rubbish from the property. Repair scars, ruts, or other marks in the ground caused by this work and leave the ground in a neat and orderly condition.

B. Leave the site in broom-clean condition, and wash down all paved areas within the project site. Leave walks in clean and safe condition.

C. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors, and trades and trespassers.

Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
800-1.5.3 Tree Stakes. The first paragraph shall be replaced with the following; Tree stakes shall be sharpened 2" diameter, 12′ long lodgepole pine, treated in accordance with Section 204-2.2. Stake shall be one piece and free from splits. Trees installed as 36” box and larger shall be installed with guy anchors (3/tree).

The third paragraph shall be replaced with the following:

Deadman stakes shall be duckbills or 2 x 4 inch redwood 18 inches long. Covers for wire shall be 3/4-inch Class 200 PVC pipe - 3 feet long.

The following paragraph shall be added at the end of the subsection:

A minimum of two (2) supporting tree ties or three (3) guy anchors shall be used for each tree. Tree ties shall be V.I.T. twist brace Model TB24. 800-1.5.5 Root Barriers
Root barriers shall be 24″ deep and as provided by DeepRoot Corp. (800) 458-7668, or approved equal. Installation shall be per manufacturer’s specifications. 800-1.5.6 Arbor Guards
All trees planted in turf areas shall be planted with continuous, secured Arborgard+ protective sheath at base of trunk, or approved equal. Install per manufacturers specifications. Available from: Gemplers (800) 382-8473. 800-2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS
800-2.1.1 General
The manufacturer's directions and detail Contract Drawings shall be followed unless directed by the Owner Representative or shown differently in the plans and specifications.

TP-53
800-2.1.3 Plastic Pipe for Use With Solvent Weld Socket or Threaded Fillings. Add the following before the first paragraph:

General. Use only new materials of brands and types noted on Contract Drawings specified herein, or approved equals.

Paragraph 2 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

PVC Pressure Main Line Pipe shall be Class 315 PVC solvent weld pipe with Schedule 80 fittings for pressure main pipes 2 inches and larger.

PVC Schedule 40 with solvent welded joints for pressure main piping of lesser diameter. PVC Schedule 40 solvent welded piping shall be used for all non-pressure lateral line piping.

All PVC pipe must bear the following markings:

1. Manufacturer's name

2. Nominal pipe size

3. Schedule or class

4. Pressure rating in P.S.I.

5. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval

6. Date extrusion

7. U.P.C. shield logo (IAPMO approval)
All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable I.P.S. schedule and NSF seal of approval
Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent-weld pipe and fittings shall be of type recommended by the manufacturer and shall follow installation methods prescribed by the pipe manufacturer.

All irrigation pipe using domestic water shall be white in color. 800-2.2.2 Gate Valves. The text of this subsection shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

All valves shall be as identified on the Construction Documents and per Owner review and approval.
800-2.2.4 Remote Control Valves
Remote control valve manufacturer and sizes shall be as indicated in plans and legend. 800-2.2.6 Quick-Coupling Valves and Assemblies. The text of this subsection shall be deleted and replaced with the following paragraph:

TP-54
Quick-coupling valves shall have a brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 PSI. The quick-coupling valve shall have a built-in flow control and self-closing valve and shall be supplied in 1-inch size unless otherwise required. The valve shall be equipped with a locking yellow vinyl cover.
800-2.2.7 Valve Boxes. Delete the first paragraph and replace with the following:

Valve boxes and lids shall be black in color when using domestic water and as detailed on the Plans. The boxes shall be covered with an etched polyethylene face with an ultraviolet inhibitor. The lid shall be plastic, lockable, and embossed with the valve station number on its topside. Sizes and manufacturer of the valve boxes and lids shall be as indicated on the Standard Contract Drawings.
800-2.2.8 Master Control Valves.

The master control valve manufacturer and size shall be as indicated on plan and legend. 800-2.3 Backflow Preventer Assembly
Unless otherwise instructed by the Owner Inspector, backflow assemblies shall consist of a brass reduced pressure/backflow prevention device with “Wye” strainer and 60 mesh screen as detailed and called out on the Project Plans.
800-2.4 Sprinkler Equipment
The text of this subsection shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Irrigation bodies and nozzles shall be as indicated on plan and legend. Substitutions shall not be allowed unless by written authorization from the City of Gardena.

Irrigation bodies and nozzles shall feature low head drainage, pressure regulating, and pressure compensating features. Unless otherwise approved, all pop-ups and fixed riser assemblies shall consist of plastic and stainless-steel materials.

Smaller radii turf irrigation equipment shall consist of 6-inch pop-ups. All smaller radii shrub and groundcover irrigation equipment shall consist of 6” pop-up bubbler or micro spray, unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
800-3 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
800-3.2.1 Conduit. [Replace paragraph with the following]:

Conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe as called out on the plans. Install per plans. Conduit shall conform to the applicable provisions of subsection 800-2.1.3. 800-3.2.2 Conductors
The electrical system shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code most recently adopted by the Owner. Connections between the automatic controllers and the TP-55
electric control valves shall be made with direct burial copper wire AWG-U.F. 600 volt. Pilot wires shall be a different color wire for each automatic controller. Common wires shall be white with a different color stripe for each automatic controller. Install in accordance with valve manufacture's specifications and wire chart. In no case shall wire size be less than #14.

Wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as pressure supply or lateral lines wherever possible. Install wires inside Schedule 40 Conduit anywhere it is not possible to place in pipe trench, or where wires must go under pavement. Conduit size shall be large enough to contain all necessary wires. Minimum conduit size shall be 2”.

Where more than one (1) wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together at intervals of ten (10) feet.

An expansion curl should be provided within three (3) feet of each wire connection and at least every one hundred (100) feet of wire length on runs more than one hundred (100) feet in length and also at each change of direction. Expansion curls shall be formed by wrapping at least five (5) ruins of wire around a one-inch diameter pipe, then withdrawing the pipe.

All splices shall be made with 3M - DBY wire connector, or approved equal.

Use one splice per connector sealing pack.

Field splices between the automatic controller and electrical control valves will not be allowed without prior approval of the Owner.

SECTION 801 - INSTALLATION
801-1 GENERAL
Inspection will be required for the following parts of the work:
a. At completion of rough grade prior to incorporation of soil amendments. b. Irrigation coverage test prior to initiating planting operations. c. At completion of incorporation of soil amendments and fine grading. d. Prior to digging plant pits for trees and shrubs.
e. During backfilling of plant pits with amended backfill. f. Maintenance period shall not begin until final installation inspection is made, and establishment is verified. Owner inspector shall approve commencement date of maintenance prior to the commencement of said maintenance. g. Final review and acceptance at the end of the maintenance period.

The landscape contractor or subcontractor shall provide a licensed Pest Control Advisor (PCA) prior to applying herbicide. The PCA will be responsible for preparing and approving a Pest TP-56
Control Recommendation and providing Safety Data Sheets (SDS). These items shall be included with the herbicide submittal.

The Contractor is responsible for clearing and grubbing, pruning and removing tree roots that interfere with the work. The Contractor shall submit recommendations by its arborist to the Owner for review for safely pruning and removing tree roots. No roots shall be pruned or removed unless this submittal is returned to the Contract as satisfactory. Prior to the submittal, the Contractor shall arrange to meet with the City Arborist at the site to discuss Owner standards and requirements.

If required, the submittal shall adhere to the following guidelines.

1. Root Pruning
a. Whenever possible, root pruning shall only be done on one side of the tree unless specifically authorized by the City Arborist.
b. Roots shall be cleanly severed using a root-pruning machine, ax or comparable tool.

3. Selective Root Pruning
a. This process involves selectively removing offending roots when a tree trunk or root flare is less than 2 feet from the sidewalk and/or the size, species or condition of the tree warrants a root cut to be hazardous to the tree or when there is only one minor offending root to be removed and/or the damage is minimal (i.e., only one panel uplifted, etc.)
b. Selective root pruning shall be performed with an ax or stump-grinding machine instead of a root-pruning machine.
c. All tree roots that are within the sidewalk construction area shall be removed or shaved down.
d. Roots greater than two inches in diameter that must be removed, must be pre-approved by the City Arborist.
e. Roots shall be selected for removal on the basis that will have the least impact on the health and stability for the tree.

TP-57
801-2 EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
801-2.1 General
The Contractor shall apply water as necessary to provide ideal moisture content for tilling and for planting as, herein specified.
801-2.2 Topsoil Preparation and Conditioning
801-2.2.2 Fertilizing and Conditioning Procedures. The first paragraph of the subsection shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

The planting areas shall be brought to rough grade whereupon Fertilizer and Soil Conditioning required for the native soils for the intended landscape planting shall be added based upon the recommendations of Soils Fertility and Agricultural Suitability Report. (See Section 800) The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall make two additional soils tests for agricultural fertility and suitability and fertilizer and amendment recommendations of all planting areas upon completion of excavation, topsoil backfilling, and grading. The Contractor shall amend it as necessary to comply with the soils test report at no additional cost to the Owner.
801-2.2.3 Weed Control, Grow and Kill Protocol: The following subsection shall be added:

Kill and remove all existing weeds from site areas utilizing post-emergent herbicide.

Upon completion of the irrigation system and after all designated shrub and ground covers, existing weeds and growth have been removed from the planting areas. All areas shall be watered four (4) times daily until weed seeds have germinated for approximately 21 days or unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Thereafter, watering shall cease for three (3) days to be followed by the spraying of a systemic herbicide containing the active ingredient glyphosate (Roundup-Pro, or approved equal). Spraying shall be at the labeled rate compatible with the eradication rate for the target weed species and shall be performed under the direction of a registered Pest Control Advisor. After allowing sufficient time for the herbicide to kill all remaining weeds (2 weeks minimum), the areas to be landscaped shall be raked or hoed as directed by the Engineer to remove any remaining weed stubble. All areas shall be watered for an additional 14 (fourteen) day period and then receive an additional application of the systemic herbicide per manufacturer’s recommendation. 801-2.3 Finish Grading. The following shall be added to the last sentence of the second paragraph.
…except where water is designed to flow over the same.

The following paragraphs shall be added following paragraph two:

TP-58
Finish grades shall be those indicated on the Contract Drawings or as may be controlled by existing installations. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform, and straight graded between points where elevations are noted. Minor modeling of the ground surface may be required. Landscape areas to receive turf shall be rolled with a water drum in a north/south and then east/west direction. Low spots and high spots in the terrain shall be backfilled and tamped or bladed and spread. The resultant grade shall be smoothly, evenly contoured and compacted to 85%. The gradient shall be as noted on plans.

Grading shall provide for the natural run-off of water without low spots or pockets. Flow lines shall be set by instrument and shall be the maximum gradient possible. 801-4 Planting
801-4.3 Layout and Plant Location
Quantities for shrubs and groundcovers shown on the legend are for estimate purposes only.

Final quantities for plant materials installed shall be governed by the indicated plant spacing.

Quantities for trees shall be verified in bid documents and discrepancies between the planting plans and the bid schedule shall be noted on bid schedule by Contractor at the time of bid submittal.

In the event that designated plant location is found in conflict with underground utility or structure during the planting operation an alternate location will be selected by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify utility companies for the spotting of underground facilities prior to plant acquisition and to make precautionary potholes where conflicts would be indicated on the plans or by field notations by utility representatives. The cost for utility notification and potholing shall be included in the other work items and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

Proposed tree locations, as indicated on plans shall be staked by contractor for review and approval by Owner prior to digging of plant pits for planting. Stakes shall minimum of 6’ in length and color coded to indicate variety of proposed tree planting at each of the staked locations. Review and approval of provided color-coded stake locations, with modifications/adjustments as necessary shall be provided by Owner prior to commencement of tree planting operations.

Container shrubs and groundcovers shall be placed on finish grade at locations indicated on planting plans for review and approval prior to planting. Contractor shall notify Owner 48 hours prior to scheduled review of containerized shrubs and groundcovers on grade 801-4.4 Specimen Planting [Insert before first paragraph]:

The planting pits for trees shall be excavated twice the diameter and the depth of the rootball.

Set the Tri-C or Grow-Power or equal tablets to be used with each plant on the top of the root ball while the plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified.
3 tablets per 15 gallon
4 tablets per 24 inch box
TP-59
5 tablets per 30 inch box
6 tablets per 36 inch box
7 tablets per 42 inch box
8 tablets per 48 inch and larger boxes
Planting shall be governed by the following requirements:
801-4.5 Tree and Shrub Planting
The Contractor shall amend backfill as necessary per the soils test report at no additional cost to the Owner. (Refer to Sections 800 and 801-2.3.2). The following soil amendments and fertilizer guidelines shall be used for bid purposes only. Fill holes with backfill mixtures as specified below:

1. The following material shall be thoroughly blended and used as a backfill mix in the surface 12” around trees and shrubs, and the backfill soil, 12” below finish grade should be amended if specified by the soil test report with only gypsum and / or iron sulfate. No mixing for individual planting holes will be permitted. Mix planting soil prior to backfilling and stockpile at the site. The iron sulfate should not contact cement surfaces since severe staining could occur.
8 parts by volume screened on-site soil
2 parts by volume Nitrogen Stabilized Organic Amendment 1 ½ lbs. Iron Sulfate per cu. yd. of mix
1 lb. 12-12-12 per cu. yd. of mix
5 lb. gypsum per cu. yd. of mix
1 lb. of soil sulfar per cu. yd. of mix

2. Place plants near respective pits. Set the tablets to be used with each plant on the top of the root ball while the plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified. 1 tablet per 1-gallon container
2 tablets per 5-gallon container
3 tablets per 15-gallon container

3. Remove all plants from their containers and set in plant pits.

4. Fill to proper height with amended backfill to receive the plant and thoroughly tamp the mixture before setting the plant.

5. Set plant in upright position in the center of the hole and compact the backfill mixture around the ball or roots.

6. Thoroughly water each plant when the hole is one-half filled. After water has completely drained, place planting tablets per detail. The remainder of the hole shall then be backfilled.

TP-60

7. After watering, tamp the soil in place until the surface of the backfill is level with the surrounding area and the crown of the plant is at the finished grade of the surrounding area. Do not backfill around trunks or stems.

8. After backfilling, an earthen basin shall be constructed around each plant. Each basin shall be of a depth sufficient to hold at least six inches of water. Basins shall be the same size as the container size of each individual plant. The basins shall be constructed of amended backfill material. This berm shall be leveled to finished grade alter the 60th day of the maintenance period, and prior to the ground cover hydroseeding.

9. Immediately after planting, apply water to each tree and shrub by means of a hose.

Apply water in a moderate stream in the planting hole until the material about the roots is completely saturated from the bottom of the hole to the top of the ground.

10. Apply water in sufficient quantities and as often as seasonal conditions require to keep the planted areas moist at all times, wet below the root system of grass and plants.

Generally, water once each day for 7 days in cool seasons, for 14 days in hot weather.

Berms around shrubs and trees in slopes shall be maintained for 60 days following tree planting and then removed.

11. Pruning - Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches and to compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, but never to exceed one-third of the branching structure. Upon approval of the Owner Representative, pruning may be done before delivery of plants but not before plants have been inspected and approved by the Owner.

12. No trees shall be planted within 6 feet of paved surfaces, unless specifically indicated on plans. Those trees noted on plans to occur within 6’ of curbs and/or paving shall receive continuous root barriers per Section 800-1.5.5. 801-4.6 Planting Staking and Guying.

The text of the entire subsection shall be deleted and replaced with the following paragraph:

All staking and guying shall be in accordance with the Plans, Details, and Specifications. 801-4.7 Ground Cover and Vine Planting.

The second paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Ground cover shall be planted in moist soil and spaced as indicated on the plant legend. 801-4.8 Lawn Planting
See section 800-1.4.5 Sod (turf grass).
801-4.8.1 General. This section includes the following, as noted on plans:
801-4.9.3 Seeding and Mulching
TP-61
Mulch installation shall consist of placing 3″ thick layer ‘forest floor’ (0-4”) material equal to or supplied by Aquinaga Company (949) 786-9558 over designated planter areas. See plans for areas of installation. Submit sample prior to purchase and/or placement for approval. 801-5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
801-5.1 General
Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Owner prior to start of construction to coordinate on-site inspections. Contractor is responsible for any utility company fees and permit fees and are not reimbursable by the Owner/City.

Due to the scale of Contract Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which maybe required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions.

The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between planting and architectural features, etc.

All work called for in the Contract Drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications.

The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the Contract Drawings when it is obvious in the field that unknown obstructions, grade differences, or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering.

Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner Representative. In the event this notification is not performed, the Irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary and shall perform such at \his own expense.

The fourth paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following paragraphs:

The location of connection points shown is approximate. The Contractor shall contact the utility companies and coordinate the installation of the required electrical and water services.

Following coordination with the utility companies, the Contractor shall make all necessary provisions to make the service connections called for on the plans at the places indicated or to the nearest acceptable point thereto as approved by the utility companies and the Owner Representative. Verification of the point of connections with the utility companies and the Owner Representative shall be obtained by the Contractor prior to the start of work.

All costs for making the service connections shall be paid for by the Contractor, with the exception of any utility company fees and permit fees which are reimbursable by the Owner, as per Section 7-5 "Permits" of the General Provisions.
801-5.1.1 Temporary Repairs
The Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep the irrigation system in operating condition. The exercise of this right by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the guarantee as herein specified.

TP-62
801-5.2 Trench Excavation and Backfill.

The second and last paragraph shall be deleted and the following added:

The depth of cover over pipelines and conduits shall be per Contract Documents.

The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed. A fine granular material used for bedding and backfill will be placed on all lines. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones.

The finished surface shall be restored to the grade established prior to excavation. All mounding and divots shall be graded smooth to the satisfaction of the Owner Representative.

If settlement occurs, and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, valve/utility boxes, sprinkler heads, lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments.
801-5.2.1 Trenching and Backfilling Under Paving.

Where irrigation lines are called for on the plans to be placed within a sleeve the PVC sleeve to be provided for such work shall be Schedule 40 PVC sleeve. 801-5.2.2 Trenching Adjacent to Existing Trees.

Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, the Contractor shall use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation in areas where two (2) inch and larger roots occur shall be done by hand. All roots two (2) inches and larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap, to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a ditching machine is run close to trees having roots smaller than two (2) inches in diameter the wall of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through. Trenches adjacent to trees should be closed within twenty-four (24) hours; and where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be kept shaded with burlap or canvas. 801-5.3 Irrigation Pipeline Installation
A minimum of twelve (12) inches clearance shall be maintained between “recycled” irrigation pipelines and non-irrigation pipelines/conduits.

The following paragraphs shall be added at the end of the subsection:

PVC Sleeves shall be required under areas where all hardscape materials shall be installed.

Sleeving shall be done per detail on Project Plans (Minimum sleeve dimension shall be twice the diameter of pipe size.
801-5.3.3 Plastic Pipeline.

The following shall be added to the end of paragraph one:

TP-63
PVC to metal connections shall only be accomplished by PVC male adapters screwed into metal fittings. Teflon tape shall be used on all threaded PVC to PVC, and on all threaded PVC to metal joints.

The following paragraph shall be added following paragraph four:

Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings. The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe are to lie flat and not to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged will be discarded and, if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. Pipe and fittings shall not be stored in direct sunlight. 801-5.4 Installation of Valves, Valve Boxes, and Special Equipment Paragraphs three, four, five, and six shall be deleted. 801-5.5 Sprinkler Head Installation and Adjustment.
801-5.5.2 Location, Elevation, and Spacing.

The third paragraph shall be amended to read as follows:

Sprinkler heads shall be installed 6 inches from the adjacent vertical elements projecting above wade such as walls, planter boxes, curbs, and fences in shrub areas. Sprinkler heads shall be installed 4 inches from adjacent vertical elements projecting above grade such as walkways, walls, planter boxes, curbs, and fences in turf areas. 801-5.7 Flushing and Testing.
801-5.7.1 General. The following paragraph shall preface the subsection:

Flushing of the lines shall be done before quick coupling valves and remote control valves are in place. All open ends shall be piped (temporarily to exhaust flushing water up and out of the trenches.)
No water will be permitted to fall into the trench. Flushing procedure will be to first open the ports nearest the source, then recap, and move progressively towards the end of the line, with only one open port flushing at anyone time.

Amend the last sentence of the first paragraph by adding “and approved in writing” by the Senior Landscape Planner at the end of the sentence.

Add the following paragraph to the end of the subsection:

When the irrigation system is completed, a coverage test shall be performed by Owner Staff to determine if the water coverage for planting areas is complete, adequate, and avoids overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due TP-64
to deviations from the Contract Drawings, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the Contract Drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Owner inspector. This test shall be accomplished before any ground cover is planted.

The Contractor shall request the presence of the Owner in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of testing. The Contractor shall flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible.
801-5.7.2 Mainline and Lateral Pipeline Pressure Test. Pressure test at the end of the first paragraph shall be amended to read: Mains 6 hrs. at 150 PSI. Laterals 2 hours at 100 PSI. 801-6 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT
The Contractor shall be responsible for detecting diseases and pests (including rabbits, gophers, groundhogs, rodents) as soon as they are present and shall take immediate action to identify, control, and remove the disease or pest. Pest control programs of all mammals shall be done without extermination and as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

Plants shall be maintained in a disease and pest free condition. A licensed Pest Control Operator shall be maintained to recommend and apply pesticide, herbicides, and fungicides.

Contractor shall be responsible for removal of gophers and moles from site and repair any and all damage attributed to their presence. Damaged plant material due to vertebrate pests (rabbits, gophers, groundhogs, etc.) shall be replaced immediately by Contractor at no cost to Owner. Dead dying and damaged plant material shall be removed at no cost to the Owner.

The maintenance and plant establishment period shall be for a period of (90) calendar days.

Trees shall have a 1-year warranty beginning after the plant establishment period, after all planting is complete and approved by the Owner in writing. The maintenance period will not commence until all planting has been approved in writing by the Owner.

Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, all watering, irrigation repair, weeding, mowing, edging, cultivating, spraying, and pruning necessary to keep the plant materials in a healthy growing condition and to keep the planted areas neat and attractive throughout the maintenance period.

The lump sum price paid for the maintenance period shall include all costs for water (from the new water meter installed only), watering, irrigation repair, weeding, mowing, edging, cultivating, spraying, and pruning necessary to keep the plant materials in a healthy growing condition and to keep the plant areas neat and attractive throughout the maintenance period.

Upon the 60th day or thereafter, dirt berms around trees and shrubs shall be leveled.

Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas not equipped with an irrigation system.

Protect all planted areas against damage, including erosion and trespassing, by providing and maintaining proper safeguards.

TP-65
During the maintenance period, all plants and planted areas shall be kept properly watered and weed-free at all times. Irrigation schedule shall comply with AB325 and Certified Irrigation Auditor’s parameters.

In order to expedite the plant establishment work, the Contractor shall maintain a sufficient number of men and adequate equipment to perform the work herein specified from the time any planting is done until the end of the final maintenance period.

The Contractor will be relieved from maintenance work when the plant establishment and maintenance work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner.

Damage to planting areas shall be replaced immediately when seen by Contractor. Damage observed by the Owner shall be replaced within 24 hours of notification to the Contractor.

Depressions caused by vehicles, bicycles, or foot traffic, are to be filled and leveled. Replant damaged areas.

Apply a pelletized fertilizer blend of 15-15-15 at the beginning and at every 30-day maintenance interval at the rate 350 lbs. per acre until the designated end of the maintenance period. A 90day maintenance program shall consist of 3 (six) fertilizer periods.

Apply 25 lbs. Gro-Power Plus per 1,000 square feet at 25th and 55th day of 90 day maintenance period.

Contractor shall be responsible for removal of rodents, slugs, snails, and cutworms from site as required and repair damage as above.

All paved areas will be broom cleaned and/or washed and maintained in a neat and clean condition at all times, as directed by the Owner. AQMD and WQMP practices shall be observed. Air blowers shall not be allowed.

Replacements. At the end of the maintenance period, all plant material shall be in a healthy growing condition.

During the maintenance period, should the appearance of any plant indicate weakness and probability of dying, immediately replace that plant with a new and healthy plant of the same type and size without additional cost to the Owner.

All trees shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to live and grow in an acceptable upright position for a period of one year after completion and final acceptance by the Owner.

The Contractor, within ten (10) days of notification by the Owner, shall remove and replace all guaranteed plant materials which for any reason fail to meet the requirements of the guarantee. Replacement shall be made with plant materials as indicated or specified for the original planting, and all such replacement materials shall be guaranteed as specified for the original guaranteed materials.

Clean-Up. Upon completion of the work in this section, the Contractor shall clean-up and remove from the area all unused materials and debris resulting from the performance of the work as directed by the Owner.

TP-66
801-9 GUARANTEE
The text of the subsection shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

The guarantee period shall begin upon written notice by Owner of substantial compliance with plans and specifications has been achieved by Contractor.

Upon acceptance, all construction shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year against defects in materials and workmanship.

Any settling of backfill trenches which may occur during the one year guarantee period shall be backfilled, compacted, and transitioned smoothly with adjacent gradients to the Owner's satisfaction by the Contractor without expense to the Owner, including the complete restoration of damaged planting, paving, or other improvements of any kind.

The Contractor, within ten (10) days of notification by the Owner Representative, shall remove and replace all guaranteed plant materials which, for any reason, fail to meet the requirements of the guarantee. Replacement shall be made with plant materials as indicated or specified for the original planting and all such replacement materials shall be guaranteed as specified for the original guaranteed materials.

TP-67

GUARANTEE FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM
We hereby guarantee that the irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear, and unusual abuse, or neglect accepted. We agree to repair or replace any defects in material or workmanship, including settling of backfilled areas below grade which may develop during the period of one year from date of acceptance and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within 72 hours after receipt of written notice. In the event of our failure to make such repairs upon written notice from the Owner, we authorize the Owner to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charge therefore upon demand.

PROJECT:

LOCATION:

AGENCY:

SIGNED:
(Contractor)
ADDRESS:

PHONE:

DATE OF ACCEPTANCE:

TP-68
801-10 CHARTS, MANUALS, AND CONTRACT DRAWINGS
801-10.1 As-Built Contract Drawings
Contractor shall provide Owner Representative with Landscape Architect signed “as-built” heavy weight drafting film originals of all project construction document plans, reflecting all “asbuilt” conditions for all project elements and two (2) sets of edge bound plots at the completion of the project at no additional cost to the Owner.

Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of surveyed electronic files in CAD and PDF format. One (1) set shall be delivered to the Owner for permanent recordkeeping purposes.

Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, building corners, sidewalk or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items:

1. Gate valves

2. Sprinkler control valves

3. Routing of control wiring

4. Rain gauge

5. Quick coupling valves

6. Point of connection components (meters, backflow preventors, etc.)

7. Other related equipment as directed by the Owner

8. Significant changes in routing of lateral lines from those indicated on the plans Delivery. On or before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver the corrected and completed design documents to the Owner. Delivery of the final heavy weight drafting film will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing required information that maybe omitted from the prints.
801-10.2 Controller Charts
As-built Contract Drawings shall be approved by the Owner before the Contractor prepares the controller charts.

Provide two (2) controller charts for each controller supplied.

The chart shall show the area controlled by the automatic controller and shall be the maximum size which the controller door will allow.

The chart is to be a reduced drawing of the actual “as-built” system. However, in the event the controlled sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a size that will be readable when reduced.

The chart shall be a blackline or blueline print and a different color shall be used to indicate the area of coverage for each station.

When completed and approved, the Contractor shall hermetically seal the chart between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum of 10 mils thick.

TP-69
These charts shall be completed and approved prior to final inspection of the irrigation system. 801-10.3 Manuals of all Equipment and Certificate of Substantial Completion Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Prepare and deliver to the Owner within ten calendar days after substantial completion of the project, three hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:

1. Index sheet stating Contractor's and subcontractor’s license numbers, address, and telephone number and list of equipment with name and address of al local supplier’s and manufacturer's representatives.

2. Catalog and specification ‘cut’ sheets materials for all hardscape and softscape and equipment installed under this contract.

3. Guarantee statement. The guarantee for the sprinkler irrigation system shall be made in accordance with the enclosed form. The Contractor shall file a complete copy of all substantial completion forms and irrigation guarantee prior to the acceptance of project by the Owner.

The guarantee shall be included in the operations and maintenance manual of all equipment throughout the park.

The guarantee shall be typed onto the Contractor’s letterhead.

4. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.

In addition to the above mentioned maintenance manuals, provide the Owner's maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Owner at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. 801-11 EQUIPMENT
801-11.1 Loose Equipment to be Furnished.

The following subsection shall be added (confirm each item with the Owner Inspector prior to actual turn-over):

The Contractor shall supply as a part of this contract the following tools:

1. Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of sprinkler and valve supplied on this project.

2. Two (2) five foot valve keys for operation of gate valves.

3. One (1) quick coupler key and matching hose swivel for every five (5) of each type of quick coupling valve installed.

4. Six (6) spray nozzles of each type specified on the legend.

5. One case of spray bodies of each manufacturer specified on the legend.

6. One case of rotors of each manufacturer specified on the legend.

7. Two (2) gate valves - line sized - as specified on the legend.

TP-70

8. Two (2) keys each for controller and controller enclosure doors. a. One RainMaster remote for each controller
The above-mentioned equipment shall be turned over to the Owner at the conclusion of the project. Before final inspection can occur, evidence that the Owner has received material must be shown to the Owner Representative.
801-12 PAYMENT
The payment for the irrigation system and all appurtenant installations indicated on the Contract Drawings and described in these specifications shall be included as part of the Lump Sum Contract Price in the Proposal Bid Form.

The payment for the installation of turf shall be made as part of the Sum Contract Price.

The payment for maintenance of the work per the Contract Drawings and the specifications shall be made as part of the lump sum Contract Price 90-day Maintenance.

The payment for the planting and installation of trees, shrubs, and ground cover shall be included in the Contract Lump Sum Contract Price. The cost of soil amendments, fertilizing and soil conditioning, weed control, and finish grading shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract Price.

Consultant Technical Specifications in C.S.I. format for items not identified in Technical Specifications Consultant “Greenbook” Amendments

END OF TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DOCUMENT/SECTION No. – TITLE
DIVISION 00 – PROCURMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIRMENTS (Page TP-71) 00 01 10 – TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 72 00 – GENERAL CONDITIONS 2007
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Page TP-76)
01 11 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK
01 20 00 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 23 00 – ALTERNATES
01 25 00 – SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES W/ REQUEST FORM
01 26 00 – CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS PROCEDURES
01 30 00 – ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 31 10 – INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES INSTRUCTIONS (RFI) 01 32 00 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
01 35 15 – CAL-GREEN ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 60 00 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 – EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01 74 10 – WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 78 00 – WARRANTIES
01 79 00 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE (Page TP-144)
03 10 00 – CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCING
03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 35 15 – SEALED CONCRETE FLOORING
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY (Page TP-165)
04 22 00 – CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
04 22 70 – WATERPROOF CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
000110-1 Table of Contents
TP-71
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION No. - TITLE
DIVISION 5 – METALS (Page TP-179)
05 12 00 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 30 00 – METAL DECKING
05 31 00 – STEEL DECKING
05 40 00 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATION
05 51 00 – METAL STAIRS
05 70 00 – DECORATIVE METAL
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS (Page TP-233)
06 10 50 – MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 18 00 – STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY
06 40 00 – ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (Page TP-248) 07 13 00 – SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 14 10 – COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07 16 00 – CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING
07 21 00 – THERMAL INSULATION
07 26 00 – BELOW GRADE VAPOR RETARDER
07 28 00 – WEATHER BARRIER UNDERLAYMENT
07 41 15 – MANUFACTURERD BATTEN SEAM ROOFING
07 46 40 – FIBER CEMENT SIDING
07 53 10 – ELASTOMETRIC PVC MEMBRANE ROOFING
07 60 00 – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07 72 00 – ROOF HATCHES
07 90 00 – JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS (Page TP-301)
08 11 10 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 20 – INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
08 14 00 – WOOD DOORS
08 31 00 – ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
08 33 10 – OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
08 44 10 – GLAZED WINDOW WALL ASSEMBLIES
08 51 10 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS
000110-2 Table of Contents
TP-72
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION No. - TITLE DATE
08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 15 – LOW ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS
08 80 00 – GLAZING
08 83 00 – FRAMELESS MIRRORS
08 91 00 – LOUVERS
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES (Page TP-391)
09 21 00 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 24 00 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09 30 00 – TILING
09 51 00 – ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 65 10 – RESILIENT BASE
09 65 20 – RESILIENT PLANK FLOORING
09 65 20 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 67 55 – URETHANE FOOD PREPARATION FLOORING
09 68 10 – TILE CARPETING
09 90 00 – PAINTING AND COATING
09 96 70 – HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES (Page TP-450)
10 11 00 – VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
10 14 00 – SIGNAGE
10 21 20 – PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 22 00 – OPERABLE PARTITIONS
10 26 10 – STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS
10 28 00 – TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 44 00 – FIRE EXITINGUISHER CABINETS
10 51 00 – PHENOLIC LOCKERS
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (Page TP-485)
11 10 00 – MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
11 66 13 – EXERCISE EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (Page TP-492)
12 24 00 – MANUAL WINDOW SHADES
12 93 00 – SITE FURNISHINGS
000110-3 Table of Contents
TP-73
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION No. - TITLE
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Page TP-499)
13 10 10 – POOL CONCRETE
13 10 11 – POOL SHOTCRETE
13 11 13 – POOL FINISHES AND WATERPROOFING
13 11 14 – POOL DECK EQUIPMENT
13 11 15 – POOL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
13 11 16 – POOL SYSTEMS START-UP
13 11 17 – POOL ELECTRICAL
13 31 23 – PRE-ENGINEERED FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES
13 34 16 – PERMANENT GRANDSTANDS
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (Page TP-569)
14 10 10 – HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING (Page TP-579)
22 05 13 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 16 – EXPANSION FITTING AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION
22 11 00 – FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
22 13 00 – FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
22 14 00 – FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
22 16 00 – FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
22 34 00 – DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
22 40 00 – PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING, HVAC (Page TP-686) 23 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 13 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00 – HVAC INSULATION
23 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
000110-4 Table of Contents
TP-74
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION No. - TITLE DATE
23 09 23 – DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 23 00 – REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 31 00 – HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 33 00 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 34 00 – HVAC FANS
23 37 00 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 40 00 – HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES
23 51 00 – BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
23 74 13 – PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
23 81 26 – SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (Page TP-859)
26 05 00 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 05 01 – BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS
26 05 30 – CONDUIT AND WIRE
26 24 13 – SWITCHBOARDS
26 24 16 – PANELBOARDS AND TERMINAL CABINETS
26 24 19 – MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 50 05 – LIGHTING FIXTURES
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (Page TP-986) 28 46 20 – FIRE ALARM
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (Page TP-1011)
32 93 44 – PALM TREE PLANTING

END OF DOCUMENT
000110-5 Table of Contents
TP-75
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 00 72 00

GENERAL CONDITIONS
1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition, Articles 1 through 15 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is incorporated herein as fully as if here set forth.

1. A copy of the General Conditions may be obtained at www.aia.org under “Contract Documents”, bottom of page “Store”; by calling 800-242-3837 (option 4); or at www.aiasf.org under “Publications”.

END OF SECTION
00 72 00 - 1 General Conditions
TP-76
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Project consists of construction of New senior center and aquatics building with new pool and pool equipment building located at 1654 W 166th street, Gardena, CA 90247 as indicated in Contract Documents.

1. Owner reserves right to remove and retain possession of existing items prior to start of Contract.

2. Removal of hazardous material shall be per separately provided hazardous material abatement report prepared by others. Architect shall not be involved in determination, removal or disposal of hazardous materials.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. This section includes administrative provisions:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Work sequence.

Contractors use of premises.

Field engineering.

Regulatory requirements and reference standards.

Owner furnished Contractor installed products (OFCI).

Owner pre-ordered products.

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect.

B. Perform construction in phases as indicated.

1.4 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit use of premises for Work and construction operations and to allow for work by other contractors.

B. Coordinate use of premises and access to site under direction of Owner and Architect.

1.5 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Provide field engineering services; establish lines and levels by use of recognized engineering survey practices. See General Provision, 3-10, Survey for more details.

B. Locate and protect control and reference points.
01 11 00 - 1 Summary of Work
TP-77
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Architect has contacted governing authorities and reviewed design requirements of local, state and federal agencies for applicability to Project.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting governing authorities directly for necessary information and decisions bearing upon performance of Work.

B. Reference Standards:

1. For Products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of referenced standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. Applicable date of each standard is that in effect as of date on proposal or date on Contract where no proposal is available, except when a specific date is specified.

1.7 OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS (OFCI A. Select products are to be furnished and paid for by Owner and installed by Contractor:

1. Refer to Drawings and Specifications.

B. Owner's Responsibilities:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Arrange for and deliver shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor.

Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.

Inspect products jointly with Contractor on delivery.

Submit claims for transportation damage.

Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.

Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, inspections, and service.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Review shop drawings, product data, and samples.

Receive and unload products at site.

Inspect jointly with Owner for completeness and damage.

Handle, store, and install products.

Finish products as required after installation.

Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract.

1.8 OWNER PRE-ORDERED PRODUCTS
A. Select products have been pre-ordered by Owner:

1. Refer to Drawings.
01 11 00 - 2 Summary of Work
TP-78
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Owner has negotiated purchase orders for these products for incorporation into Project.

1. Purchase orders are assigned to Contractor; costs shall be included into base bid.

2. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor negotiated purchase orders.

END OF SECTION
01 11 00 - 3 Summary of Work
TP-79
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 20 00

PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Special administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Application for Payment. General Provisions, Section 7- Measurement and Payment to prevail over this section if any conflict.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUE
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets, Submittals Schedule, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before date scheduled for submittal of initial Application for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as guide to establish line items for Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include following Project identification on Schedule of Values. a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Project name and location.

Name of Architect.

Architect's Project number.

Contractor's name and address.

Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.

3. Provide breakdown of Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Application for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents.
a. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts where appropriate.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal Contract Sum.

5. Provide separate line item in Schedule of Values for each part of Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
01 20 00 - 1 Payment Procedures
TP-80
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

6. Provide separate line items in Schedule of Value for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of Work.

7. Each item in Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit Schedule of Values before next application for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment: Application for Payment at time of Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Date for each progress payment is indicated in Agreement between Owner and Contractor. Period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is period indicated in Agreement.

C. Partial and Final Payment: See section 7-3.2 of the General Provisions.

D. Delivered Materials: See section 7-3.3 of the General Provisions.

E. Payment Application Forms: AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Application for Payment.

F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

G. Transmittal:

1. Contractor shall provide e-transmittal of Application for Payment one week prior to Payment Request ("Draw") Meeting, for review of team members. 01 20 00 - 2 Payment Procedures
TP-81
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Contractor shall provide DocuSign signed copies of Application for Payment at Payment Request ("Draw") Meeting.
a. Provide each copy with transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
b. Copies shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of Contract and related to Work covered by payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves right to designate which entities involved in Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms executed in manner acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following.

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Schedule of unit prices.

5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.

8. Copies of building permits.

9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of Work.

10. Initial progress report.

11. Report of preconstruction conference.

12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
01 20 00 - 3 Payment Procedures
TP-82
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted including but not necessarily limited to following.

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement accounting for final changes to Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims.

5. AIA Document G706A, Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens.

6. AIA Document G707, Consent of Surety to Final Payment.

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and simliar data as of date of Completion.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

END OF SECTION
01 20 00 - 4 Payment Procedures
TP-83
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 23 00

ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes a description of alternate work.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Pricing Documents: Quotation of cost of each alternate.

2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation into the Work.

3. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate.

1.2 PROCEDURES
A. Alternates will be exercised at Owner's option.

B. Coordinate Related Work: and modify surrounding work as required to complete Work, including changes under each alternate, when acceptance is designated in Owner-Contractor Agreement.

1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Alternates: To be determined.

B. Alternate No. 1: Delete Custom Colors.

1. Work Included in Alternate: Include deduct cost for each line item requiring custom color where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule.

2. Work Included in Contract Amount: Include custom color as directed by Architect where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule.

3. Sections: List each Technical Section in Project Manual that indicates custom color where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule. List to indicate amount in dollars to be saved if Architect selects manufacturer’s standard color.

C. Alternate No. 2:

1. Work Included in Alternate:

2. Work Included in Contract Price:

3. Refer to Section

4. Refer to Drawing No.
01 23 00 - 1 Alternates
TP-84
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

END OF SECTION
01 23 00 - 2 Alternates
TP-85
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Procedures are described for requesting substitution of unlisted materials in lieu of materials named in Specifications or approved for use in addenda.

1. Provide products listed in Contract Documents, products by manufacturers listed in Contract Documents, and products meeting specified requirements. a. Contract Amount: Base on materials and products included in Contract Documents.
b. Where materials and products are listed in Contract Documents, materials and products by manufacturers not listed shall not be used without Owner’s and Architect’s approval of Contractor's written request for substitution.

2. Purpose: After bidding, substitutions will only be considered where Owner will receive benefit or because specified materials are no longer available due to no fault of Contractor.

3. Purpose: Substitutions will only be considered where Owner will receive benefit or because specified materials are no longer available due to conditions beyond Contractor control.
a. Owner benefits either from a Contractor proposed reduction of the Contract amount or from a reduction in Contract time based on acceptance of proposed substitution.
b. List proposed cost or time reductions on request for substitution. c. Requests not including a proposed cost or time reduction will not be considered unless Contractor submits supporting information indicating specified materials are not available.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 60 00: Product requirements.

1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Within a period of 35 days after award of Contract, Owner and Architect will consider formal requests for substitutions only from Contractor as specified in 1.1 Summary.

1. Owner and Architect will consider only one request for substitution for each material; where requests are denied Contractor shall be required to provide specified materials.
01 25 00 - 1 Substitution Procedures
TP-86
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. After initial 35-day period, requests will be considered only when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor; more than one request for substitution will be considered if necessary.

B. Prior to submittal of second Request for Payment Owner and Architect will consider formal requests for substitutions from Contractor as specified in 1.1 Summary.

1. Owner and Architect will consider only one request for substitution for each material; where requests are denied Contractor shall be required to provide specified materials.

2. After payments begin, requests will be considered only when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor; more than one request for substitution will be considered if necessary.

C. Submit each request with sequentially numbered “Substitution Request Transmittal” acceptable to Owner and Architect; submit separate request for each product and support each request with:

1. Product identification with manufacturer's literature and samples where applicable.

2. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of installation.

D. Submit itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified and list significant variations.

E. Submit data relating to changes in construction schedule.

F. Note effect of substitution on other work, products, or separate contracts.

1. Note if acceptance of substitution could require revision of Contract Documents, Drawings, details or Specifications.

G. Include accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product and amount of net change in Contract price.

1. Include costs to other contractors and costs for revisions to Drawings, details or Specifications.

H. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

1. They are indicated or implied on submittals without a formal request from Contractor.

2. They are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier.

3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

I. Substitute products shall not be ordered without written acceptance of Owner and Architect.
01 25 00 - 2 Substitution Procedures
TP-87
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
J. Owner and Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions and reserves right to reject proposals due to insufficient information.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. Requests constitute a representation that Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined it meets or exceeds, in all respects, specified product.

2. Will provide same warranty or longer warranty for substitution as for specified product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes that may be required for Work to be complete in all respects.

4. Waives claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent.

5. Will pay costs of changes to Contract Documents, Drawings, details and Specifications required by accepted substitutions.

1.4 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.

1. Architect will recommend that Owner accept or reject substitution request.

2. Upon request, Architect will provide cost for changes to Contract Documents, Drawings, details and Specifications required for substitutions.

B. Notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.

CONTRACTOR'S SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
01 25 00 - 3 Substitution Procedures
TP-88
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
(Use separate form for each request)
Date: Request No.:

TO: Architect Date:

PROJECT:

CONTRACTOR
Project No.:

SPECIFIED ITEM:

Section: Page: Paragraph: Description:

Drawing Number(s): Detail Number(s):

The undersigned request consideration of the following:

PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:

REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS:

SAVINGS or CREDIT to OWNER for ACCEPTING SUBSTITUTE: $
PROJECT COMPLETION CHANGE for ACCEPTING SUBSTITUTE Days Attached data includes description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.

Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation.

The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Proposed substitution has been fully checked and coordinated with the Contract Documents.

The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings.

The proposed substitution does not require revisions to mechanical or electrical work.

The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including architectural and engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution.

The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or warranty.

Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.

The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on LEED credits (applies to LEED Projects ONLY) The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on Green Building Requirements where applicable.

5. 6.

7. 8.

The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item.

Attachments: The attached data is furnished herewith for evaluation of the proposed substitution. Catalog Drawings Samples Reports
Submitted by:
Tests Other:
(Name of Authorized Representative)
(Firm)
(Authorized Legal Signature)
( )
(Telephone)
For use by the
Architect: Accepted Accepted as Noted Rejected: Submit Specified Item BY:
(Authorized Signature)
Date: Remarks:

END OF SECTION
01 25 00 - 4 Substitution Procedures
TP-89
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 26 00

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing Contract modification procedures.

1. 2.

3. Requests for Information (RFI).

Change Order.

Construction Change Directive.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 2.

Section 01 25 00: Substitution procedures.

Section 01 30 00: Administrative requirements.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in Work, not involving adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time, on AIA Form G710, Architect’s Supplemental Instructions or similar form.

1.3 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A. Contractor may submit a written Request for Information (RFI) in format approved by Architect relating to perceived inconsistencies and omissions in Contract Documents.

1. A record of RFI's is to be maintained by Contractor along with information regarding origin of request, date of request, and date request was received from Architect. Number RFI's sequentially based on date of request.

B. Requests for Information shall be used only as a means of obtaining clarification of information not included in Contract Documents and shall not be used to assist Contractor in preparation of shop drawings or other information required by Contract.

1. Contract Documents are intended to contain enough information to show aesthetic and design intent and to provide information such that construction procedures (means and methods) may be reasonably inferred.

Contract Documents are not intended to provide specific information related to means and methods of construction nor are they intended to be exhaustive in content.

2. C. Contractor shall carefully review requests for information by subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain if information is in Contract Documents prior to submitting a Request for Information to Architect based on requests by others.

1. Contractor may suggest possible solutions to fit Project conditions where appropriate.
01 26 00 - 1 Contract Modification Procedures
TP-90
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
D. Architect reserves right to return RFI's that do not reasonably relate to necessary clarification of intent of Contract Documents and to charge Contractor for time and materials involved in answering RFI's where information is in Contract Documents.

1. RFI’s shall not be used as a request for substitutions; refer to Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

1.4 CHANGE ORDERS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue detailed description of proposed changes in Work that require adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider changer order proposal requests as instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute proposed change.

Within 10 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit estimate of cost necessary to execute change to Architect for Owner’s review.

2. a. Include list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental and amounts of trade discounts.

Include a statement indicating effect of proposed change in Work will have on Contract Time.
c.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect and Owner.

1. Include statement of reasons for change and effect of change on Work. Provide a complete description of proposed change. Indicate effect of proposed change on Contract Sum and Contract Time.

Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs with total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental and amounts of trade discounts.

Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures if proposed change requires substitution of unspecified product or system for specified product or system.

2. 3.

4. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests; other substitute formats shall be submitted to Owner and Architect for approval prior to use.
01 26 00 - 2 Contract Modification Procedures
TP-91
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
D. Change Order Procedures: Contractor shall be directed to proceed with Work upon Owner’s approval of Proposal.

1. Architect will issue Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Form G701 or similar form, including approved Change Order proposals for that time period.

Amounts of each Change Order shall be indicated in each Request for Payment including payment status for each individual Change Order.

2. 1.5 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: For Contract items bid based on allowance, submit Change Order Proposal on difference between actual purchase amount and allowance, based on work-in-place.

1. Include installation cost in purchase amount only where indicated as part of allowance.

When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate amounts claimed for work done based on allowances.

Submit substantiation of a change in Scope of work claimed in Change Orders related to allowances.

2. 3.

4. Owner reserves right to establish actual quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure or count.

B. Submit claims for increase costs because of a change in scope or nature of allowance described in Contract Documents, whether for purchase order amount or Contractor’s handling, labor, installation, overhead and profit.

1. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days.

Do not include Contractor’s or subcontractor’s indirect expense in Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in Contract Documents.

No change to Contractor’s indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower-priced materials or systems of same scope and nature as originally indicated.

2. 3.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: When Owner and Contractor disagree on terms of Proposal Request, Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive per AIA Form G714 or similar form.

1. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with change in Work, for subsequent inclusion in Change Order.

Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

2. 01 26 00 - 3 Contract Modification Procedures
TP-92
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of Work required by Construction Change Directive. Coordinate scheduling with Construction Manager to allow monitoring by Owner if desired.

1. After completion of change, submit itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to Contract.

END OF SECTION
01 26 00 - 4 Contract Modification Procedures
TP-93
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 30 00

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes general procedural requirements for ongoing submittals.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

Schedule of values.

Product data and manufacturer’s literature.

Shop drawings.

Samples.

Manufacturers' certificates.

Excess materials and attic stock.

Design build (delegated design) procedures.

Deferred approval requirements.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Section 01 31 00: Project management and coordination.

Section 01 32 00: Construction Schedule – Network Analysis.

Section 01 40 00: Test reports, manufacturer's field reports, and mock-ups.

Section 01 70 00: Manufacturers’ instructions.

Section 01 77 00: Closeout requirements including Project Record Documents.

Section 01 78 00: Warranties.

1.2 GENERAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submittals: Transmit each item using form approved by Architect; submit sample to Architect for approval prior to use.

1. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, major supplier. a. Attach sequential identification number for each new submittal. b. Identify each resubmittal using original submittal number and sequential identification clearly indicating item is resubmitted.

2. Identify pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number, and Specification section number as appropriate.

3. Identify deviations from Contract Documents.

4. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

5. Contractor: Review and stamp submittals from subcontractors prior to submitting to Architect.
a. Review submittals and indicate where conflicts occur with Contract Documents and with work of other subcontractors.
01 30 00 - 1 Administrative Requirements
TP-94
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
b. Return submittals that vary significantly from Contract Documents for correction and resubmittal prior to submitting to Architect. c. Submittals that vary significantly from Contract Documents and that fail to indicate thorough Contractor review prior to submission to Architect will be returned without review.
d. Cursory review and stamping of subcontractor submittal by Contractor shall not be acceptable.

B. Initial Schedules: Submit initial progress schedule and schedule of value in duplicate within 15 working days after award of Contract.

1. After review by Owner and Architect revise and resubmit where required.

C. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to Work progress. Coordinate submittal of related items.

D. After Architect review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identify changes made since previous submittal.

E. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply.

1.3 TYPES OF SUBMITTALS
A. General: Project requires various types of submittals to maintain communications, minimize misunderstandings, avoid unnecessary conflicts, and to ensure complete documentation for Project Record Documents.

1. Maintain complete set of submittals including required revisions.

B. Construction Schedules: Submit construction progress schedules for Design Team and Owner review and to maintain entire team up-to-date on construction activities.

C. Schedule of Values: Submit Schedule of Values indicating division of Work, subcontractors to perform work, products being used, and values attributed to each to inform Design Team and Owner.

D. Action Submittals: Submittals relating to product data and manufacturer’s literature, shop drawings, and samples for Design Team review and comment; do not begin fabrication, delivery, or installation until Design Team review is complete.

E. Information Submittals: Submittals relating to certifications, qualifications, reports, including test reports, and instructions are for information; Design Team may choose to comment but action is not generally anticipated.

1. Manufacturer installation instructions and recommendations shall be considered information submittals.
01 30 00 - 2 Administrative Requirements
TP-95
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
F. Design/Build Submittals: Where portion of Work requires design by specialized professionals submit information necessary to ensure work complies with Contract Documents along with certifications signed by qualified professional.

1. Calculations: Do not submit calculations unless specifically required by Contract Documents; submit calculations required by applicable authorities directly to applicable authorities;
a. Submit certification by qualified professional indicating required calculations have been prepared and work conforms to Contract Documents and applicable codes and regulations.

G. Maintenance Materials Submittals: Compile maintenance information and materials during Work to ensure complete set of documents, maintenance manuals, and operation instructions.

H. Closeout Submittals: Compile closeout submittals, organize, and submit to Owner prior to or at time of Substantial Completion. Project will not be considered Substantially Complete until closeout submittals have been received by Owner.

I. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): MSDS will only be reviewed by Architect when submitted to show compliance with LEED certification requirements.

1. Non-LEED submittals that include material safety data sheets will be returned for resubmittal.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 or another Owner and Architect preapproved 8-1/2" by 11" paper format; Contractor's standard media-driven printout will be considered on request. Submit within 15 days after award of Contract.

B. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual, with modifications as pre-approved by Owner and Architect; identify each line item with number and title of major Specification sections.

C. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor overhead and profit.

D. Revise schedule to list change orders for each Application for Payment.

1. Submit subschedule for each phase of Work.

1.5 PRODUCT DATA/MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE
A. Action Submittals: Mark each copy to identify applicable Products, models, options, and other data; supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to the Work.

B. Information Submittals: Include manufacturers' installation instructions only when required by Specifications or specifically requested by Architect. 01 30 00 - 3 Administrative Requirements
TP-96
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Maintain copy of manufacturer installation instructions and recommendations in Contractor's field office for review.

C. Product data shall be submitted as electronic PDF files unless otherwise noted or approved by Architect in advance.

1. Where paper copies are permitted submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus one copy to be retained by Architect.

D. Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus one copy to be retained by Architect.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted as electronic PDF files unless otherwise noted or approved by Architect in advance.

1. Where prints are permitted submit one reproducible print; minimum sheet size 8-1/2” by 11”.

B. Shop drawings shall be submitted in reproducible format acceptable to Architect and Owner; computerized PDF files will be acceptable unless otherwise directed.

1. Prints: Submit one reproducible print; minimum sheet size 8-1/2” by 11”.

2. Prints: Submit three reproducible prints; minimum sheet size 8-1/2" by 11".

C. Distribution: After review, reproduce and distribute.

1.7 SAMPLES
A. Submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection.

B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of Product, with integral parts and attachment devices.

C. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work.

D. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.

E. Submit number of samples required by Contractor plus one to be retained by Architect.

1. Maintain one set of approved samples at Project Field Office.

F. Sizes: Provide following sizes unless otherwise specified.

1. 2.

3. Flat or Sheet Products: Minimum 6" square, maximum 12" by 12".

Linear Products: Minimum 6", maximum 12" long.

Bulk Products: Minimum one pint, maximum one gallon.

G. Full size samples may be used in the Work upon approval. 01 30 00 - 4 Administrative Requirements
TP-97
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.8 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES
A. Submit certificates, in duplicate in accordance with requirements of each Specification section.

1.9 EXCESS MATERIALS AND ATTIC STOCK
A. Excess Materials: Excess materials shall be considered property of Owner; inform Owner of extent of excess materials and methods required for handling and storage; remove from site excess materials not required by Owner for maintenance stock.

B. Attic Stock: Owner may choose to obtain additional attic stock for maintenance purposes where excess materials are not considered adequate.

1. Owner may require as much as 5% extra materials for maintenance purposes.

Exact amount of each material shall be determined by Owner based on following meeting and additional costs determined by Contractor.
a. Contractor shall be prepared to order up to 5% extra materials on items that may not be readily available in future such as custom colors, off-shore manufacture, anticipated life span under 5 years, and potential for damage. 1) Do not order extra attic stock until extent is determined and agreed to by Owner including which materials require extra stock and exactly how much those materials will cost including shipping and handling. b. Excess Materials: Furnish excess materials only for materials that have a shelf-life of more than three years.

2. Meeting: Conduct meeting prior to beginning Work to discuss extent of materials Owner would like to receive at Project Closeout for attic stock for maintenance materials; where available include personnel from Owner’s maintenance crew. a. Estimate amount of excess materials to be anticipated to be ordered in addition to materials for handling and storage and how those materials will be invoiced and identified regarding material and location in Project. b. Determine area necessary for adequate storage, handling, and identifying excess materials and attic stock and discuss with Owner. c. Submit information regarding equipment necessary for handling of excess materials and attic stock due to weight, size, and storage requirements. d. Assist Owner in determining where on-site or off-site additional attic stock for maintenance purposes will be delivered and stored.

3. Additional Costs: After meeting submit to Owner detailed listing of additional costs for each material Owner may like to receive for attic stock and assist Owner in modifying listing to determine acceptable final costs. a. Include unit prices for desired attic stock where excess materials are not adequate for Owner maintenance stock.
01 30 00 - 5 Administrative Requirements
TP-98
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Substantial Completion: Submit Construction Bulletin at Substantial Completion indicating changes to Contract Amount for attic stock including unit price totals for materials where excess materials are not adequate.

5. Final Completion: Ensure attic stock has been received, identified, cataloged, and stored at locations agreed upon with Owner based on Change Order indicating amounts finally agreed to by Owner.

1.10 DESIGN/BUILD PROCEDURES
A. Design as Part of Means and Methods of Construction: Select Project components require construction team design as part of means and methods of construction as described in various sections.

1. Terms commonly used such as Design/Build, Delegated Design, and Design/Assist are applicable to these procedures as determined by law but shall be generally referred to in these documents as Design/Build. a. In general Design/Build includes design by licensed professionals with expertise beyond that allowed under standard architectural licensure, and outside of scope of work of other design professionals on the design team.

2. Contractor may be required to provide design services as part of construction for specific work defined as design or design-build where special expertise is required that is not available in the Project design team.

3. Subcontractors, fabricators, and manufacturers may be required to provide design services as part of their work due to special expertise in design services for their specific components, refer to technical sections for Design/Build.

4. Contractor, subcontractors, fabricators, manufacturers, and suppliers shall be responsible for attachments, anchors, fasteners, adhesives, and connectors suitable to applications unless specific items are listed in Contract Documents. a. Where specific items are listed in Contract Documents Contractor, subcontractors, fabricators, manufacturers, and suppliers shall review and submit comments where items listed are not acceptable.
b. Where no comments are received, listed items shall be considered acceptable.

B. Contractor acknowledges and accepts responsibility for specialty design as part of means and methods of construction, as well as coordination of parties involved to achieve architectural design intent indicated in Contract Documents.

1. Design-build work includes sizing, sequencing, and detailing for construction by professional licensed or registered engineer or design professional with special expertise applicable to portion of Work involved.

2. Design-build work shall be constructed in compliance with building codes and regulations in effect and shall be fit and proper for intended use. 01 30 00 - 6 Administrative Requirements
TP-99
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Design-build work shall include drawings, specifications, and calculations prepared, stamped, and signed by qualified professional licensed or registered engineer licensed in the Project location as appropriate to design-build work. a. Plans, specifications, and calculations shall be acceptable to Owner, Owner’s Representative, and applicable authorities.

C. Where required by Owner Contractor shall submit copies of current insurance policies covering errors and omissions of persons designing design-build work with deductibles and limits per occurrence as mutually agreed by Owner and Contractor.

1. Provide endorsement to insurance providing for 30-day notice to Owner prior to cancellation or material reduction in coverage.

2. Insurance shall be maintained for not less than applicable statute of limitations for claims of latent defects, if such insurance is not written on an occurrence basis during time design-build work is designed and constructed.

D. Review proposed layouts with Design Team and with various trades prior to commencing work related to design-build work.

1.11 DEFERRED APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of deferred approval items shall not be started until detailed plans, specifications, and engineering calculations have been accepted and signed by Architect or Engineer of Record responsible for Project design.

B. Deferred Approval Items shall be signed by California registered architect or professional engineer delegated responsibility covering specific work shown requiring approval from the agency having jurisdiction.

1. Deferred approval items for this Project include but may not be limited to following:
a. Section 08 44 10 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
b. Fire Protection system
c. Fire Alarm

2. Deferred approval drawings and specifications become part of the approved submittal documents for the Project when they are submitted to and approved by Division of the State Architect.

3. Submit four copies of calculations, product data and test reports.

4. Identify and specify supports, fasteners, spacing, penetrations, etc., for each deferred approval items, including calculations for each fastener.

5. Submit documents to Architect of Record for review.

6. Deferred submittal documents shall bear stamp and signature of architect or 01 30 00 - 7 Administrative Requirements
TP-100
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
engineer licensed in State of California and responsible for work shown on deferred submittal documents.

END OF SECTION
01 30 00 - 8 Administrative Requirements
TP-101
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 31 10

INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES INSTRUCTIONS (RFI)
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section contains procedures to be followed by Contractor upon discovery of any apparent conflicts, omissions, or errors in Contract Documents or upon having any question concerning interpretation.

B. Alternate: At the Owners option, Utilize the standard forms, procedures, contracts and / or agreements, preferred by the owner, in lieu of the methods described herein.

1.2 PROCEDURES
A. Requests for clarification or additional information shall be submitted in writing to Architect using a Request for Information (RFI) form approved by Architect.

B. RFIs shall be numbered sequentially. RFI number shall be followed by a sequential numerical suffix as necessary for each resubmission. For example, first RFI would be 001. Second RFI would be 002 and first resubmittal of RFI 002 would be 002.1.

C. Each RFI shall be limited to ONE subject.

D. An RFI shall be submitted if one of following conditions occur:

1. Contractor discovers an unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not described in Contract Documents.

2. Contractor discovers an apparent conflict or discrepancy between portions of Contract Documents that appears to be inconsistent or is not reasonably inferred from intent of Contract Documents.

3. Contractor discovers what appears to be an omission from Contract Documents that cannot be reasonably inferred from intent of Contract Documents.

E. Contractor shall not:

1. Submit an RFI as a request for substitution.

2. 3.

Submit an RFI as a submittal.

Submit an RFI under pretense of a Contract Documents discrepancy or omission without thorough review of documents.

4. Submit an RFI in a manner that suggests specific portions of Contract 01 31 10- 1 Information and Procedures Instructions (RFI) TP-102
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
Documents are assumed to be excluded or by taking an isolated portion of Contract Documents in part rather than whole.

5. Submit an RFI in an untimely manner without proper coordination and scheduling of Work of related trades.

6. If Contractor submits an RFI contrary to any of above, Contractor shall pay cost of any review, which cost shall be deducted from Contract sum.

F. Submit a request for information or clarification immediately upon discovery. Submit RFI’s within a time frame so as not to delay Contract schedule while allowing full response time described below.

1.3 RESPONSE TIME:

A. Architect, whose decision will be final and conclusive, shall resolve such questions and issue instructions to Contractor within a reasonable time frame. In most cases, RFI’s will receive a response within 14 days. In some cases this time may need to be lengthened for complex issues, or shortened for emergency situations, as mutually agreed in writing.

B. Should Contractor proceed with Work affected before receipt of a response from Architect, within response time described above, any portion of Work which is not done in accordance with Architect’s interpretations, clarifications, instructions, or decisions is subject to removal or replacement and Contractor shall be responsible for all resultant losses.

C. In event of failure to agree as to scope of Contract requirements, Contractor shall follow procedures set forth in General Conditions.

END OF SECTION
01 31 10- 2 Information and Procedures Instructions (RFI) TP-103
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - NETWORK ANALYSIS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. References.

B. Performance requirements.

C. Quality assurance.

D. Qualifications.

E. Project record documents.

F. Submittals.

G. Review and evaluation.

H. Format.

I. Cost and schedule reports.

J. Early work schedule.

K. Construction schedule.

L. Short interval schedule.

M. Requested time adjustment schedule.

N. Recovery schedule.

O. Updating schedules.

P. Distribution.

1.2 REFERENCES
Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual - A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry, The Associated General Contractors of America (AGC).

B. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute Master Format 2004 Edition and updates.

C. National Weather Service - Local Climatological Data.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Ensure adequate scheduling during construction activities so work may be prosecuted in 01 32 00 - 1 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-104
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
an orderly and expeditious manner within stipulated Contract Time.

B. Ensure coordination of Contractor and subcontractors at all levels.

Ensure coordination of submittals, fabrication, delivery, erection, installation, and testing of materials and equipment.

D. Ensure on-time delivery of Owner furnished materials and equipment.

E. Ensure coordination of jurisdictional reviews.

F. Assist in preparation and evaluation of applications for payment.

G. Assist in monitoring progress of work.

H. Assist in evaluation of proposed changes to Contract Time.

I. Assist in evaluation of proposed changes to Construction Schedule.

J. Assist in detection of schedule delays and identification of corrective actions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Perform work in accordance with Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual published by the AGC.

B. Maintain one copy of document on site.

In the event of discrepancy between the AGC publication and this section, provisions of this section shall govern.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
Scheduler: Personnel or specialist consultant with 5 years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity and size comparable to this Project.

Administrative Personnel: 5 years minimum experience in using and monitoring schedules on comparable projects.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 01 77 00.

Submit one reproducible and two copies of final Record Construction Schedule which reflects actual construction of this Project.

Record schedule shall be certified for compliance with actual way project was constructed.

Receipt of Record Construction Schedule shall be a condition precedent to any retainage release or final payment.

D.
01 32 00 - 2 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-105
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.7 SUBMITTALS
Within 7 days from the Notice of Award submit proposed Early Work Schedule and preliminary Cost Report defining activities for first 60 days of Work.

Within 45 days from Notice of Award submit proposed Construction Schedule and final Cost Report.

Submit updated Construction Schedule at least 10 days prior to each Application for Payment.

D. Submit Short Interval Schedule at each Construction Progress Meeting.

E. Submit Time Adjustment Schedule within 10 days of commencement of a claimed delay.

F. Submit Recovery Schedules as required by completion of work.

G. Submit one reproducible and two copies of each schedule and cost report.

1.8 REVIEW AND EVALUATION
Early Work Schedule shall be reviewed during Preconstruction Conference with Owner and Architect.

Within 5 days of receipt of Owner and Architect's comments provide satisfactory revision to Early Work Schedule or adequate justification for activities in question.

Acceptance by Owner of corrected Early Work Schedule shall be a condition precedent to making any progress payments for first 60 days of Contract.

Cost loaded values of Early Work Schedule shall be basis for determining progress payments during first 60 days of Contract.

Participate in joint review of Construction Schedule and Reports with Owner and Architect.

Within 7 days of receipt of Owner and Architect's comments provide satisfactory revision to Construction Schedule or adequate justification for activities in question.

In the event that an activity or element of work is not detected by Owner or Architect review, such omission or error shall be corrected by next scheduled update and shall not affect Contract Time.

Acceptance by Owner of corrected Construction Schedule shall be a condition precedent to making any progress payments after first 60 days of Contract.

Cost-loaded values of Construction Schedule shall be basis for determining progress payments.

Review and acceptance by Owner and Architect of Early Work Schedule or Construction Schedule does not constitute responsibility whatsoever for accuracy or feasibility of schedules nor does such acceptance expressly or impliedly warrant, acknowledge or J.
01 32 00 - 3 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-106
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
admit reasonableness of activities, logic, duration, manpower, cost or equipment loading stated or implied on schedules.

1.9 FORMAT
Prepare diagrams and supporting mathematical analyses using Precedence Diagramming Method, under concepts and methods outlined in AGC Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual.

B. Listings: Reading from left to right, in ascending order for each activity.

C. Diagram Size: 42 inches maximum height x width required.

D. Scale and Spacing: To allow for legible notations and revisions.

E. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence of work.

F. Illustrate complete sequence of construction by activity.

G. Provide legend of symbols and abbreviations used.

1.10 COST AND SCHEDULE REPORTS
A. Activity Analysis: Tabulate each activity of network diagram and identify for each activity:

1. Description.

2. Interface with outside contractors or agencies.

3. Number.

4. Preceding and following number.

5. Duration.

6. Earliest start date.

7. Earliest finish date.

8. Actual start date.

9. Actual finish date.

10. Latest start date.

11. Latest finish date.

12. Total and free float.

13. Identification of critical path activity.

14. Monetary value keyed to Schedule of Values.
01 32 00 - 4 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-107
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

15. Manpower requirements.

16. Responsibility.

17. Percentage complete.

18. Variance positive or negative.

B. Cost Report: Tabulate each activity of network diagram and identify for each activity:

1. Description.

2. Number.

3. Total cost.

4. Percentage complete.

5. Value prior to current period.

6. Value this period.

7. Value to date.

C. Required Sorts: List activities in sorts or groups:

1. By activity number.

2. By amount of float time in order of early start.

3. By responsibility in order of earliest start date.

4. In order of latest start dates.

5. In order of latest finish dates.

6. Application for payment sorted by Schedule of Values.

7. Listing of activities on critical path.

8. Listing of basic input data which generates schedule.

1.11 EARLY WORK SCHEDULE
A. Shall establish scope of work to be performed during first 60 days of Contract.

B. Shall designate critical path or paths.

C. Shall contain the following phases and activities:

Procurement activities to include mobilization, shop drawings and sample submittals.

1. 01 32 00 - 5 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis TP-108
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Identification of key and long-lead elements and realistic delivery dates.

Construction activities in units of whole days limited to 14 days for each activity except non-construction activities for procurement and delivery.

3. 4. Approximate cost and duration of each activity.

Shall contain seasonal weather considerations. Seasonal rainfall shall be 10 year average for the month as evidenced by Local Climatological Data obtained from U.S.

National Weather Service.

E. Activities shall be incorporated into Construction Schedule.

No application for payment will be evaluated or processed until Early Work Schedule has been submitted and reviewed.

G. Shall be updated on a monthly basis while Construction Schedule is being developed.

Failure to submit an adequate or accurate Early Work Schedule or failure to submit on established dates will be considered a substantial breach of Contract.

1.12 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Include Early Work Schedule as first 60 days of Construction Schedule.

B. Shall be a computer generated time scaled network diagram of activities.

Indicate a completion date for project that is no later than required completion date subject to any time extensions processed as part of a change order.

D. Conform to mandatory dates specified in the Contract Documents.

Should schedule indicate a completion date earlier than any required completion date, Owner or Architect shall not be liable for any costs should project be unable to be completed by such date.

Seasonal weather shall be considered in planning and scheduling of all work. Seasonal rainfall shall be 10 year average for the month as evidenced by Local Climatological Data obtained from U.S. National Weather Service.

G. Level of detail shall correspond to complexity of work involved.

Indicate procurement activities, delivery, and installation of Owner furnished material and equipment.

I. Designate critical path or paths.

J. Subcontractor work at all levels shall be included in schedule.

As developed shall show sequence and interdependence of activities required for complete performance of Work.

K.
01 32 00 - 6 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-109
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
L. Shall be logical and show a coordinated plan of Work.

Show order of activities and major points of interface, including specific dates of completion.

Duration of activities shall be coordinated with subcontractors and suppliers and shall be best estimate of time required.

O. Shall show description, duration and float for each activity.

Failure to include any activity shall not be an excuse for completing all work by required completion date.

No activity shall have a duration longer than 14 days or a value over $20,000.00 except non-construction activities for procurement and delivery.

R. An activity shall meet the following criteria:

Any portion or element of work, action, or reaction that is precisely described, readily identifiable, and is a function of a logical sequential process.

1. Descriptions shall be clear and concise. Beginning and end shall be readily verifiable. Starts and finishes shall be scheduled by logical restraints.

2. 3. Responsibility shall be identified with a single performing entity.

4. Additional codes shall identify building, floor, bid item and CSI classification.

Assigned dollar value (cost-loading) of each activity shall cumulatively equal total contract amount. Mobilization, bond and insurance costs shall be separate.

General requirement costs, overhead, profit, shall be prorated throughout all activities. Activity costs shall correlate with Schedule of Values.

5. 6. Each activity shall have manpower-loading assigned.

7. Major construction equipment shall be assigned to each activity.

8. Activities labeled start, continue or completion are not allowed.

S. For major equipment and materials show a sequence of activities including:

1. Preparation of shop drawings and sample submissions.

2. Review of shop drawings and samples.

3. Finish and color selection.

4. Fabrication and delivery.

5. Erection or installation.

6. Testing.
01 32 00 - 7 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-110
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
Include a minimum of 15 days prior to completion date for punch lists and clean up. No other activities shall be scheduled during this period.

1.13 SHORT INTERVAL SCHEDULE
Shall be fully developed horizontal bar-chart-type schedule directly derived from Construction Schedule.

B. Prepare schedule on sheet of sufficient width to clearly show data.

C. Provide continuous heavy vertical line identifying first day of week.

D. Provide continuous subordinate vertical line identifying each day of week.

E. Identify activities by same activity number and description as Construction Schedule.

F. Show each activity in proper sequence.

G. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for related activities.

H. Indicate activities completed or in progress for previous 2 week period.

I. Indicate activities scheduled for succeeding 2 week period.

J. Further detail may be added if necessary to monitor schedule.

1.14 REQUESTED TIME ADJUSTMENT SCHEDULE
Updated Construction Schedule shall not show a completion date later than the Contract Time, subject to any time extensions processed as part of a Change Order.

If an extension of time is requested, a separate schedule entitled "Requested Time Adjustment Schedule" shall be submitted to Owner and Architect.

Indicate requested adjustments in Contract Time which are due to changes or delays in completion of work.

Extension request shall include forecast of project completion date and actual achievement of any dates listed in Agreement.

To the extent that any requests are pending at time of any Construction Schedule update, Time Adjustment Schedule shall also be updated.

F. Schedule shall be a time-scaled network analysis.

Accompany schedule with formal written time extension request and detailed impact analysis justifying extension.

Time impact analysis shall demonstrate time impact based upon date of delay, and status of construction at that time and event time computation of all affected activities.

Event times shall be those as shown in latest Construction Schedule.

H.
01 32 00 - 8 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-111
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I. Activity delays shall not automatically constitute an extension of Contract Time.

J. Failure of subcontractors shall not be justification for an extension of time.

Float is not for the exclusive use or benefit of any single party. Float time shall be apportioned according to needs of project.

Float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing, special lead/lag logic restraints, extended activity durations, or imposed dates shall be apportioned according to benefit of project.

Extensions will be granted only to extent that time adjustments to activities exceed total positive float of the critical path and extends Contract completion date.

Owner shall not have an obligation to consider any time extension request unless requirements of Contract Documents, and specifically, but not limited to these requirements are complied with.

Owner shall not be responsible or liable for any construction acceleration due to failure of Owner to grant time extensions under Contract Documents should requested adjustments in Contract Time not substantially comply with submission and justification requirements of Contract for time extension requests.

In the event a Requested Time Adjustment Schedule and Time Impact Analysis are not submitted within 10 days after commencement of a delay it is mutually agreed that delay does not require a Contract time extension.

1.15 RECOVERY SCHEDULE
When activities are behind Construction Schedule a supplementary Recovery Schedule shall be submitted.

Form and detail shall be sufficient to explain and display how activities will be rescheduled to regain compliance with Construction Schedule.

C. Maximum duration shall be one month and shall coincide with payment period.

Ten days prior to expiration of Recovery Schedule verification to determine if activities have regained compliance with Construction Schedule will be made. Based upon this verification the following will occur:

Supplemental Recovery Schedule will be submitted to address subsequent payment period.

1. 2. Construction Schedule will be resumed.

1.16 UPDATING SCHEDULES
Review and update schedule at least 10 days prior to submitting an Application for Payment.

B. Maintain schedule to record actual prosecution and progress. 01 32 00 - 9 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-112
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
Approved change orders which affect schedule shall be identified as separate new activities.

Change orders of less than $20,000.00 value or less than 3 days duration need not be shown unless critical path is affected.

E. No other revisions shall be made to schedule unless authorized by Owner.

F. Provide narrative Progress Report at time of schedule update which details the following:

1. Activities or portions of activities completed during previous reporting period.

2. Actual start dates for activities currently in progress.

3. Deviations from critical path in days ahead or behind.

List of major construction equipment used during reporting period and any equipment idle.

4. 5. Number of personnel by craft engaged on Work during reporting period.

6. Progress analysis describing problem areas.

7. Current and anticipated delay factors and their impact.

8. Proposed corrective actions and logic revisions for Recovery Schedule.

Proposed modifications, additions, deletions and changes in logic of Construction Schedule.

9. G. Schedule update will form basis upon which progress payments will be made.

Owner will not be obligated to review or process Application for Payment until schedule and Progress Report have been submitted.

1.17 DISTRIBUTION
Following joint review and acceptance of updated schedules distribute copies to Owner, Architect, and all other concerned parties.

Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing any problem anticipated by projections shown in schedule.

END OF SECTION
01 32 00 - 10 Construction Schedule – Network Analysis
TP-113
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 35 15

CALGREEN ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Comply with CALGreen environmental requirements related to energy efficiency, water efficiency and conservation, material conservation and resource efficiency, and environmental quality.

1. Comply with specific CALGreen requirements as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction and applicable to Project.

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Mandatory Measures: Comply with CALGreen Mandatory Measures applicable to Project.

1. Design team and construction team are each required to participate to maximum degree possible to achieve CALGreen environmental requirements.

2. Contract Documents are not intended to limit alternative means of achieving environmental requirements.
a. Suggestions from Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers for achieving environmental requirements are encouraged; team approach is also encouraged.

3. Voluntary Tiers: Verify extent of Voluntary Tiers applicability to Project. a. Construction team is encouraged to work with Owner and Design Team to incorporate additional measures as defined in CALGreen Appendixes. b. Contact Owner and Architect regarding extent of intent of Project to reach Voluntary Tiers, additional work necessary to achieve enhanced Voluntary Tiers, and potential costs involved in achieving each Voluntary Tier. c. Construction team is required to achieve Mandatory Measures and Voluntary Tiers as applicable, and to achieve as much as possible without unacceptable cost impact or schedule impact as determined by Owner.

B. Requirements: Construction team is required to review CALGreen requirements relative to Project related to following.

1. Energy Efficiency: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements.

2. Water Efficiency and Conservation: Comply with requirements for both indoor and outdoor water use.

3. Material Conservation and Resource Efficiency:
01 35 15 - 1 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
TP-114
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a. Nonresidential Projects: Provide weather-resistant exterior wall and foundation envelope including prevention of landscape irrigation spray on structures (if any) and prevent water intrusion at exterior entries. b. Provide construction waste management plan as defined by CALGreen with demolition and construction waste diverted from landfill by recycling or salvage for reuse.
c. Nonresidential Projects Building Maintenance and Operation: Provide for commissioning requirements as required by CALGreen including but not limited to testing, documentation and training, testing and adjusting.

4. Nonresidential Projects Environmental Quality: Comply with following as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction and as applicable to Project. a. Fireplaces: Comply with requirement for fireplaces (if any) to be direct-vent sealed-combustion gas type or sealed wood-burning fireplace, woodstove, or pellet stove.
b. Mechanical Equipment Pollution Control: Cover duct and related air distribution component openings to prevent dust and debris accumulation. c. Finish Material Pollution Control: Comply with CALGreen requirements for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions including but not necessarily limited to following (as applicable):
1) Adhesives, sealants and caulks.
2) Paints and coatings.
3) Carpet systems including carpet, carpet cushion, and adhesives. 4) Resilient flooring systems.
5) Composite wood products formaldehyde limitations.
d. Filters: Comply with requirements for mechanically ventilated buildings to have air filtration media for outside and return air prior to occupancy. e. Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control: Comply with CALGreen requirements for ETS.
f. Interior Moisture Control: Comply with California Building Code requirements and CALGreen requirements for vapor retarder at concrete slab foundations and capillary break (aggregate base).
g. Building Material Moisture Content: Do not use water damaged building materials, remove and place wet and high moisture content insulation, and do not enclose wall or floor framing when moisture content exceeds 19%. h. Indoor Air Quality: Comply with CALGreen requirements for outside air delivery and carbon dioxide monitoring.
i. Environmental Comfort: Comply with CALGreen requirements for whole acoustical control and interior sound control.
01 35 15 - 2 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
TP-115
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
j. Outdoor Air Quality: Comply with CALGreen requirements for reduction of greenhouse gases and ozone depletion.

C. Planning and Design: Construction team shall coordinate with Design Team regarding Project Planning and Design methods related to CALGreen requirements related to Project design and shall comply with requirements related to construction.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Project Management and Coordination: Contractor to identify one person on Contractor’s staff to be responsible for CALGreen issues compliance and coordination.

1. Experience: Environmental project manager to have experience relating to CALGreen building construction.

2. Responsibilities: Carefully review Contract Documents for CALGreen issues, coordinate work of trades, subcontractors, and suppliers; instruct workers relating to environmental issues; and oversee Project Environmental Goals. a. Submittals: Collect, compile, verify, and maintain sufficient information for submittals indicating compliance with applicable CALGreen requirements.

3. Meetings: Discuss CALGreen Goals at following meetings. a.
b.
c.

Pre-construction meeting.

Pre-installation meetings.

Regularly scheduled job-site meetings.

B. CALGreen Issues Criteria: Comply with requirements listed in CALGreen and various Specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. General Issues: Do not use materials with moisture stains or with signs of mold or mildew.

1. Moisture Stains: Materials that have evidence of moisture damage, including stains, are not acceptable, including both stored and installed materials; immediately remove from site.

2. Mold and Mildew: Materials that have evidence of growth of molds or of mildew are not acceptable, including both stored and installed materials; immediately remove from site.
01 35 15 - 3 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
TP-116
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions Environmental Issues: Requests for substitutions shall comply with requirements specified in Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures, with following additional information required where environmental issues are involved.

1. Indicate each proposed substitution complies with CALGreen requirements.

2. Owner and Architect reserve right to reject proposed substitutions where CALGreen information is not provided and where substitution may impact mandatory requirements or Project voluntary tier requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION
A. Environmental Issues: Protect interior materials from water damage; where interior products not intended for wet applications are exposed to moisture, immediately remove from site.

1. Protect installed products using methods that do not support growth of molds and mildews. Immediately remove from site materials with mold and materials with mildew.

END OF SECTION
01 35 15 - 4 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
TP-117
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes general quality control requirements.

1. 2.

3. 4.

General quality control.

Manufacturers' field services.

Mock-ups.

Independent testing laboratory services and inspections.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Refer to applicable codes and Specifications sections for test requirements.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL
A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in respective Specification sections, require manufacturer or supplier to have qualified personnel provide on-site observations and recommendations.

1. 2.

3. 4.

Observe field conditions, including conditions of surfaces and installation.

Observe quality of workmanship.

Provide recommendations to assure acceptable installation and workmanship.

Where required, start, test, and adjust equipment as applicable.

B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect or Owner listing observations and recommendations.

1.4 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Testing laboratory services and inspections specified and required by applicable codes and regulations will be performed by firms independent of firms related to construction operations and shall be acceptable to applicable authorities.

1. Notify Owner immediately where potential conflict of interest may be involved with testing laboratories or inspection services for Project.

2. Owner or Architect may also require independent testing of items where doubts exist that product or system does not conform to Contract Documents.

3. Owner will employ and pay for testing laboratory and special inspectors to provide Project specific testing and inspections under applicable codes and Specification sections except where indicated otherwise. 01 40 00 - 1 Quality Requirements
TP-118
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a. Owner employment of testing laboratory and inspectors shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of applicable codes and Contract Documents.
1) Laboratory and inspectors may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
b. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by Owner's testing laboratory.
1) Payment for retesting shall be charged to Contractor by deducting inspection and testing charges from Contract amount.
c. Owner provided testing shall be limited to Project specific testing and shall not include general tests or approvals of materials, equipment or systems. d. Owner provided inspections shall be limited to Project design team inspections and special inspectors required by applicable authorities.

B. Services shall be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with specified standards.

C. Reports will be submitted to Architect in duplicate giving observations and results of tests and inspections, indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified standards and with Contract Documents.

1. Where required, testing laboratory and inspectors will submit copy of tests and inspections directly to enforcing agency.

D. Contractor shall cooperate with testing laboratory and inspection personnel; furnish tools, samples of materials, design mix, equipment, storage and assistance as requested.

1. Notify Owner, Architect, inspectors, and testing laboratory sufficiently in advance of expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services.

END OF SECTION
01 40 00 - 2 Quality Requirements
TP-119
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes temporary construction facilities and temporary controls.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11. Electricity and lighting.

Heat and ventilation.

Water and sanitary facilities.

Construction aids.

Temporary enclosures.

Barriers.

Cleaning during construction.

Project identification.

Field offices.

Cellular telephone service.

Storage.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 2.

Section 01 70 00: Progress cleaning and final cleaning.

Section 01 74 10: Waste management.

C. Provide temporary construction facilities and temporary controls as required to conform to applicable authorities and as required to complete Project in accordance with Contract Documents.

1. Authorities: Contact governing authorities to establish extent of temporary facilities and temporary controls required by authorities.

1.2 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Provide electrical service required for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type power cords.

1. Connection to existing electrical service is permitted.

B. Provide lighting for construction operations.

1. Permanent lighting may be used during construction; maintain lighting and make routine repairs.

C. Owner will pay costs of energy used from existing on-site services. 01 50 00 - 1 Temporary Facilities and Controls
TP-120
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.3 HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Provide heat and ventilation as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operation, to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature and humidity.

B. Owner will pay costs of energy used from existing on-site services.

1.4 WATER AND SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide water service required for construction operations; extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by use of hoses.

1. Connection to existing facilities is permitted.

2. Owner will pay for water used from existing on-site services.

B. Provide and maintain required sanitary facilities and enclosures.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Noise, Dust and Pollution Control: Provide materials and equipment necessary to comply with local requirements for noise, dust and pollution control.

B. Fire Protection: Maintain on-site fire protection facilities as required by applicable authorities and insurance requirements.

C. Security: Protect Site and Work; prevent unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft.

1. Coordinate with Owner’s security program.

D. Dewatering: Provide and operate drainage and pumping equipment; maintain excavations and site free of standing water.

1.6 ENCLOSURES
A. Temporary Closures: Provide temporary weather-tight closures for exterior openings for acceptable working conditions, for protection for materials, to protect interior materials from dampness, for temporary heating, and to prevent unauthorized entry.

1. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

B. Temporary Partitions: Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from completed areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into completed areas, and to prevent damage to finished areas and installed equipment.

1. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; Flame Spread Rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E84.
01 50 00 - 2 Temporary Facilities and Controls
TP-121
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.7 BARRIERS
A. Barriers: Provide barriers as required to prevent public entry to construction areas and to protect adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.

1. Fence: Provide minimum 8-foot high commercial grade chain link or painted solid wood fence around construction site; equip with gates with locks.

2. Covered Walkways: Provide lighted covered painted walkways as required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

B. Barricades: Provide barricades as required by governing authorities.

C. Tree Protection: Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain; protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials, and puddling or continuous running water.

1.8 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; recycle or dispose of off-site.

B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

1.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Project Sign: Provide minimum 32-square foot Project identification sign of wood frame and exterior grade plywood construction, painted, with computer generated graphics by professional sign maker.

1. Design: As furnished by Architect.

2. Submit to Owner and Architect additional names or changes proposed to Project sign for prior written approval.

3. Erect on site at location established by Architect.

B. Other Signs: Subject to approval of Architect and Owner.

1.10 FIELD OFFICES
A. Field Office: See section 8-2 of the General Provisions.

1.11 CELLULAR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Cellular Telephone Service: Furnish on-site Project Managers with cellular telephone.

Ensure Owner and Architect ability to contact site during construction operations.

1. Schedules: Submit schedules of on-site Project Managers with individual cellular telephone numbers to Owner and Architect; maintain schedules and cell phone numbers up to date during Project on-site operations.
01 50 00 - 3 Temporary Facilities and Controls
TP-122
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.12 STORAGE
A. Storage for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Limit on-site storage to Project area; provide weather-tight storage, with heat and ventilation for products requiring controlled conditions.

1. Maintain adequate space for organized storage and access.

2. Provide lighting for inspection of stored materials.

1.13 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to Substantial Completion Inspection.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.

C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.

END OF SECTION
01 50 00 - 4 Temporary Facilities and Controls
TP-123
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes basic product requirements governing material and equipment.

1. 2.

3. 4.

General product requirements.

Product list.

Quality assurance.

Delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 2.

3. Section 01 25 00: Substitution procedures.

Section 01 30 00: Submittal of manufacturers' certificates.

Section 01 77 00: Operation and maintenance data.

1.2 GENERAL PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS
A. Products include material, equipment, and systems.

B. Comply with Specifications, referenced standards, and applicable codes and regulations as minimum requirements.

C. Provide new materials except as specifically allowed by Contract Documents.

D. Materials to be supplied in quantity within a Specification section shall be by one manufacturer, shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable.

E. Provide equipment and systems composed of materials from a single manufacturer except where otherwise recommended by equipment or systems manufacturer or where otherwise indicated in Contract Documents.

F. Contractor’s Options: Comply with following options; requests for substitutions for named manufacturers and products shall comply with requirements specified in Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

1. Products Identified by Reference Standards: Select product meeting referenced standard for products specified only by reference standard. a. Requests for Substitutions to be limited to products not complying with referenced standards.
1) Submit justification for non-compliance with reference standards as part of Request for Substitutions; if product is foreign made submit rationale why foreign standards and basic materials indicates compliance. 01 60 00 - 1 Product Requirements
TP-124
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Named Manufacturers: Where names of manufacturers are specified select any named manufacturer product meeting Specifications for products specified by naming one or more manufacturers.
a. Submit Request for Substitution for any manufacturer not named.

3. Named Manufacturers and Named Products: Select any named manufacturer named product meeting Specifications for products specified by naming one or more manufacturers and products.
a. Where only one manufacturer and product is named together with additional manufacturers without specific products, Requests for Substitutions to be limited to products not comparable to that specified.
1) Contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers shall take special care to ensure comparable products are being supplied based on design, performance, quality, and longevity.
2) Substitutions: Submit Request for Substitution for any manufacturer not named and for products not comparable to those specified in design, performance, quality, and longevity.

4. Basis of Design: Where manufacturer or manufacturer and product both are indicated as Basis of Design, submit Request for Substitution for other manufacturers and products.

5. “Or Equal” Clauses: Submit request for substitution for manufacturer or product not specifically named in Specifications where terms "or equal", "or approved equal", or similar references are made.

G. Nameplates: Do not attach or imprint manufacturer or producer nameplates on exposed surfaces in occupied spaces except for required labels and operating data.

1. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on service connected and power operated equipment located on easily accessible surface inconspicuous in occupied spaces.
a. Provide name of product and manufacturer, model and serial number, capacity, speed, rating, and similar information.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Within 35 days after award of Contract, submit to Owner and Architect a complete list of major products proposed for installation, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model.

B. Product List: Prior to submittal of second Request for Payment, submit to Architect complete list of major products which are proposed for installation, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model.
01 60 00 - 2 Product Requirements
TP-125
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Tabulate products by Specification number and title.

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with industry standards and applicable codes except when more restrictive tolerances or requirements indicate more rigid standards or precise workmanship.

B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

C. Install products straight, true-to-line, and in correct relationship to adjacent materials, with hairline joints, free of rough, sharp and potentially hazardous edges.

D. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.

1. Seismic Anchors: Conform to code requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage, deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging.

B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.

D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

E. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

F. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection; periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and prevent damage.

H. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

I. Immediately remove from Project products damaged, wet, stained, and products with mold and products with mildew.

1. Take special care to prevent absorbent products such as gypsum board and acoustical ceiling units from becoming wet.

END OF SECTION
01 60 00 - 3 Product Requirements
TP-126
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 70 00

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes execution requirements.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Installer qualifications.

Examination.

Manufacturer’s instructions.

Installation.

Cleaning.

Protection.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 2.

3. Section 01 50 00: Cleaning during construction.

Section 01 77 00: Closeout procedures.

Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and training.

1.2 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Experienced Installers: Installers to have minimum five-years successful experience installing items like those required for Project, except for individuals in training under direct supervision of experienced installer.

1.3 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning installation of a product signifies installer has examined substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with manufacturer requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit Work properly; recheck measurements prior to installing each product.

1. Where portions of Work are to fit to other construction verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication; allow for cutting and patching to avoid delaying Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
01 70 00 - 1 Execution Requirements
TP-127
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.4 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS
A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: When work is specified to comply with manufacturers' recommendations or instructions, distribute copies to persons involved and maintain one set in field office.

1. Conform to requirements specified in Section 01 30 00 for submittal of recommendations or instructions to Architect; submit to Architect only where specified or where specifically requested; otherwise keep in Field Office.

B. Perform work in accordance with details of recommendations and instructions and specified requirements.

1. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and recommendations or instructions consult with Architect.

C. Where manufacturer's information notes special recommendations in addition to installation instructions, comply with both recommendations and instructions.

1.5 INSTALLATION
A. Pre-Installation Meetings: Installers and suppliers are to attend pre-installation meetings scheduled by Contractor.

B. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations and installation instructions unless more restrictive requirements are specified.

C. Locate Work and components accurately, in correct alignment and elevation.

1. Make vertical work plumb and horizontal work level.

2. Install components to allow space for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

D. Install products at time and under conditions to ensure best possible results; maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

E. Conduct operations so no part of Work is subject to damaging operations or excessive loads during normal conditions.

F. Securely anchor permanent construction in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of Work.

G. Allow for building movement including thermal expansion and contraction.

H. Make joints of uniform width; arrange joints as indicated, for best visual effect where not otherwise indicated; fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints except where otherwise indicated.
01 70 00 - 2 Execution Requirements
TP-128
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.6 CLEANING
A. Cleaning During Construction: Specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

B. Progress Cleaning: Keep installed areas clean using cleaning materials specifically recommended by manufacturers of product being cleaned; where not otherwise recommended use nontoxic materials that will not damage surfaces.

1. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing space.

2. Supervise construction operations to assure no part of construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period.

C. Final Cleaning: Execute final cleaning at Substantial Completion.

1. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
a. Vacuuming Equipment: Type with high efficiency particulate arrestor (HEPA) type filters; properly maintained.

2. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean filters of mechanical equipment, replace filters where cleaning is impractical. a. Clean ducts.

3. Clean site; sweep paved areas.

4. Remove waste, surplus materials and rubbish from Project and site; recycle to maximum extent feasible.

1.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect products subject to deterioration with impervious cover. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation and trapping water.

B. Take care to use protective covering and blocking materials that do not soil, stain, or damage materials being protected.

C. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed.

D. Protect interior materials from water damage; immediately remove wet materials from site to prevent growth of mold and mildew on site.

END OF SECTION
01 70 00 - 3 Execution Requirements
TP-129
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 74 10

WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Project requires special Waste Management Program.

1. 2.

3. 4.

CALGreen Waste Management: As required in Section 01 35 15.

Provide itemization of costs related to Waste Management Program.

Effect optimum control of solid wastes.

Prevent environmental pollution and damage.

B. Related Work:

1. 2.

Section 01 35 15: CALGreen environmental requirements.

Section 01 50 00: Temporary facilities and controls.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Inert Fill: A permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete exclusively.

B. Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous waste such as household, commercial, and industrial waste, including construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.

C. Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes solid wastes, such as building materials, packaging, rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.

1. Rubbish: Includes both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as paper, boxes, glass, crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.

2. Debris: Includes both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves and tree trimmings that result from construction or maintenance and repair work.

D. Chemical Waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals and inorganic wastes.

E. Sanitary Wastes:

1. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, distribution, or consumption of food.

2. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage.
01 74 10 - 1 Waste Management
TP-130
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Program: Comply with Contract Documents and applicable code requirements for salvaging, recycling, and disposing of nonhazardous waste.

1. Prior to commencement of Work, schedule and conduct meeting with Owner and Architect to discuss proposed Waste Management Program.

2. Develop mutual understanding relative to details of recycling, and rebate programs.

3. Prepare and submit a written and graphic Waste Management Program including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Indicate procedures to be implemented.
b. Estimate total Project waste to be generated, and estimated cost of disposing of Project waste in landfills.
c. Estimate total cubic yards of following waste categories to be diverted from landfill.
1) Clean dimensional wood, palette wood.
2) Plywood, oriented strand board, and medium density fiberboard. 3) Cardboard, paper, packaging.
4) Other items as directed by Owner and Architect.
d. Estimate amounts of following waste categories in appropriate units (weight, feet, square yards, gallons).
1) Metals.
2) Gypsum board.
3) Carpet.
4) Paint.
5) Other items as directed by Owner and Architect.
e. Submit permit or license and location of waste disposal areas. f. Submit procedures for recycling/re-use program.
g. Submit procedures for rebate programs.
h. Revise and resubmit Waste Management Program as required by Owner and Architect.
1) Review of Contractor's Waste Management Program will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures.
01 74 10 - 2 Waste Management
TP-131
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Submit summary of solid waste generated by Project with each application for progress payment, on form acceptable to Owner and Architect; include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices identifying Project and waste delivered to following locations.

1. 2.

3. Recycling Centers.

Class III landfills.

Inert fills.

C. Prepare rebate information and product documentation as required for Owner to qualify for rebate programs; submit with final closeout submittals.

1. Where feasible submit in electronic format, otherwise in 3-ring binder.

1.4 RECYCLING PROGRAM
A. Recycling: Implement recycling program that includes separate collection of waste materials of following types as applicable to Project requirements; recycling program to be applied by Contractors and subcontractors.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11. 12.

13. 14.

15. 16.

17. 18.

19. 20.

21. Land clearing debris.

Asphaltic concrete.

Concrete.

Masonry materials.

Ferrous metal.

Non-ferrous metal.

Clean dimensional wood and palette wood.

Plywood, oriented strand board, and medium density fiberboard.

Paper - bond.

Paper - newsprint.

Cardboard and paper packaging materials.

Glass.

Plastics.

Gypsum board (unpainted).

Paint.

Rigid foam.

Carpet and pad.

Beverage containers.

Porcelain plumbing fixtures.

Insulation.

Others as appropriate.

B. Handling: Keep materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to recycling process.

1. Clean materials contaminated prior to placing in collection containers.

2. Arrange for collection by or delivery to appropriate recycling center or transfer station that accepts construction and demolition waste for purpose of recycling.

C. Participate in Re-Use Programs: Rebates, tax credits, and other savings obtained for recycled or re-used materials shall accrue to Contractor. 01 74 10 - 3 Waste Management
TP-132
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

END OF SECTION
01 74 10 - 4 Waste Management
TP-133
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes Contract closeout procedures.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Substantial Completion.

Final Completion.

Project record documents.

Material and finish data.

Operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 2.

3. Section 01 30 00: Administrative requirements including attic stock.

Section 01 78 00: Warranties.

Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and training.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, schedule agency reviews as required for “temporary certificate of occupancy” or for “certificate of occupancy”.

B. When Contractor considers Work, or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, submit written notice, with list of items to be completed or corrected.

1. List (“Punch List”): Format pre-approved by Owner and Architect; tabular form with each space listed required.

C. Within a reasonable time, Owner and Architect will inspect status of completion and may add to “Punch List”.

1. Contractor shall pay for Architect's time and direct expenses where more than one Substantial Completion inspection is required.

D. Should Owner and Architect determine Work is not substantially complete, Contractor will be promptly notified in writing, giving reasons.

E. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial completion; Architect will reinspect Work.

1. Contractor shall pay for Architect's time and direct expenses where more than one Substantial Completion inspection is required.

F. When Work is determined to be substantially complete by Architect, a Certificate of Substantial Completion will be prepared in accordance with General Conditions. 01 77 00 - 1 Closeout Procedures
TP-134
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Work is complete, submit written certification indicating:

1. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.

2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies listed (in ‘Punch List”) with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.

3. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative and are operational.

4. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.

B. Special Submittals: In addition to submittals required by Contract, submit following.

1. Provide submittals required by governing authorities to governing authorities with copies included in Project Record Documents.

2. Submit final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

1. Owner will provide Contractor with a separate set of Drawings to maintain for Project Record Documents.

2. Store reproducible Drawings, one set of Project Manual, and one copy of each Change Order separate from documents used for construction, for use as Project Record Documents.

3. Indicate actual work on Drawings; indicate actual products used in Project Manual, including manufacturer, model number and options.

4. Update Project Record Documents daily and allow for Architect inspection at least once a month.

B. At Contract close-out submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor.

C. As-Built Documents: General Contractor shall have electronic “As Built” sets of Contract Documents (Project Drawings and Project Specifications) prepared prior to Final Completion.

1. Contractor shall use one complete electronic set of Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications) for use for “As-Builts”.
01 77 00 - 2 Closeout Procedures
TP-135
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. As-Built Drawings: Revise Drawings based on Record Documents and field measurements made after installation and indicate actual locations of structural elements, ducts, piping, wiring, and equipment.
a. Professional draftspersons experienced in electronic media used for Contract Documents shall revise original Project Drawings based on information recorded on Project Record Documents.

3. As-Built Specifications: Revise Specifications to indicate manufacturers who provided materials specified along with specifics indicating accessories, options, and finishes used in Project.
a. Cross referencing Submittal records is acceptable for accessories only.

4. Review Submittal: Submit two copies of electronic media of “As-Built” Documents to Architect for review.
a. After Architect review, revise where indicated and submit final electronic media to Owner.

D. Final Completion Submittal: At Project Completion submit both Project Record Documents and As-Built Documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor.

1.5 MATERIAL AND FINISH DATA
A. Provide data for primary materials and finishes.

B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2" by 11" three-ring binders with durable plastic covers, clearly identified regarding extent of contents.

1. Electronic Format: Where available in electronic format, submit USB 3.0 flash drives with information required for material and finish data.

C. Arrange by Specification division and give names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. List:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Trade names, model or type numbers.

Cleaning instructions.

Product data.

Maintenance recommendations.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide manuals for:

1. 2.

3. Electrically operated items.

Electrical equipment and controls.

Maintenance manuals provided as part of Submittals.

B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2" by 11" three-ring binders with durable plastic covers, clearly identified regarding extent of contents. 01 77 00 - 3 Closeout Procedures
TP-136
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Provide a separate volume for each system, with a table of contents and index tabs for each volume.

D. Arrange by Specification division and gives names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. List:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Appropriate design criteria.

List of equipment and parts lists.

Operating and maintenance instructions.

Shop drawings and product data.

E. Electronic Format: Where available in electronic format, submit two USB 3.0 flash drives with information required for operation and maintenance manuals.

END OF SECTION
01 77 00 - 4 Closeout Procedures
TP-137
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 78 00

WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
This section is in addition to section 4 of the General Provisions.

A. Warranties: Compile required, and incidental warranties required by Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer Warranties: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranties where specified including inspections and services included or required as part of manufacturer’s standard warranty.

2. Special Warranties: Provide special warranties as required by Specifications sections.

3. These warranties shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents and which may be prescribed by law, regardless of wording of warranty.

B. Extended Correction Period: Contractor shall correct failure of materials and systems to perform in a manner consistent with their intended use including but not limited to failure of waterproofing and roofing systems to resist penetration from water.

1. Standard Correction Period: One year after Substantial Completion or Beneficial Occupancy by Owner except where otherwise noted in Contract Documents; coordinate with General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. a. Items used by Contractor during construction operations shall not be considered substantially completed.
b. Correction of Work Period begins with Owner occupancy not completion of component.

2. Extended Correction Period: Requirements are same as standard correction period but for an extended period as indicated in Specifications sections.

3. Contractor Responsibilities: Bear cost of correcting failed work and replacing construction damaged by failure of materials and systems to perform in a manner consistent with their intended use during correction period. a. Requirements for correction period shall apply to Subcontractors, suppliers, installers, and those responsible for failed work.
b. Owner and Design Team shall not be responsible for determining degree of responsibility of those involved.
01 78 00 - 1 Warranties
TP-138
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Owner’s Rights under Law: Correction period shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents and which may be prescribed by law.

1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTAL
A. Special Warranty and Extended Correction Period Forms: Provide duplicate copies, notarized or on Contractor and Manufacturer's letterhead without conditions or exceptions to requirements specified.

1. Assemble documents executed by subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and manufacturers.

2. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover, clearly identified regarding extent of contents.

3. Electronic Format: Submit USB 3.0 flash drives of warranties, in Microsoft Word.

B. Manufacturer Warranty Forms: Use manufacturer’s standard forms unless otherwise directed in Contract Documents; completed form shall not detract from or confuse interpretations of Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer’s authorized representative shall sign manufacturer warranties.

2. Subcontractor and installer shall countersign warranty where specified. a. Provide required warranties for waterproofing and roofing systems countersigned by subcontractor and installer.

C. Submit final warranties prior to final application for payment.

1. For equipment put into use with Owner's permission during construction, submit within ten days after first operation.

2. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

D. Provide information for Owner's personnel regarding proper procedure in case of failure and instances that might affect validity of manufacturer warranty.

E. Size: 8-1/2" by 11" for three-ring binder; fold larger sheets to fit.

1.3 WARRANTIES AND CORRECTION OF WORK DOCUMENTS
A. Warranties and Correction of Work Documents are intended to protect Owner against failure of work and against deficient, defective and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources.

B. Limitations: Warranties and correction of work requirements are not intended to cover failures that result from:
01 78 00 - 2 Warranties
TP-139
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Unusual or abnormal phenomena of the elements.

2. Owner's misuse, maltreatment or improper maintenance of work.

3. Vandalism after substantial completion.

4. Insurrection or acts of aggression including war.

C. Related Damages and Losses: Remove and replace work which is damaged as result of failure, or which must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of work.

D. Reinstatement: After correction of work reinstate warranty or extended correction period for corrected work to date of original expiration, but not less than half original period.

1. Correction of Work Period: The general correction of work period specified shall not be extended by corrective work except to extent required to correct failure and repair or replace materials damaged by failure.

E. Replacement Cost: Replace or restore failing items without regard to anticipated useful service lives where part of correction of work period, extended correction of work period, and special warranty period unless otherwise noted.

F. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves right to reject unsolicited and coincidental product warranties that detract from or confuse interpretations of Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION
01 78 00 - 3 Warranties
TP-140
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide equipment and systems demonstration and instruction in accordance with Contract Documents.

1. Video record seminars and system demonstrations.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. Section 01 31 00: Project management and coordination.

Section 01 77 00: Contract closeout procedures.

Refer to Facility Services Subgroups for mechanical and electrical requirements.

1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Seminar Agenda and Outline:

1. Prepare a seminar agenda and outline in consultation and cooperation with Owner. Include following:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Equipment and systems that will be included in seminars.

Name of companies and representatives presenting at seminars.

Outline of each seminar's content.

Time and date allocated to each system and item of equipment.

2. Submit preliminary seminar agenda and outline for review and comment by Owner. a. Revise and resubmit agenda and outline until all seminar requirements have been satisfied and seminar dates and presenters have been finalized.

3. Submit final seminar agenda and outline no later than eight weeks before date of Acceptance of Work.

B. Seminar Organization:

1. Contractor’s presentation leaders shall chair seminars. a. Coordinate qualification of training personnel, seminar contents, and presentations with Owner.

2. Coordinate individual presentations and ensure manufacturer’s representatives scheduled to be at training seminars are present.
01 79 00 - 1 Demonstration and Training
TP-141
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Arrange for presentation leaders familiar with design operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of equipment and systems.
a. Where one person is not familiar with all aspects of equipment or system; arrange for specialists familiar with each aspect.

4. Coordinate proposed seminar dates with Owner and select mutually agreeable dates.

5. Video Recording: Arrange for video recording (audio and video) of training seminars and system demonstrations, including seminar and demonstration questions and answers.

C. Seminar Content:

1. Architect’s Consultants will explain design philosophy of primary systems.

2. Include following information in presentations dealing with specific systems. a.
b.
c.
d.

An overview of how system is intended to operate.

Describe design parameters, constrains and operational requirements.

Describe system operation strategies.

Provide information to help in identifying and troubleshooting problems.

3. Include following information in presentations dealing with equipment. a.
b.

Explanation of how equipment operates.

Recommended preventative and routine maintenance.

D. System Demonstration:

1. Demonstrate operation of equipment and systems when specified in individual technical sections. Include following in demonstration. a.
c.
d.
e.

Start-up and shut down.

Operation.

Scheduled and preventative maintenance.

Troubleshooting.

2. Demonstration may be conducted at time of original starting with Owner's prior approval.

E. Seminar and Demonstration Questions:

1. Be prepared to answer questions raised by Owner’s personnel at demonstrations and seminars.

2. If unable to satisfactorily answer questions immediately, provide written response within three days.

F. Use manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data as basis of instruction. 01 79 00 - 2 Demonstration and Training
TP-142
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Video Recording: Submit three copies of each video recording in DVD format acceptable to Owner; include label on each DVD and on each container identifying Project and Seminar content.

END OF SECTION
01 79 00 - 3 Demonstration and Training
TP-143
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Forms for all cast-in-place concrete indicated on the Drawings and subsequent removal of forms, except those earth forms described in this Section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing.

B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of workmen: All workmen shall be experienced mechanics. Provide one person who shall be present at all time during execution of this portion of the work who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of material being installed, the referenced standards and the requirement of this Work and shall direct all Work performed under this Section.

B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork," publication ACI 347R and ACI 318, Section 6.1.

C. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with the requirement of this Section, the more stringent provision shall govern.

D. All Structural Concrete foundations, curbs, floors and any other structural component requiring structural forming or shoring shall be Engineer Designed Systems with calculations and erection drawings provided by the Contractor. Contractor is to secure the services of a California Registered Structural Engineer for the design of Forming Systems.

1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Contractor is to protect all formwork materials before, during and after installation.

B. Damaged Forms: In the event of damage or misalignment, immediately make all repairs and replacement necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
03 10 00 - 1 Concrete Forming and Accessories
TP-144
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Form lumber: All form lumber shall be new except as allowed for re-use of forms in Part 3 of this Specification, and all form lumber shall be one of the following, a combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Architect.

1. Plywood forms may be Plyform, Plyron, and bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association.

Form-lumber may be; fir, larch, hemlock, or approved equal seasoned lumber and surfaced on all four sides.

Form sealers shall be liquid form oil.

2. 3.

Not used.

Other form materials and/or forming systems may be used if approved by the Owner, Architect and Structural Engineer. A complete list of materials, manufacturers and methods of application are to be submitted to the Architect, in accordance with Division 01.

2.2 TIES AND SPREADERS
A. Form ties shall be of proven types and shall be a type which does not leave an open hole through the concrete and which permits patching at every hole.

When forms are removed, all metal ties shall be removed and shall be flush with the concrete surface. No metal ties shall be exposed on the exterior of the walls.

2.3 ALTERNATE FORMING SYSTEMS
A. Not used.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other form materials, not specifically described herein, but required for proper completion of concrete formwork, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to approval by the Owner or Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall verify and be responsible for all-existing dimensions and elevations before any Work is done.

Inspect the installed Work of all other trades; verify that all such Work is complete, and that the installation of Formwork may begin.

Verify that forms have been constructed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, referenced standards and the design.

Discrepancies: Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy. Notify the Architect of all discrepancies. All discrepancies are to be fully resolved before proceeding with installation.

D.
03 10 00 - 2 Concrete Forming and Accessories
TP-145
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.2 CONSTRUCTION FORMS
A. Forms are to be constructed sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of concrete, and able to withstand excessive deflection when filled with wet concrete. Forms shall be braced, anchored and properly aligned.

Layout and form all required cast-in-place concrete to the required dimensions indicated on the Drawings.

Care shall be exercised in the layout of forms to avoid the necessity for cutting, patching, or repair of concrete after it is in place.

Make provisions for all openings, offsets, recesses, anchorage, blocking and other requirements of the Work.

Perform all forming required for Work of other trades and do all cutting and repairing of forms required to permit such installations.

Carefully examine the Drawing and Specifications and verify with other trades for openings, reglets, chases, and other items that are required in the forms.

Forms for pre-cast concrete shall be constructed to provide for shrinkage of the concrete, and shall be adequately braced. All edges shall have chamfer strips except as noted on Drawings.

Construct all forms true, plumb, and square within a tolerance of 1/8" in 12 feet.

3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Provide, install and check all required steel frames, angles, grilles, bolts, inserts and other such items required to be anchored in the forms before the concrete is placed.

3.4 BRACING
A. Properly brace and tie the forms together so as to maintain size, shape, and alignment, and to provide safety to personnel.

B. Construct all bracing and supporting members of ample size and strength to safely support, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which they may be subjected.

3.5 PLYWOOD FORMS
A. Plywood forms shall be designed for loads imposed. Nail the plywood panels directly to studs and apply in a manner to minimize the number of joints.

B. Make all panel joints tight butt joints with all edges true and square, if necessary, use tape to prevent excessive leakage.

3.6 FOOTING FORMS
A. Foundation forms are to be wood forms.

B. Earth forms may be used for footings provided the soil will stand without caving, as determined by the Architect (Structural Engineer) and the sides of the bank are made with a neat cut to the minimum dimensions indicated.

3.7 REUSE OF FORMS
A. Reuse of forms shall be subject to approval of the inspector.

B. Reuse of forms shall not delay or change the schedule for placement of concrete from the schedule if all forms were new.
03 10 00 - 3 Concrete Forming and Accessories
TP-146
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Reuse of forms shall not affect the structural stability of the forms or the appearance of the finished concrete.

3.8 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Side forms of foundations may be removed 48 hours after placement of concrete.

Where foundations are supporting lateral loads, forms shall not be removed until approved by the inspector.

Use care and diligence, and protect workmen, passers-by, and the installed work and materials of other trades. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete can support all loads.

Cut nails, tie wires and form ties off flush, leave all surfaces smooth and clean.

Remove metal spreader ties and fill in the resulting pockets to match the surrounding areas with grout or dry pack. Sack all exposed faces.

Fill all holes resulting from the use of bolts, ties, spreaders and sleeve nuts with cement grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one part Portland cement, to two parts sand; apply grout immediately after removing forms.

3.9 CLEANING
A.

Remove all forming material from the site and dispose of in approved dumps.

Clean area of all left over debris including stakes, ties, form boards, wires, concrete spills, etc., and leave area in a neat clean condition.

END OF SECTION
03 10 00 - 4 Concrete Forming and Accessories
TP-147
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete steel reinforcement as indicated.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be in accordance with requirements of CBC, Chapter 19A.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcement Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315. Include assembly diagrams, bending charts and slab plans. Indicate lengths and location of splices, size and lengths of reinforcing steel.

B. Closeout Submittals: Record exact locations of reinforcing that vary from Shop Drawings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice.

American Welding Society (AWS).

American Concrete Institute (ACI).

CBC, Chapter 19A, Concrete.

B. Source Quality Control: Refer to Division 01 Sections for general requirements and to following paragraphs for specific procedures. Testing laboratory retained by the Owner shall perform following conformance testing, select test Samples of bars, ties, and stirrups from the material at the Project site or from the place of distribution, with each Sample consisting of not less than two 18 inch long pieces, and perform the following tests according to ASTM A 615.

1. Identified Bars: If Samples are obtained from bundles as delivered from the mill, identified as to heat number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with the identification certificate so as to be readily identified, perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of bars. Submit mill reports when Samples are selected. 03 20 00 - 1 Concrete Reinforcing
TP-148
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Unidentified Bars: When positive identification of reinforcing bars cannot be performed and when random Samples are obtained, perform tests for each 2.5 tons or fraction thereof, one tensile and one bend test from each size of bars.

C. Certification of Welders: Shop and Project site welding shall be performed by certified welding operators.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Avoid exposure to dirt, moisture or conditions harmful to reinforcing.

B. Reinforcing steel bars, wire, and wire fabric shall be stored on the Project site to permit easy access for examination and identification of each shipment. Material of each shipment shall be separated for size and shape.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide reinforcing of sizes, gages and lengths indicated, bent to indicated shapes.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 and A 706 for welding, grade 60 billet steel unless otherwise specified or indicated.

Bars or Rod Mats: ASTM A 184.

Wire Fabric for Reinforcement: ASTM A 185.

Tie Wire: ASTM A 82, fully annealed, copper-bearing steel wire, 16 gage minimum.

Chairs, Spacers, Supports, and Other Accessories: Standard manufacture conforming to ACI-315 fabricated from steel wire of required types and sizes. For reinforcement supported from grade, provide properly sized dense precast blocks of concrete.

2.3 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING BARS
A. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction for fabrication of reinforcing steel.

Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are not permitted. Provide only tested and permitted bar materials.

Welding: Provide only ASTM A 706 steel where welding is indicated. Perform welding by the direct electric arc process in accordance with AWS D1.4 and specified lowhydrogen electrodes. Preheat 6 inches each side of joint. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is not permitted. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of loose scale and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and chip burned edges before placing welds.

When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded B.

C.
03 20 00 - 2 Concrete Reinforcing
TP-149
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds deemed defective, using chisel, and replace with proper welding.

Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with CBC requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings. Before installation, clean reinforcing of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and any coating that could reduce bond.

Accurately position, install, and secure reinforcing to prevent displacement during the placement of concrete.

Provide metal chairs to hold reinforcement the required distance above form bottoms.

Space chairs so that reinforcement will not be displaced during installation. Provide metal spacers to secure proper spacing. Stirrups shall be accurately and securely wired to bars at both top and bottom. At slabs, footings, and beams in contact with earth, provide concrete blocks to support reinforcement at required distance above grade.

Install and secure reinforcement to maintain required clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Lapped splices shall be installed wherever possible in a manner to provide required clearance between sets of bars. Stagger lapped splices.

Dowels and bars extending through construction joints shall be secured in position against displacement before concrete is installed and subsequently cleaned of concrete encrustation’s while they are still soft.

Do not install reinforcing in supported slabs and beams until walls and columns have been installed to underside of slabs and beams or until construction joints have been thoroughly cleaned. Reinforcing shall be inspected before placement of concrete and cleaned as required.

Use deformed bars unless otherwise indicated, except for spiral reinforcement.

3.2 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
03 20 00 - 3 Concrete Reinforcing
TP-150
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. 2.

Cast-in-place concrete placement and finishing.

Related Sections:
a. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. b. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating locations of cast-in-place concrete Work and accessory items such as vapor barriers. Include details and locations of reinforcing, embedded items, and interfacing with other Work.

B. Product Data:

1. Mix Design: Submit a concrete mix design for each mix that will be provided for the Work. Include water/ cement ratio, size of coarse aggregate and amount of any admixture. Predict minimum compressive strength, maximum slump and air content percentage.

Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete shall deliver to the inspector a certificate with each mixer truck. Certificate shall bear the signature of representative of the testing laboratory, and shall state quantity of cement, water, fine and coarse aggregate and admixtures.

2. C. Material Samples: Submit Samples illustrating concrete finishes, minimum 12 inches x 12 inches in size.

Certificates: Submit a notarized certificate that each of following conforms to standards indicated:

1. 2.

3. Aggregates - ASTM Standards C33
Admixtures - ASTM Standards C260
Curing materials - ASTM Standards C171

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publication:

1. 2.

ACI 211 - Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of Concrete.

ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
03 30 00 - 1 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-151
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. 4.

5. 6.

ACI 305 - Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.

ACI 306 - Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.

ACI 308 - Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.

ACI 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM C 31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.

ASTM C 39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

ASTM C 88 - Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate.

ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.

ASTM C 143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.

ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

ASTM C 172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

ASTM C 173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.

ASTM C 227 - Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).

ASTM C 231 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.

ASTM C 260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

ASTM C 289 - Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).

ASTM D 1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

6. 7.

8. 9.

10. 11.

12. 13.

14. 15.

16. D. Continuous inspection shall be provided at the batch plant and for transit-mixed concrete to run check sieve analysis of aggregate, check moisture content of fine aggregate, check design of mix, check cement being used with test reports, check loading of mixer trucks, and certify to quantities of materials placed in each mixer truck.

Inspection shall be performed by a representative of a testing laboratory selected by the Owner. Owner will pay for inspection costs. Notify the laboratory 24 hours in advance of time concrete is to be mixed. Notify the laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing within at least 24 hours of scheduling time.

Continuous batch plant inspection requirement may be waived in accordance with CBC Section 1705A.3.3.1. Waiver shall be in writing, including DSA approval.

Strength Test of Concrete: Refer to Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

G.
03 30 00 - 2 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-152
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Mixing and Placing Concrete: Refer to Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

Ready-mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C 94 and CBC Standard 19A-3 and 19A-4. Each batch of concrete delivered to the Project site shall be accompanied by a time slip bearing departure time and signature of batch plant supervisor. Concrete shall be placed within 90 minutes after start of mixing.

Store cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by foreign matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be furnished.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Requirements:

1. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. Surfaces, in which concrete is to come in contact with, shall be free from frost or ice. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be furnished.

When placing concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather the mix shall have a temperature of at least 50 degrees F., but not more than 90 degrees F. when cement is added. Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. for at least 72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hydrated. When necessary, concrete materials shall be heated before mixing.

Special precautions shall be provided for protection of transit-mixed concrete.

2. B. Hot Weather Requirements:

1. During hot weather, proper attention shall be provided for ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing, to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation which could impair required strength or durability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of CBC Chapter 1905A.

B. Strength of Concrete: Concrete, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall be provided with a minimum ultimate 28-day strength of 3000 psi (f'c). For high-earlystrength concrete, age for reaching the f'c shall be as indicated on Drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type II Portland Cement. Furnished cement shall be as selected and reviewed for concrete proportioning.

B. Aggregates: Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33 and C 227 except as modified herein. Any suitable individual grading of coarse aggregate may be furnished, 03 30 00 - 3 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-153
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
provided Grading of Combined Aggregate indicated in following table is obtained.

Refer to Section 01 45 23: Testing and Inspection.

GRADING OF COMBINED

AGGREGATE
Sieve Sumber or
Size in inches
Passing a 2"
Passing a 1-1/2"
Passing a 1"
Passing a 3/4"
Passing a 3/8"
Passing a No. 4
Passing a No. 8
Passing a No. 16
Passing a No. 30
Passing a No. 50
Passing a No. 100
1-1/2"
Maximum
------
95-100
70-90
50-80
40-60
35-55
25-40
16-34
12-25
2-12
0-3
1"
Maximum
------
------
90-100
70-95
45-70
35-55
27-45
20-38
12-27
5-15
0-5
3/4"
Maximum
------
------
------
90-100
55-75
40-60
30-46
23-40
13-28
5-15
0-5
C.

Water: Water shall be potable and free from deleterious matter.

Admixtures: CBC Chapter 19A, Section 1903A.6, Type A or D.

Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of thickness indicated, conforming to ASTM D 1751.

F. Curing Paper and Liquid Curing Compounds:

1. Curing Paper: A standard brand conforming to ASTM C 171, Type 1 - Regular, Kure-N-Seal.

Liquid Curing Compounds: A standard brand, clear liquid conforming to ASTM C 309, Master Builders, Grace, Antihydro.

2. G. Abrasive Aggregate: Norton Alundum, Union Carbide Carborundum, or equal, graded #12 through #30 sizes, color as selected by Architect.

Underlayment: Latex underlayment for filling low spots in concrete shall be Tile-Tex by Flintkote Co., Webtex #60 or Fixallatex by Dowman Products Co.

Vapor Retarder: See Section 07 26 16 - Under-Slab Vapor Retarder.

Stair Strips and Nosing:

1. Fabricated from 6063-T5 extruded aluminum, mill finish. Anti-slip filler shall contain at least 60 percent virgin grain aluminum oxide abrasive. Binder shall be fully cured resilient type epoxy, with binder-to-filler ratio of 13 percent. The epoxy-abrasive filler shall extend over the curved front edge of the nosing and shall be securely bonded to the extruded aluminum base.

Manufactured by Wooster Products Inc. American Safety Tread Co. Inc., or equal.

2. 03 30 00 - 4 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-154
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Nosing and strips for concrete casting shall be provided with Sure-Hold anchors, chevron shaped continuous full length of nosing or strip.

Nosings and anchors for attachment to hydrated concrete stairs and wood stairs shall be similar to those specified below, except they shall be provided with countersunk holes for screws and fasteners.

Colors: As selected by Architect to contrast with stair color. Colors shall extend uniformly through the filler.

Strip and Nosing Types:

4. 5.

6. a. Nosings for sloped riser steel pan stairs: Type WP4J, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick.

Nosings for new concrete stairs: Type WP4C, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick, nose projects down 1/4 inch.

Nosings for square edged steel pan stairs: Type WP4SP, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick nose.

Strips for recessing into concrete stairs: Type WP1A, except 2-1/4 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick. American Safety Tread Co., Type 24, or equal.

Strips for adhering to existing or hydrated concrete: Flex-Tred anti-safety strips, minimum 2-1/4 inches wide. Cut from rolls and round corners.

Strips for anchoring into wood or stone: American Safety Tread Co., Type 24H, or equal, with holes for fasteners, 2-1/4 inches wide. b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely fastened in place. Contact the inspector at least 24 hours before placing concrete; do not place concrete until inspected by the inspector.

B. Pouring Record: A record shall be kept on the Project site of time and date of placing concrete in each portion of structure. Such record shall be maintained on the Project site until Substantial Completion and shall be available for examination by the Architect and DSA.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vapor Retarder: See Section 07 26 16 - Under-Slab Vapor Retarder.

B. Reglets and Rebates:

1. Form reglets and rebates in concrete to receive flashing, frames and other equipment as detailed and required. Coordinate dimensions and locations required with other related Work.

If concrete slabs on grade adjoin a wall or other perpendicular concrete surface, form a reglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal concrete Work. Reglet shall

2. 03 30 00 - 5 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-155
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
be full thickness of the slab and shall be 3/4 inch wide, unless otherwise indicated. Requirement does not apply to exterior walks, unless specifically indicated.

C. Not used.

D. Screeds: Install screeds accurately and maintain at required grade or slab elevations after steel reinforcement has been installed, but before starting to place concrete.

Install screeds adjacent to walls and in parallel rows not to exceed 8 feet on centers.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Conveying and Placing:

1. Concrete shall be placed only under direct observation of the inspector. Do not place concrete outside of regular working hours, unless the inspector has been notified at least 48 hours in advance.

Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to location of final placement by methods, which will prevent separation or loss of materials.

Concrete shall be placed as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hydrated or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall be placed, nor shall retempered concrete or concrete which has been remixed after initial set be placed.

In placing concrete in thin sections, provide openings in forms, elephant trunks, tremies or other recognized devices, to prevent segregation and accumulation of partially hydrated concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above level of concrete being placed. Such devices shall be installed so that concrete will be dropped vertically. Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to final placement surface shall not exceed 6 feet.

Concrete shall be placed as a continuous operation until placing of panel or section is completed. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level.

Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during placement, and shall be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures with mechanical vibrators.

Where conditions make consolidation difficult, or where reinforcement is congested, batches of mortar containing same proportions of cement, sand, and water as provided in the concrete, shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

B. Compaction and Screeding:

1. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8 inch of mortar is brought to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with a heavy straightedge until depressions and irregularities are eliminated, and surface is true to finish grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris.

Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continued tamping to raise mortar to surface is not performed. Laitance shall be

2. 03 30 00 - 6 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-156
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
removed by brushing with a stiff brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarse aggregate.

C. Floating and Troweling:

1. When concrete has hydrated sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency before troweling. Top surfaces shall receive at least 2 troweling operations with steel hand trowel. Prior to and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with an atomizing type fog sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish.

For interior finish slabs, final troweling shall provide a hard, impervious, and nonslip surfaces, free from defects and blemishes. Finished surface shall be within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Avoid burnishing. Do not add cement or sand to absorb excess moisture.

Exterior Paving and Cement Walks: Finish as specified above, except surface shall be given a non-slip broom finish to match Sample reviewed by the Architect.

Vertical concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth and free from marks or other surface defects.

2. 3.

4. D. Curing:

1. Concrete shall be maintained above 50 degrees F., and in a moist condition for 7 days after placing, except that high early strength concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for 3 days.

Before applying curing paper, interior floor treated with colored hardener shall be given a heavy protective coat of colored wax left unpolished, and then immediately covered with paper. If wax is not applied within two hours after final troweling, concrete shall be sprayed with a fine water mist and maintained continuously moist until wax is applied, unless spraying is not recommended by hardener manufacturer. After other Work such as plastering and painting has been completed, curing paper shall be removed and waxed floors cleaned of protective wax coating.

Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7 consecutive days after placing.

If weather is hot or surface has dried out, spray surface of concrete slabs and paving with fine mist of water, starting not later than 2 hours after final troweling and continuing until sunset. Surface of finish shall be kept continuously wet until curing medium has been installed.

Immediately after finishing, roof slabs and monolithic floor finish to receive resilient floor covering shall be uniformly and completely coated with liquid curing compound.

2. 3.

4. 5.
03 30 00 - 7 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-157
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a. Install compound in a manner and quantity sufficient to produce a uniform continuous thin film of water-impervious membrane. Compound shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

Protect adjoining surfaces from damage during installation. If curing compound is not applied immediately, cover finished concrete with wet burlap or curing paper and keep concrete surface wet for a period not to exceed thirty hours following finishing of concrete. At end of that time, burlap or paper shall be removed and curing compound installed as specified above.

Immediately after finishing, monolithic floor slabs not scheduled to receive resilient floor covering shall be covered with curing paper. Paper shall be lapped 3 inches at joints and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be cemented to finish. Repair or replace paper damaged during construction operations.

Within 24 hours after finishing, exterior slabs and paving, and interior slabs to receive cement topping or mortar setting beds, shall be covered with sand to a depth of 2 inches and kept thoroughly wet for 7 days. b.
c.
d.
1) Instead of sand covering, exterior walks and paving where no other surface treatment is specified, may be cured with clear liquid curing compound immediately installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

E. Filling, Leveling and Patching:

1. Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, or ground with power-driven machines to required tolerances. Low spots shall be filled with latex underlayment, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exterior walls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.

2. F. Cement Base: Cement base shall be of the height, thickness, and shape detailed.

Base shall be reinforced with one inch mesh, 18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall be one part Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and one part pea gravel. Colored cement base shall include a chemically inert mineral oxide pigment in the mix.

3.4 FINISHING
A. Soda and Acid Wash: Concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint or other finish, and which have been formed by oil coated forms, shall be scrubbed with a solution of 1-1/2 pounds of caustic soda to one gallon of water. Surfaces where smooth wood or waste molds have been furnished shall be scrubbed with a solution of 20 percent muriatic acid. Wash with clean water after scrubbing.
03 30 00 - 8 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-158
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs, walls, and other surfaces shall be sacked by an application of Portland cement grout, floated, and rubbed. Sacking shall not be performed until patching and filling of holes has been completed. Entire sacking operation for any continuous area shall be started and completed within the same day.

1. Mix one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with a brush or spray gun, then immediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously.

While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing excess grout. Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap.

2. C. Sandblasting: Exterior concrete surfaces to receive stucco dash coat finish, where plywood or other smooth forms have been furnished, shall be uniformly sand-blasted with sharp quartz sand under sufficient air pressure to remove dirt, form oil and other foreign materials, and roughen surface to provide a proper bond. Such surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clean water after sandblasting.

Abrasive: Concrete stair treads, landings, ramps and steps on interior and exterior of buildings, and interior exposed concrete floors in shop buildings shall receive an abrasive finish. Abrasive grains in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet shall be evenly installed by dust-on method and embedded into surface during first troweling operation. Additional abrasive grains, in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet, shall then be evenly installed and embedded into surface during final troweling operation.

Floor Hardener: Exposed interior concrete floors throughout shall be treated with floor hardener, as specified. Install hardener after surface of concrete has reached the point where no excess moisture is present, but while it is still plastic. Hardener shall be installed as follows:

1. Colored Hardener: Install at rate of 40 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application.

Gray (natural) Hardener: Install at rate of 20 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application.

Hardener shall be evenly distributed and thoroughly floated into surface mortar with a wood float. An additional 20 pounds of hardener, colored or gray, specified as above, shall be installed over each 100 square feet, and troweled to an even surface having uniform color and texture.

2. 3.

F. Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at the Project site and shall be composed of one volume of Portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate. Materials shall be mixed dry with sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its own weight. When grout is used as a dry pack concrete, add sufficient water to provide a stiff mixture, which can be molded into a sphere. 03 30 00 - 9 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-159
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
G. Broom Finish: Exterior stair treads and landings shall be provided with a non-slip broom finish in addition to abrasive finish specified.

H. Abrasive Stair Nosing: Nosing shall be installed according to manufacturers written recommendations.

3.5 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordance with the following:

1. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5 days after initial placement.

A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a maximum of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least one inch on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing of new concrete.

Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of any kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix.

2. 3.

B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs. Space approximately 20 feet apart, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall extend entirely through slab with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab. Joint filler shall be 3/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated with markings made with a V-grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs or obstructions, with clean cut angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated, shall be marked off into rectangles of not more than 12 square feet and shall have a center marking where more than 5 feet wide.

3.6 TESTING
A. Molded Cylinder Tests:

1. Owner Consultant will prepare cylinders. Each cylinder shall be dated, given a number, point in structure from which sample was obtained, mix design number, mix design strength and result of accompanying slump test noted.

Separate tests of molded concrete cylinders obtained at same place and time shall be made at age of 3 days, 7 days, and 28 days. A strength test shall be the average of the compressive strength of 2 cylinders, obtained from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of f'c.

Test cylinders shall be prepared at the Project site and stored in testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 31, and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39.

2. 3.

B. Core Test: At request of the Architect, cores of hardened concrete shall be cut from portions of hydrated structures for testing, in accordance with CBC and ASTM C 42. 03 30 00 - 10 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-160
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Provide 4 inch diameter cores at representative places throughout the structure as designated by the Architect.

In general, provide sufficient cores to represent concrete placed with at least one core for each 4,000 square feet of building area, and at least 3 cores total for each Project.

Where cores have been removed, fill voids with drypack, and patch the finish to match the adjacent existing surfaces.

2. 3.

C. Concrete Consistency: Measure consistency according to ASTM C 143. Test twice each day or partial day's run of the mixer.

Adjustment of Mix: If the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of Work, as indicated by molded test cylinders, fall below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated, adjust mix design for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum strength requirements.

Defective Concrete:

1. Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of Work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Architect and DSA.

Concrete Work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within 1/250 of span, not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and levels, contains sawdust shavings, wood or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective Work and shall be removed and replaced.

2. F. Concrete for Equipment Pads, Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated, strength shall be 3,000 psi concrete. Exposed concrete shall be provided with a hand trowel finish with radius corners and edges. Form and place concrete where necessary as described in Section 30 10 00: Concrete Forms and Accessories, and reinforced as described in Section 03 20 00: Concrete Reinforcement. Calcium chloride shall not be furnished in any concrete mix provided for the installation of underground electrical conduits. For concrete encasement of more than one conduit, furnish 3/4 inch to 1 inch aggregate as specified for concrete mix.

3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
03 30 00 - 11 Cast-In-Place Concrete
TP-161
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 03 35 15

SEALED CONCRETE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide applied curing, hardener, sealer type curing compound to concrete flooring including preparation of concrete as required for complete installation.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing applying hardener sealer at areas indicated to have a hardener sealed finish.

1. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

2. Review concrete installation and coordinate required preparation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of material involved in curing, hardener, sealer for concrete.

B. Samples: Furnish sample panels of concrete with curing, hardener, sealer applied to half of surface; indicate which half has hardener sealer.

C. Maintenance Instructions: Provide written instructions for recommended periodic maintenance.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Curing, Hardener, Sealer Installers: Firms with not less than five years successful experience applying specified curing, hardener, sealer and acceptable to system manufacturer.

B. Mock-Up: Erect minimum 100 square feet of concrete flooring with curing, hardener, sealer at location as approved. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A.

Nox-Crete Products Group (800.669.2738).

W.R. Meadows, Inc. (800.342.5976).

PROSOCO, Inc. (800.255.4255).

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
03 35 15 - 1 Sealed Concrete Flooring
TP-162
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide applied curing, hardener, sealer to concrete flooring.

B. Regulatory Requirements, VOC Emissions: Comply with applicable limitations for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions for concrete sealing materials.

Accessibility Regulatory Requirements: Provide for assuring access for persons with disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations for slip resistance.

1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Standards Code.

2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

3. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Hardener, Sealer, Densifier: Provide water borne penetrating lithium silicate system designated by system manufacturer as hardener, sealer, densifier.

1. Basis of Design: Nox-Crete Products Group/Duro-Nox LS.

2. Basis of Design: W. R. Meadows, Inc./Liqui-Hard Ultra.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A.

Ensure surfaces to receive hardener sealer are clean and well cured.

Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper finishing based on manufacturer recommendations.

C. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean concrete slab free from foreign matter and prepare concrete for sealing in accordance with system manufacturer recommendations.

INSTALLATION
A. Comply with curing, hardener, sealer manufacturer recommendations and application instructions for application of concrete hardener sealer densifier as required to match approved samples and mock-up.

3.3 3.4 PROTECTION
A. Comply with system manufacturer recommendations for protecting floors until ready for use. Keep surface dry for minimum 48 hours after application. 03 35 15 - 2 Sealed Concrete Flooring
TP-163
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Do not permit traffic on floors with curing, hardener, sealer for at least 72 hours.

C. Protect floors with curing, hardener, sealer until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
03 35 15 - 3 Sealed Concrete Flooring
TP-164
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 04 22 00

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Concrete masonry units.

Reinforcing steel.

Mortar, grout and grouting.

Bolts, anchors, hardware, metal frames, and other insert items.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.

Mix Design: Submit grouting mix design.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data for assembly components, materials, and accessories.

Samples: Submit Samples for each type of required masonry unit, including reinforcement and accessories.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform the Work in accordance with CBC, Chapter 21A. Refer to Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

Comply with requirements of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

Concrete Masonry Units: Sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 140.

1. Notify the testing laboratory a minimum of 45 days in advance of installing concrete unit masonry, to allow for testing of the units for compression, shrinkage, and absorption. Absorption test requires 40 days.

The retained material testing laboratory shall receive five concrete masonry units per test from masonry unit manufacturer, as designed or specified by the Architect, and shall perform and send required test results to the Architect and inspector.

2. D.

Portland Cement: Obtain sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 150.

Mortar: Obtain sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 780.

Grout: Obtain sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 404. 04 22 00 - 1 Concrete Masonry Units
TP-165
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
G. Compressive Tests: Obtain sample and test to verify compliance with the following minimum values:

1. 2.

3. Mortar: At least 800 psi at 7 days and 1,800 psi at 28 days.

Grout: At least 1,200 psi at 7 days and 2,000 psi at 28 days.

Do not test 28-day specimen when 7-day tests exceed 28-day requirements.

H. Inspection During Installation: Inspector will continuously observe the installation of reinforced masonry.

The Owner will be responsible for the costs of original tests and inspection.

If core testing is required by DSA, masonry removed by coring operations shall be replaced to match adjoining Work. Core testing shall conform with CBC, Chapter 21A.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.

Store units above grade on level platforms to allow air circulation under stacked units.

Cover and protect against wetting before installation.

Handle units on pallets or flatbed barrows. Free discharge from conveyor units or transportation in mortar trays is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Modular medium weight conforming to ASTM C 90, hollow load-bearing concrete unit masonry.

1. 2.

Provide open-end units at walls to be grouted.

Provide closed-end units at walls and at openings where ends will be exposed in finish Work; provide bond beam blocks where horizontal reinforcing is indicated.

Provide special shapes and accessory units at locations indicated on Drawings.

Except as otherwise specified, provide units in standard gray color.

Masonry unit shall have been cured for a minimum of 28 days.

Masonry unit shall have maximum linear shrinkage or 0.065 percent from saturated to oven dry.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, from one source.

Mortar: ASTM C 270.

Grout: ASTM C 476.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

Admixture for Grout: Grout Aid Type 2, complying with DSA requirements; as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corp. Refer to Section 01 45 23: Testing and Inspection.

G. Water: Potable and fresh.
04 22 00 - 2 Concrete Masonry Units
TP-166
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
H.

Cleaning Materials: Shure Klean No. 600 detergent by ProSoCo.

Miscellaneous Materials: As required to complete the Work.

Sampling and Testing of Mortar: Refer to Section 01 45 23: Testing and Inspection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Discard units with cracked faces, chipped surfaces, or other defects not complying with requirements of ASTM C 216.

3.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING
A. Mortar: Dry, loose volumes. Mix proportions shall be verified by material testing laboratory.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Portland Cement: 1 part.

Hydrated lime: 1/4 to 1/2 part.

Mortar sand: 2-1/4 to 3 parts.

Water: to provide required consistency.

Mixing time for Silotec Mortar System shall be in accordance with Silotec Mortar System recommendations instead of those indicated in Section 01 45 23: Testing and Inspection.

B. Grout: Shall provide a minimum strength of 2000 psi unless noted otherwise. Grout strengths in excess of more than 2000 psi shall be verified by a material testing laboratory.

1. Fine Grout: Portland Cement 1 part; sand 2 ¼ to 3 parts; water to attain a slump of 8 to 10 inches.

Coarse Grout: Portland Cement 1 part; pea gravel 2 ¼ to 3 parts; water to attain a slump of 8 to 10 inches.

2. C. Measurements: Proportion by accurate volume measurements. Measure in calibrated devices that can be checked at any time.

1. 2.

Add water for workable consistency.

Shovel measurements are not permitted.

D. Mixing: Place sand, cement, and water in mixer in that order, while mixer is running; mix for 3 minutes, add lime, and admixture (for grout), and continue mixing until a uniform mass is provided, but in no case less than 10 minutes.

1. 2.

Equipment for mixing and handling mortar and grout shall be acceptable to DSA.

Batches of less than one sack of cement, and fractional sack batches are not permitted.
04 22 00 - 3 Concrete Masonry Units
TP-167
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Re-tempering Time Limit: Re-temper on mortar boards, for at least 3 minutes, but not more than 10 minutes when required, by adding water into a basin formed by mortar, and installing mortar into it. Dashing, or pouring of water over mortar is not permitted.

1. 2.

3. Do not re-temper mortar which has become hard or non-plastic.

Discard mortar, which has not been installed within one hour after original mixing.

Ready-Mix Grout: Grout batched off the Project site and delivered by mixer truck shall be subject to same procedures and controls as prescribed by DSA building code requirements. Refer to Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY UNITS
A. Workmanship: Install masonry plumb and true to line with straight level joints of uniform thickness. Maintain masonry clean during and after installation.

1. 2.

3. Lay-out and incorporate embedded hardware items.

Assist other trades with built-in items, which require cutting and fitting of masonry.

Cut block units with a diamond saw or carborundum wheel. Trowel or chisel cutting is not permitted.

4. Keep cavities clear of droppings and debris. Remove promptly.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Install as indicated on Drawings. Except as otherwise indicated, install reinforcement in accordance with standards of Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and to requirements specified in Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. Do not splice vertical reinforcing except where indicated on the Drawings.

Shoring: Provide temporary shoring for lintels with sufficient strength to carry load without deflecting. Remove temporary shoring 28 days after masonry has been installed.

Block Installation: Clean dirt and dust from surfaces before installation. Do not wet masonry units except in very dry weather.

1. Foundation preparation: Sandblast tops of concrete starting surfaces, wash-off by high pressure water jet, and slurry coat surfaces with neat cement grout for bond to masonry.

Install masonry with mortar to required joint thickness. Install blocks with 3/8-inch mortar bed on entire horizontal surface. Fill head joints solid, install tightly to adjoining units. Provide 3/8-inch joint thickness.

2. a.
b.
c.

Hold racking to a minimum.

No toothing is permitted.

If it becomes necessary to move a unit after it has been installed, remove the unit, discard the mortar, and install the unit in fresh mortar.

3. 4.

Anchor Bolts: Provide one-inch minimum grout space around protruding bolts.

Bond: Unless otherwise indicated, install units in common running bond. 04 22 00 - 4 Concrete Masonry Units
TP-168
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

5. Finish Joint Treatment: Unless otherwise indicated, cut both interior and exterior joints flush, and tool slightly concave to a dense, uniform surface.

6. Grouting: Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, completely fill cells with grout.

E. Steel Door Frames:

1. Locate doorframes accurately, install plumb, "Ram-set" or "Rawlplug" to floor surface and brace in position before start of masonry installation. a. Frames are specified to be furnished with adjustable anchors. b. Fill interior of frames solid with mortar or grout as walls are constructed.

Provide temporary wood spreaders from jamb to jamb and from head to floor to ensure that jambs do not bow-in, distort from a straight line, or deflect from superimposed loads during construction.

2. 3.4 LOW-LIFT GROUTING FOR HOLLOW MASONRY UNITS
A. After mortar joints have set, cores are cleaned of mortar and debris, and reinforcing is installed and inspected, grout cells in 2 feet maximum lifts, providing specified pea gravel grout mix. Refer to Section 01 45 23: Testing and Inspection.

Grouted walls shall be solid and without voids.

Grout may be installed by pump, tremie or bucket, using hoppers to avoid spilling on exposed surfaces.

Place an initial 2 feet high lift around, thoroughly compact, then place balance of each lift, compacting again through total lift, with hardwood spading sticks or pencil vibrators.

Stop grout pours 1-1/2 inches below top of each lift.

Remove and discard spilled grout from upper units before grout can harden.

Bracing: Adequately brace walls against wind and other forces during and after construction.

Re-puddle top of grout after initial set.

3.5 HIGH-LIFT GROUTING OPTION FOR HOLLOW MASONRY UNITS
A. High-lift grouting method is permitted provided following qualifications and requirements are met. High-lift grouting shall apply only to cell sizes available with 8 inch and wider block units. This method is subject to approval of DSA.

Provide bond beam units, inverted for start course, and omit alternate blocks or cut openings in alternate face shell on bottom course for cleanouts.

Remove projecting mortar fins. Wash out every cell thoroughly using a water jet, which has sufficient force to remove mortar from the interior of the cells, and from reinforcing steel.

Plug each cleanout by setting a "soap" in mortar into opening and securely bracing it in place to prevent displacement. If masonry is not exposed in finish Work, cleanouts may be formed.

D.
04 22 00 - 5 Concrete Masonry Units
TP-169
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Grouting:

1. 2.

Grout masonry cells solid, free from voids.

Do not install grout until masonry has set a minimum of 3 days in warm weather (50 degrees to 85 degrees F.) or 5 days in cool, damp weather (35 degrees to 50 degrees F.).

Pump grout into grout cell space as rapidly as practical. Discard grout not in place within one hour after water was first added to batch.

Install grout with maximum slump without segregation. Place in a continuous pour, in maximum lifts of 4 feet, with approximately 20 minutes elapsed time between any 2 successive lifts.

3. 4.

F. Consolidating:

1. Consolidate and reconsolidate grout using 3/4 inch lightweight flexible cable vibrators.

First consolidation shall be performed to bottom of lift immediately after placement, and in case of subsequent lifts, through previously placed lift.

Top lift shall be reconsolidated no sooner than 30 minutes after grout has been installed.

Vibrating of reinforcing steel is not permitted.

2. 3.

4. G. Bracing: Adequately brace walls against wind and other forces during and after construction.

3.6 CURING
A.

Remove efflorescence, stains, debris, excess grout, and foreign matter.

During curing, or for any other purpose, do not saturate masonry with water.

For low-humidity conditions, dampen the wall surface with a very light fog spray continuously for 3 days to cure mortar in joints.

3.7 PARGE COAT
A.

Apply parge coat to the earth side of surfaces that are to receive waterproofing.

A Portland cement and sand mix (1:3.5 by volume), or Type M or S mortar may be used for the parge coat.

Parging should be applied to damp (not saturated) concrete masonry in two ¼” (6mm) thick layers. The first coat should be roughened when partially set, hardened for 24 hours, and then moistened before second coat is applied. The second coat should be troweled to a smooth, dense surface.

The parge coat should be beveled at the top to form a wash, and thickened at the bottom to form a cove between the base of the wall and the top of footing.

D.
04 22 00 - 6 Concrete Masonry Units
TP-170
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.8 CLEANING
A. At completion of masonry Work, remove misplaced mortar, grout or other foreign substances, and clean surfaces which will be exposed in finish Work with specified cleaner, or with clean water and stiff fiber brushes.

B. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
04 22 00 - 7 Concrete Masonry Units
TP-171
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 04 22 70

WATERPROOF CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide waterproof concrete masonry unit construction, with integral waterproofing, mortar, reinforcement, anchorage, surface sealer and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Cut and fit concrete masonry for work of other trades.

2. Integral Waterproofing: Provide integral water-repellent admixtures for both concrete masonry units and mortar at all exterior wall conditions.

3. Sealer: Provide penetrating type surface sealer for exterior exposed surfaces of concrete masonry assemblies; system compatible with integral waterproofing.

B. Work Installed not Furnished: Build in items supplied by other trades and suppliers.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's certificate concrete masonry units conform to specified standards.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish drawings for reinforcing; show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, ties and arrangements and assemblies.

C. Samples: Furnish section of exposed concrete masonry face indicating texture and color along with each type of colored mortar.

Certificates: Furnish integral waterproofing manufacturer certification indicating materials are appropriate for applications indicated, as compatible with materials involved in Project, and masonry manufacturer is trained in proper use of materials.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 4'-0" by 6'-0" sample panel of concrete masonry construction, clearly indicating joints and methods of reinforcing. Erect mock-up at Project Site, in location as approved by Architect.

1. Approved mock-up will be used for quality control as minimum standard of work acceptable for Project.
04 22 70 - 1 Waterproof Concrete Unit Masonry
TP-172
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Maintain materials to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

1. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

2. During colder weather, work may continue where equipment is used to maintain constant temperature above 40 degrees F and masonry work completed and in progress is kept covered.

3. Protect masonry construction from direct wind and sun exposure when temperatures exceed 99 degrees F and relative humidity is less than 50 percent.

B. Bracing: Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work, maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide concrete masonry unit construction, with integral waterproofing, mortar, reinforcement, anchorage, surface sealer, and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of California Building Standards Code except where more restrictive requirements are specified.

1. Fire Rated Materials: Provide materials and systems which have passed ASTM E119 tests and are approved for fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: Hollow loadbearing units conforming to ASTM C90.

1. Concrete Masonry Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Angelus Block, Co., Inc.

Basalite Concrete Products.

Orco Block Co., Inc.

RCP Block and Brick, Inc.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Weight: Provide normal, medium, or light weight units unless specific weight classification is indicated.
a.
b.
c.

Normal Weight, 125 pcf or more.

Medium Weight, 105 to 125 pcf.

Light Weight, less than 105 pcf.
04 22 70 - 2 Waterproof Concrete Unit Masonry
TP-173
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Compressive Strength: Comply with ASTM C90, with minimum 800 psi per unit and minimum average of 1000 psi for three units, when tested in accordance with ASTM C140.

4. Size: Nominal 8" by 16" face measurement with thickness as indicated on Drawings.

5. Exposed Face Surfaces: Dense with uniform texture and color throughout Project.

6. Exposed Face Surfaces: Dense with finish as approved by Architect prior to manufacturing; uniform texture and color throughout Project. a. Texture: precision (smooth) as indicated on Drawings. b. Finish: Post installation sandblasting as indicated on drawings. c. Colors: Integral color as indicated, as directed on drawings.

7. Special Shapes: Provide proper specially shaped units for bond beams, lintels, corners and jambs.
a. Exposed Special Shapes: Design bond beams, lintels, corners and jambs and fillers to match and compliment block units; where required perform cutting with masonry saw.

8. Integral Waterproofing Admixture System at Exterior Wall Conditions: System of integral water-repellent admixtures, liquid polymeric admixture mixed with concrete during production.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
W.R. Grace & Co., Masonry Products Div./Dry-Block System.

Specon, Inc./Hydro System.

Acme-Hardesty/Acme-Shield.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Wind Driven Rain Permeance: Class E, ASTM E514.

D. Mortar: Conform to ASTM C270, Type S.

1. Masonry Cement/Premix Mortar: Acceptable only if manufacturer certifies product is made of cement and lime, with no limestone or pulverized material used in lieu of hydrated lime.

E. Grout: Conform to ASTM C476; minimum compressive strength 2,000 psi.

F. Mortar and Grout Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
04 22 70 - 3 Waterproof Concrete Unit Masonry
TP-174
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Aggregates: Standard masonry mortar and grout type; clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign matter.
a.
b.

Mortar Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C144.

Grout Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C404.

4. Water: Clean, drinkable, free of injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other harmful materials.

5. Integral Waterproofing Mortar Admixture System at Exterior Wall Conditions:

System of integral water-repellent admixtures, liquid polymeric admixture mixed with concrete during production.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
W.R. Grace & Co., Masonry Products Div./Dry-Block System.

Specon, Inc./Hydro System.

Acme-Hardesty/Acme-Shield.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.
b. Wind Driven Rain Permeance: Class E, ASTM E514.
c. Mortar Admixture: Materials shall not reduce flexural nor compressive strength of mortar when tested in accordance with ASTM C780 and ASTM C1072.
d. Mix in integral waterproofing in strict accordance with material manufacturer recommendations to assure specified permeability performance.

6. Exposed Mortar Colors: Integral color as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

G. Color Admixtures: Pure mineral oxide colors conforming to ASTM C979 as required for approved colors.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

H. Reinforcement and Anchorages: Provide reinforcing and anchorages as indicated on Drawings.

1. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Plain Bars: ASTM A675, Grade 80 for No. 2 bars, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A82, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits.

I. Control Joints: Closed cell neoprene or PVC factory fabricated solid sections, resistant to oils and solvents, flexible at temperatures from 40-degree F after five hours exposure; ASTM D2240 minimum durometer 70.
04 22 70 - 4 Waterproof Concrete Unit Masonry
TP-175
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
J. Surface Sealer: Penetrating sealer recommended by integral waterproofing manufacturer for application to concrete masonry systems using integral waterproofing.

1. Apply at exposed face, exterior conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Supply metal anchors required for concrete masonry to appropriate trades for placement; provide in quantities required for Project and direct placement.

1. Ensure items built in by other trades are properly located and sized.

B. Establish lines, levels and coursing, protect from disturbance.

C. Clean surfaces to receive masonry free from dirt, debris, and laitance.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not wet concrete masonry units; lay units in mortar with full bed and head joints, properly jointed with other work.

1. Fully bond corners and intersections.

2. Align cells of units to maintain clear, unobstructed space for reinforcing and grout, keep cells free of mortar and debris.

3. Comply with integral waterproofing system manufacturer for installation of concrete masonry with integral waterproofing and for mortar and grout with integral waterproofing for complete watertight concrete masonry assembly.

B. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set, where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

C. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not acceptable.

D. Perform job site cutting with proper power tools to provide straight, true, unchipped edges.

E. Provide structural anchorage or retention in accordance with applicable code requirements.

F. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height, make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness.

1. Lay concrete unit masonry in running bond.

2. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8". 04 22 70 - 5 Waterproof Concrete Unit Masonry
TP-176
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
G. Remove excess mortar and projections, take care to prevent breaking block corners.

H. Tolerances:

1. Maximum allowable variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/32" where masonry units are exposed in finished construction and where waterproofing is applied over masonry units.

2. Maximum allowable variation from plane of wall is 1/4" in 10 feet, and maximum 1/2" in 20 feet or more.

3. Maximum allowable variation from plumb is 1/4" per story, non-cumulative, and maximum 1/2" in two or more stories.

4. Maximum allowable variation of level coursing is 1/8" in 3 feet, 1/4" in 10 feet and 1/2" in 30 feet.

I. Mortar Joints: Compress joints with a round or curved metal tool.

1. Compress mortar joints with jointing tool with minimum diameter three times width of mortar joint, to provide a flush surface where resilient base or waterproofing is to be applied over masonry.

J. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Fully reinforce corners and intersections. Lap splices minimum 6". Extend splices minimum 16" each side of openings.

1. Support and secure reinforcing bars to maintain within 1/2" of dimensioned position.

2. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not to exceed 192 bar diameters.

K. Lintels: Provide reinforced concrete masonry unit lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled.

1. Use full length reinforcing bars.

L. Grouting: Place grout when concrete masonry units are surface dry; consolidate and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration.

1. Fine Grout: Use for spaces less than 2" in width using low lift grouting techniques.

2. Coarse Grout: Use for spaces 2" or more in width.

3. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout approximately 2" below top of upper masonry unit to form positive key for subsequent grout placement.

4. Low-Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout at 16" and place subsequent lifts at 8" increments.
04 22 70 - 6 Waterproof Concrete Unit Masonry
TP-177
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

5. Hi-Lift Grouting: Use only where specifically approved by Architect and only where grout spaces are 3" or greater in width.
a. Provide minimum 4" high cleanouts at bottom of each cell to be grouted, clean out cells and inspect prior to grouting.
b. Pump grout into cells with maximum 48" lifts.

M. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build in frames, lintels, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by other trades.

1. Build in items plumb and true.

2. Do not build in organic materials which will be subject to rot or deterioration.

3. Bed anchors of frames in mortar joints; fill frame voids solid with mortar; fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12" from framed openings.

N. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds; coordinate with work of other Specification sections to ensure correct size, shape and location.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work.

B. Point or replace defective mortar, match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials, consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

E. Sealer: Apply penetrating surface sealer in accordance with integral waterproofing manufacturer recommendations and application instructions for applications indicated.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities; protect without damaging completed work.

END OF SECTION
04 22 70 - 7 Waterproof Concrete Unit Masonry
TP-178
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking.

Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting.

Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. AISC – Steel Construction Manual:

1. 2.

AISC 360 Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings.

RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

AA. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, including Supplements.

AISC S323 - Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards.

AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.

ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.

ASTM A53 - Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.

ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finish, Standard Quality.

ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.

ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.

ASTM A500 - Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes.

ASTM A572 - Grade 50 - Structural Steel.

ASTM A653 - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

ASTM A780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

ASTM A992 - Steel for Structural Shapes For Use in Building Framing.

ASTM C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Non-Shrink).

ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts.

Q.
05 12 00 - 1 Structural Steel Framing
TP-179
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
R. AWS A2.4 - Standard Welding Symbols.

S. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

SS. AWS D1.8 - Structural Welding Code – Seismic Supplement.

AWS WHB-1 - Qualification and Certification.

AWS A5.1 - Carbon Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes.

CBC Chapter 22A, Division III - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design for Structural Steel Buildings.

SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council, SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning.

Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)
W.

1. FEMA 353 - Recommended Specification and Quality Assurance Guidelines for Steel Moment Frame Construction for Seismic Application, July 2000.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Structural steel shall conform to CBC requirements, except that steel manufactured by acid Bessemer process is not permitted for structural purposes.

Sheet and strip steel other than those listed in CBC, if provided for structural purpose, shall comply with DSA requirements.

2. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit Shop Drawings, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. Fully detail minor connections and fastenings not shown or specified in the Contract Documents to meet required conditions using similar detailing as shown in the Contract Documents. Include a fully detailed, well controlled sequence and technique plan for shop and field welding that minimizes locked in stresses and distortion; submit sequence and technique plan for review by the Architect.
a. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, and holes in accordance with Figure 4.5 of AWS D1.1-02 or AISC Section J1.8, weld position plan and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length and type of each weld.

Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed for Work specified in other section.

Erection and Bracing Plan and Erection Procedure: Submit an erection and framing plan, including columns, beams, and girders, prepared, signed and sealed by a structural engineer registered in the State of California in accordance with Title 8 CCR, Section 1710. Maintain a copy at the Project site as required by the California Division of Industrial Safety.

Submit a list of steel items to be galvanized.
b.
c.
d.

2. Product Data:
a. Submit copies of fabricator’s specifications and installation instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data required demonstrating compliance with these Specifications:
05 12 00 - 2 Structural Steel Framing
TP-180
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
1) Structural steel, each type; including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties.

Welding electrodes.

Welding gas.

Unfinished bolts and nuts.

Structural steel primer paint.

High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

3. Manufacturer’s Mill Certificate:
a. Submit, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

Mill Test Reports:
a. Submit manufacturer’s certificates, indicating structural yield and tensile strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis.

Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact Test: Submit certified copies of Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact Test by the manufacturer for applicable steel members and components.

4. 5.
a. Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact Test for Base Metal: hot rolled shapes with flanges 1_1/2 in. thick and thicker and plates 2 in. thick and thicker shall shall subjected to Charpy-V-Notch impact test in accordance with “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings”, Part A3.3
Not used
Charpy-V-Notch test shall be performed by the manufacturer employing Test Frequency (P) in accordance with ASTM A 673 and utilizing standard specimen sizes shown in Figure 6 of ASTM E 23. The absorbed energy in a CVN impact test shall not be less than that specified in “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings”, Part A3.3
b.
c.

6. Submit certified copies of tests by manufacturer for fine grain practice. Structural steel base material, as described above, shall be manufactured using fully killed fine grain practice having grain size number 5 or better as determined by ASTM E 112.

Weld Procedure Specifications (WPS): Submit weld procedures according to AWS D1.1 for each welded joint on project (whether prequalified or qualified by testing) to Owner’s testing laboratory for approval. After approval by testing laboratory, submit to Architect for record. Weld procedures shall indicate joints details and tolerances, preheat and interpass temperature, post-heat treatment, single or multiple stringer passes, peening of stringer passes for groove welds except for the first and the last pass, electrode type and size, welding current, polarity and amperes and root treatment. The welding variables for each stringer pass shall be recorded and averaged, from these averages the weld heat input shall be calculated. Submit the manufacturer’s product data sheet for all welding material used.

Welder’s Certificates: Field welders shall be Project certified in accordance with AWS D1. 1-15. Shop welders shall be Project certified for FCAWS in accordance with AWS D1. 1-15.

Test Reports: Submit reports of tests conducted on shop and field welded and bolted connections. Include data on type of test conducted and test results.

Welding Material Certification: Comply with AWS D1.8 Section 1.22. Submit to Owner’s testing laboratory.

7. 8.

9. 10.
05 12 00 - 3 Structural Steel Framing
TP-181
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,
Perform welding in accordance with AWS Standards, AWS D1.1, and California Building Code Section 1705A.2.5 and approved weld procedure.

2. B.

Shop fabrication shall be inspected in accordance with CBC.

Erect mock-up panel of fabricated structural steel meeting Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel tolerances for exposed areas. Approval by Architect is required.

Mock-up to remain for comparison but may not be left as part of the work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.

Store structural steel above grade on platforms, skids or other supports.

Protect steel from corrosion.

Store welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D 12.1.

Store other materials in a weather-tight and dry place until installed into the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Stock Materials: Provide exact materials, sections, shapes, thickness, sizes, weights, and details of construction indicated on Drawings. Changes because of material stock or shop practices will be considered if net area of shape or section is not reduced thereby, if material and structural properties are at least equivalent, and if overall dimensions are not exceeded.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: All wide flange shapes shall conform to ASTM A992 Grade 50. Brace Frame Base Plate shall be ASTM A572 Grade 50. Other steel shall conform to ASTM A36.

Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low carbon bolts and nuts.

High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A325, ASTM A490 or ASTM F1852 quenched and tempered, steel bolts, nuts and washers.

Primer: Lead-free metal primer, Tnemec 10-99, Rust-Oleum X-60, or equal.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.

Structural Tubing:

1. 2.

Hot-formed, ASTM A501.

Cold-formed, ASTM A500, Grade B.

Galvanizing: ASTM A123.

Welding Electrodes: Provide electrodes recommended by manufacturer for seismic connections.

1. Comply with latest AISC Seismic Provision.
05 12 00 - 4 Structural Steel Framing
TP-182
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I. Shear stud connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 forged steel, headed, uncoated, granular flux filled shear connector or anchor studs by Nelson Stud Welding Division of TRW, Lorain, OH, or equal.

Grout: ASTM C1107, non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 7 days; of consistency suitable for application and a 30 minute working time.

Threaded Rods: ASTM F1554, grade as noted per plan.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Cleaning and Straightening Materials: Materials being fabricated shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale and rust, and straightened before fabrication. Cleaning and straightening methods shall not damage material. After punching or fabrication of component parts of a member, twists or bends shall be removed before parts are assembled.

Cutting, Punching, Drilling and Tapping: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, structural steel fabricator shall perform the cutting, punching, drilling and tapping of Work so that Work of other trades will properly connect to steel Work.

Milling: Compression joints depending on contact bearing shall be furnished with bearing surfaces prepared to a common plane by milling.

Use of Burning Torch: Oxygen cutting of members shall be performed by machine.

Gouges greater than 3/16 inch that remain from cutting shall be removed by grinding.

Reentrant corners shall be shaped notch free to a radius of at least 1/2 inch. Gas cutting of holes for bolts or rivets is not permitted.

Galvanizing: After fabrication, items indicated or specified to be galvanized shall be galvanized in largest practical sizes. Fabrication includes operations of shearing, punching, bending, forming, assembling or welding. Galvanized items shall be free from projections, barbs, or icicles resulting from the galvanizing process.

Welding:

1. Type of steel furnished in welded structures shall provide chemical properties suitable for welding as determined by chemical analysis. Welds shall conform to the requirements of CBC Chapter 17A. Conform to AWS D1.1 and D1.8, and CBC Chapter 22A.

Materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements specified herein and to CBC requirements, modified as follows:

2. a. No welded splices shall be permitted except those indicated on Drawings unless specifically reviewed by the Architect.

Drawings will designate joints in which it is important that welding sequence and technique be controlled to minimize shrinkage stresses and distortion. b.

3. Welding shall be performed in accordance with requirements of the AWS Structural Welding Code.
a. Welded Joint Details: comply with AISC Seismic Provisions.

Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds ½ inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.

4. 05 12 00 - 5 Structural Steel Framing
TP-183
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

5. Remove erection bolts on welded, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

G. Shop Finish:

1. Notify the inspector when Work is ready to receive shop prime coat. Work shall be inspected by the inspector before installation of primer.

Structural steel and fittings, except galvanized items, which will be exposed when building is completed, shall receive a coat of primer.

The primer specified shall be spray applied, filling joints and corners and covering surfaces with a smooth unbroken film. The minimum dry film thickness of the primer shall be 2.0 mils.

Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete or high strength bolted.

2. 3.

4. H. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for structural steel.

Fabricate Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surfaces blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.

1. Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and shop priming.

Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.

2. J. Not used.

2.4 SHOP AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. A special inspector, approved by DSA to inspect the Work of this section, shall inspect high-strength bolted connections. The Owner will provide a DSA approved independent testing laboratory to perform tests and prepare test reports in accordance with CBC 2213A. The inspector shall be responsible for monitoring the work of the special inspector and testing laboratories to ensure that the testing program is satisfactorily completed.

An AWS CWI certified special inspector, approved by DSA to inspect the Work of this section, shall inspect welded connections. The Owner will provide a DSA approved independent testing laboratory to perform tests and prepare test reports in accordance with CBC 1704A.2.4. The inspector shall be responsible for monitoring the work of the special inspector and testing laboratories to ensure that the testing program is satisfactorily completed.

The independent testing laboratory shall conduct and interpret test and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations there from.

Provide access to all places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be performed.

The independent testing laboratory may inspect and/or test structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect reserves the right at any time before Final Completion to deem materials not in compliance with the specified requirements as defective Work.

E.
05 12 00 - 6 Structural Steel Framing
TP-184
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
F. Correct defects in structural Work when inspections and laboratory test reports indicate noncompliance with specified requirements. Perform additional tests as may be required to reconfirm noncompliance of original Work, and as may be required to show demonstrate compliance of corrected Work.

Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication and erection of structural steel assemblies as follows:

1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in the Work. Record Work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

Inspect welds. Welds shall be visually inspected before performing any nondestructive testing. Groove weld shall be inspected by ultrasonic or other approved non-destructive test methods. Testing shall be performed to AWS D1.1 Table 6.3 cyclically loaded non-tubular connections.

Ultrasonic testing shall be performed by a specially trained and qualified technician who shall operate the equipment, examine welds, and maintain a record of welds examined, defects found, and disposition of each defect. Repair and test defective welds.

Rate of Testing: Completed welds contained in joints and splices shall be tested 100 percent either by ultrasonic testing or by radiography.

Welds, when installed in column splices, shall be tested by either ultrasonic testing or radiography.

Base metal thicker than 1-1/2 inches, when subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shall be ultrasonically inspected by shear wave methods for discontinuities directly behind such welds. Tests shall be performed at least 48 hours after completed joint has cooled down to ambient air temperature.

Any material discontinuities shall be reviewed based on the defect rating in accordance with the criteria of AWS D1.1 table 6.3 by the Architect and DSA.

Other method of non-destructive testing and inspection, for example, liquid dye penetrate testing, magnetic particle inspection or radiographic inspection may be performed on weld if required.

Lamellar Tearing: Lamellar-tearing resulting from welding is a crack (with ero tolerance) and shall be repaired in accordance with AWS D1.1.

Lamination: The rejection criteria shall be based on ASTM A 435.

Where testing reveals lamination or conditions of lamellar tearing in base metal, the steel fabricator shall submit a proposed method of repair for review by the Architect. Test repaired areas as required.

Magnetic Particle Testing: Magnetic particle testing when required shall be provided in accordance with AWS D1.1 for procedure and technique. The standards of acceptance shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 - Qualification.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

8. 9.

10. 11.

12. H. Lamellar Tearing: Prior to welding plates 1 to 1-1/2 inches thick and greater and rolled shapes within the distance from 6 inches above the top of the joint to 6 inches below the bottom of the joint shall be checked by ultrasonic testing for laminations in base metal which may interfere with the inspection of the completed joint. Should these defects occur, members will be reviewed by the Architect and DSA. Welding procedure specifications in sub-section 1.5G specify welding practices to minimize lamellar tearing.
05 12 00 - 7 Structural Steel Framing
TP-185
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I.

Prior Testing of Base Material: Test material before fabrication.

Lines and levels of erected steel shall be certified by a State of California licensed surveyor as set forth in related Division 01 section.

Welded studs shall be tested and inspected by the special inspector in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1 - Stud Welding.

Record Drawings: After steel has been erected, correct or revise Shop Drawings and erection diagrams to correspond with reviewed changes performed in the field.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify governing dimensions and conditions of the Work before commencing erection Work.

1. Report discrepancies between drawings and field dimensions to Architect before commencing work.

Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions and surfaces underlying or adjacent to work of this section.

2. B. Provide temporary shoring and bracing, and other support during performance of the Work. Remove after steel is in place and connected, and after cast-in-place concrete has reached its design strength.

3.2 ERECTION
A. Install structural steel accurately in locations, to elevations indicated, and according to AISC specifications and CBC requirements.

B. Clean surfaces of base plates and bearing plates.

1. Install base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims; cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout.

2. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

1. Members and components, plumbed, leveled and aligned to a tolerance not to exceed one-half the amount permitted for structural steel. Contractor to provide adjustable connections between Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel and the structural steel frame or the masonry or concrete supports, in order to provide the erector with means for adjustment.

D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact after assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

Do not permit thermal cutting during erection of structural steel.

Where indicated for field connections, provide standard bolts complying with ASTM A 307.
05 12 00 - 8 Structural Steel Framing
TP-186
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
G. Install high strength steel bolts at locations indicated. Assembly and installation shall be in accordance with CBC requirements.

1. 2.

Allowable hole sizes: 1/16 inch larger than bolt size.

Use friction type connection with standard hardened steel circular, square or rectangular washer under bolt nut.

Thoroughly clean area under bolt head, nut and washer. Remove all paint, lacquer, oil or other coatings except organic zinc-rich paints in accordance with SSPC, SP-2.

Tighten bolts by power torque wrench or hand wrench until twist-off.

3. 4.

H. Contractor shall be responsible for correcting detailing and fabrication errors and for correct fitting of all members and components.

Erect structural steel plumb and level and to proper tolerances as set forth in the AISC Manual. Provide temporary bracing, supports or connections required for complete safety of structure until final permanent connections are installed.

Install column bases within a tolerance of 1/8 inch of detailed centerlines, level at proper elevations. Support bases on double nuts and solidly fill spaces under bases with dry-pack cement grout.

Provide anchor bolts with templates and diagrams. Contractor shall be responsible for proper location and installation of bolts. Correct deficiencies and errors.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A780.

3.3 FITTING
A. Closely fit members, finished true to line and in precise position required to allow accurate erection and proper joining in the field.

B. Drilling to enlarge unfair holes will not be allowed. Allow only enough drifting during assembly to bring parts into position, but not sufficient enough to enlarge holes or distort the metal. Do not heat rolled sections, unless approved by Architect.

3.4 PUNCHING AND DRILLING
A. Punch material 1/16 inch larger than nominal diameter of bolt, wherever thickness of metal is equal to or less than the diameter of the bolt plus 1/8 inch.

Drill or sub-punch and ream where metal is equal to or more than the diameter of the bolt plus 1/8 inch. Make diameter for sub-punched and sub-drilled holes 1/16 inch larger than nominal diameter of bolt.

Precisely locate holes to ensure passage of bolt through assembled materials without drifting. Enlarge holes when necessary to receive bolts by reaming; flame cutting to enlarge holes is not acceptable. Structural Steel members with poorly matched holes will be rejected.

3.5 FINISHING
A. After erection, spots or surfaces where paint has been removed, damaged, or burned off and field rivets, bolts, and other field connections not concealed in the work, shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, grease, and burned paint and furnished with a spot coat of the same primer installed during shop priming.
05 12 00 - 9 Structural Steel Framing
TP-187
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Install paint to exposed areas with the same material installed during shop painting. Install by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will provide a special inspector and independent testing laboratory to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.

3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project Site.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.9 HANDLING
A. Both in shop and in the field, transport, handle and erect to prevent damage or overstressing of any component.

END OF SECTION
05 12 00 - 10 Structural Steel Framing
TP-188
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 05 30 00

METAL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.

B. Section Includes:

1. 2.

Metal decking as indicated.

Shear connectors.

C. Related Sections:

1. 2.

4. Section 01 40 00:

Section 05 12 00:

Section 07 60 00:

Testing and Inspection.

Structural Steel
Flashing and Sheet Metal.

D. Referenced Standards

1. Conform to current adopted reference standards by date of issue of the current code cycle and the Date of the Contract Documents. 2019 CBC – California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Chapters 17A, 22A, and Section 2210A.

ASTM A36 - Specification for Structural Steel.

ASTM A 108 - Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.

ASTM A572 - Grade 50, Structural Steel.

ASTM A653/A653M-98 - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot- Dip Process.

ASTM A 1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. Strength Low-Alloy
Formability.
and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved

8. 9.

AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

AWS D 1.3 - Structural Welding Code, Sheet Steel.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Compute properties of deck sections on basis of effective design width as limited by provisions of the AISI specifications. Provide no less than deck section properties specified, including section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of width.

B. Regulatory Requirements:
05 30 00 - 1 METAL DECKING TP-189
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) approval for the decking when installed as a part of an assembly indicated on Drawings in which fire resistive construction ratings are required.

2. Work of this section shall be in accordance with CBC.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawings, sections and details indicate type of decking, location, finish, gage of metal, arrangement of sheets, necessary fabrication to incorporate decking into the Work, and relationship to openings and flashing.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Metal decking steel shall conform to requirements of strengths and properties of standards specified.

B. Qualifications of Welders: Properly certified for the type of Work involved in compliance with CBC requirements.

C. Continuous inspection of welding will be performed by a special inspector, approved by Structural Engineer to inspect the Work of this section. Refer to Section 01 40 00: Testing and Inspection.

D. Identification of metal decking steel shall conform to the standards specified in Section 01 40 00: Testing and Inspection.

1. Fabricator shall furnish sufficient evidence to the Architect attesting compliance with specified requirements.

Conform to CBC requirements. Unclassified or unidentified decking is not permitted. Furnish deck manufacturer's certified mill analyses and test reports for each heat covering decking having Fy of 33 Ksi or less. In addition, for decking having Fy greater than 33 Ksi, testing laboratory shall perform one tension and elongation test and one bend or flattening test for each gage.

2. E. Unidentifiable Steel: Steel which is not readily identifiable as to grade from markings and test records is not permitted to be provided as part of the Work of this section.

F. Payment For Tests and Inspections:

1. Owner shall pay inspection and testing costs of identifiable steel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. BHP Steel Building Products, Inc.
05 30 00 - 2 METAL DECKING TP-190
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Verco Manufacturing Co.

C. Epic Deck
D. Members of Steel Deck Institute (SDI).

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Metal Decking: Roll-formed sheets conforming to ASTM A653 Grade 50 minimum, with G90 zinc coating.

1. Section properties shall conform to applicable provisions of latest edition of AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

Provide decking as indicated on the architectural and structural drawings.

2. B. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene elastomer, complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade SCE #41.

1. 2.

Brittleness Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F, ASTM D 746.

Flammability Resistance: Self-extinguishing, ASTM D 1692.

C. Metal Flashing and Closures: 22 gage minimum, with ASTM A653, G90 zinc coating, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

D. Shear Connectors: Headed stud type, ASTM A 108 Grade 105 or 1020, coldfinished carbon steel complying with AISC specifications.

2.03 FABRICATION
A. Corrugated sheets or sections shall be designed to support required live load between supporting members.

B. Wherever practical, provide decking in lengths to span over three or more supports.

C. Except as detailed otherwise, provide decking with interlocking side laps, 2-1/2 inches minimum end bearing, and 1-1/2 inches minimum side bearing.

D. Welding: Provide materials and methods in accordance with recommendations of steel decking manufacturer and reviewed submittals. Hold decking tight to the supporting elements with screws or other means for proper welding or crimping of the decking edges. Conform to AWS D1.3, CBC Standards, and to the patterns and weld types indicated, with welds free from sharp edges and protrusions. Field coat welds and abraded surfaces at completion with a anodic type galvanizing repair paint. Omit the field paint coating where welds or abrasions are covered by concrete fill or sprayed fireproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
05 30 00 - 3 METAL DECKING TP-191
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.01 OPENINGS
A. Cut and reinforce units to provide openings which are located and dimensioned on the structural and mechanical Drawings.

B. Provide openings, as approved by the Architect and Structural Engineer, for other Work not indicated on the Drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal decking in accordance with decking manufacturers' recommendations,
Specifications.
requirements of Drawings, Shop Drawings, and
B. Install metal decking on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position before permanently fastening in place.

1. 2.

Install each unit to proper bearing on supports.

Install units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells with close registration of cells of one unit with those of abutting unit.

C. Fasten decking to steel framework at ends of units and at intermediate supports.

Welding shall be as indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasten side laps between supports as indicated on Drawings.

E. Perform field cutting parallel with cells in area between cells, leaving sufficient horizontal material to permit welding to support steel.

F. Weld shear connectors to supports thru decking units as required by Drawings.

Weld only on clean, dry surfaces. Do not weld shear connectors thru two layers of decking units.

3.03 METAL FLASHINGS AND CLOSURES
A. Furnish, install, and weld in position, sheet metal closure flashing, closure angles, closure plates, profile plates, and shear plates.

B. Close open ends of cell runs at columns, openings, walls, similar interruptions and termination.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Install steel decking under continuous inspection according to CBC Chapter 22A, Chapter 17A, and Section 01 40 00
05 30 00 - 4 METAL DECKING TP-192
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally Project site.
dispose of off the

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
05 30 00 - 5 METAL DECKING TP-193
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 05 31 00

STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. 2.

Metal decking.

Shear connectors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. 2.

3. Division 01 - General Requirements.

Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A.

AISI - Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.

ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact.

ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code Sheet - Steel.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Compute properties of deck sections on basis of effective design width as limited by provisions of the AISI specifications. Provide no less than deck section properties specified, including section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of width.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: DSA and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) approval for the decking when installed as a part of an assembly indicated on Drawings in which fire resistive construction ratings are required.

2. Work of this section shall be in accordance with CBC.

C. Manufacturers shall be members of Steel Deck Institute (SDI). 05 31 00 - 1 Steel Decking
TP-194
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawings, sections and details indicate type of decking, location, finish, gage of metal, arrangement of sheets, necessary fabrication to incorporate decking into the Work, and relationship to openings and flashing.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Metal decking steel shall conform to requirements of strengths and properties of standards specified.

Qualifications of Welders: Properly certified for the type of Work involved in compliance with CBC requirements.

Continuous inspection of welding will be performed by a special inspector, approved by DSA to inspect the Work of this section. Refer to Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections. The Project Inspector shall be responsible for monitoring the work of the special inspector to ensure that the inspection program is satisfactorily completed.

Identification of metal decking steel shall conform to the standards specified in Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections.

1. Fabricator shall furnish sufficient evidence to the Architect attesting compliance with specified requirements.

Conform to CBC requirements. Unclassified or unidentified decking is not permitted. Furnish deck manufacturer's certified mill analyses and test reports for each heat covering decking having a minimum Fy of 33 Ksi. In addition, for decking having Fy greater than 33 Ksi, testing laboratory shall perform one tension and elongation test and one bend or flattening test for each gage.

2. E. Unidentifiable Steel: Steel which is not readily identifiable as to grade from markings and test records is not permitted to be provided as part of the Work of this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. ASC Steel Deck. (IAPMO # 0329)
B. OR equal with valid IAPMO or ICC report that meets/exceeds minimum section properties noted on plan.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metal Decking: Roll-formed sheets conforming to ASTM A653, with G90 zinc coating.

1. Section properties shall conform to applicable provisions of latest edition of AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

B. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene elastomer, complying with ASTM D1056, Grade SCE #41.

1. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F, ASTM D746. 05 31 00 - 2 Steel Decking
TP-195
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Flammability Resistance: Self-extinguishing,
C. Metal Flashing and Closures: 22 gage minimum, with ASTM A653, G90 zinc coating.

D. Shear Connectors: Headed stud type, ASTM A108 Grade 1015, cold-finished carbon steel complying with AISC specifications.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Corrugated sheets or sections shall be designed to support required live load between supporting members.

Provide decking in lengths to span over three or more supports.

Except as detailed otherwise, provide decking with interlocking side laps, 2 ½-inch minimum end bearing, and 1 ½-inch minimum side bearing.

Welding: Provide materials and methods in accordance with recommendations of steel decking manufacturer and reviewed submittals. Hold decking tight to the supporting elements with screws or other means for proper welding or crimping of the decking edges. Conform to AWS D1.3, and to the patterns and weld types indicated, with welds free from sharp edges and protrusions. Field coat welds and abraded surfaces at completion with an anodic type galvanizing repair paint. Omit the field paint coating where welds or abrasions are covered by concrete fill or sprayed fireproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OPENINGS
A. Cut and reinforce units to provide openings which are located and dimensioned on the structural and mechanical Drawings.

B. Provide openings, or other Work not indicated on the Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal decking in accordance with decking manufacturers' recommendations, requirements of Drawings, Shop Drawings, and Specifications.

Install metal decking on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position before permanently fastening in place.

1. 2.

Install each unit to proper bearing on supports.

Install units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells with close registration of cells of one unit with those of abutting unit.

C. Fasten decking to steel framework at ends of units and at intermediate supports.

Welding shall be as indicated on Drawings.

Fasten side laps between supports as indicated on Drawings.

Perform field cutting parallel with cells in area between cells, leaving sufficient horizontal material to permit welding to support steel.

E.
05 31 00 - 3 Steel Decking
TP-196
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
F. Weld shear connectors to supports thru decking units as required by Drawings. Weld only on clean, dry surfaces. Do not weld shear connectors thru two layers of decking units.

3.3 METAL FLASHINGS AND CLOSURES
A. Furnish, install, and weld in position, sheet metal closure flashing, closure angles, closure plates, profile plates, and shear plates.

B. Close open ends of cell runs at columns, openings, walls, similar interruptions and termination.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Install steel decking under continuous inspection according to CBC Chapter 1705A.2.2.

1. Welding inspection for steel deck diaphragms shall conform to CBC Section 1705A.2.5.

3.5 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
05 31 00 - 4 Steel Decking
TP-197
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 05 40 00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.

Not used.

Interior load-bearing wall framing.

Exterior non-load-bearing, curtain-wall framing.

Not used.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads without deflections greater than the following:

1. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of L/240 of the wall height.

Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of L/240 of the wall height.

Exterior Non-Load-Bearing, Curtain-Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of L/360 of the wall height.

2. 3.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.

Product Data: For each product indicated.

Shop Drawings: Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of coldformed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners as noted on drawings.

Mill certificates.

Welder certificates.

Research/evaluation reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Not used.

Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistancerated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D.
05 40 00 - 1 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
TP-198
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing agency.

E. Comply with HUD's "Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold-Formed Steel Framing." PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in ICC ESR 3064P.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating, Grade 33 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch and less; Grade 50 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and greater.

Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955.

Joist Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955.

2.3 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated.

Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.

Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, size, spacing, and embedment per plan.

Power-Actuated Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, size, spacing, and embedment per plan.

Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

G.
05 40 00 - 2 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
TP-199
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
H. Thermal Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber blankets produced by combining glass or slag fibers with thermosetting resins.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation: Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to ASTM C1007, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.

1. 2.

Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

Install framing members in one-piece lengths.

Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed.

Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

3. 4.

5. 6.

C. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

D. Load-Bearing Wall Installation: Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends.

Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated, set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks.

1. Align studs vertically where wall-framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing.

Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated

2. 3.

4. 05 40 00 - 3 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
TP-200
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings.

Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated on Shop Drawings.

Fasten at each stud intersection.

Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, blocking, bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

5. 6.

7. 8.

E. Non-Load-Bearing, Curtain-Wall Installation: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. Space studs as indicated; set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to track, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

Install horizontal bridging in curtain-wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten at each stud intersection.

Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system.

2. 3.

F. Joist Installation: Install, align, and securely anchor perimeter joist track sized to match joists as indicated on Shop Drawings. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.

Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists as indicated on Shop Drawings.

Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at spacings indicated.

Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

Install bridging at each end of joists and at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as indicated.

2. 3.

4. 5.
05 40 00 - 4 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
TP-201
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

6. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.

7. G. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

1. 2.

3. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspection.

Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.

Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION
05 40 00 - 5 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
TP-202
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
05 40 00 - 6 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
TP-203
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATION
PART - 1 GENERAL

1.1 Description:

A. Section Includes:

1. Light structural steel framing members and structural steel support members, with required bracing, welding and fasteners.

2. Steel and aluminum, materials for miscellaneous metal fabrications specified in this section and required but not specified in other sections.

3. Anchors and fasteners for connection to concrete and steel construction.

4. Shrinkage-resistant grout and grouting of structural framing base plates, equipment anchors and miscellaneous metal fabrications.

5. Characteristics, including fabrication and finish requirements for metal fabrications not otherwise specified in other sections.

6. Galvanizing of steel products.

7. Shop priming and painting of steel fabrications.

8. Miscellaneous metal fabrications, such as:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Loose bearing and leveling plates.

Steel angle nosings and thresholds.

Rough hardware.

Sleeves for penetrations through structural members and stud partitions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing: Placement of embedded products.

2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and methods for grouting of structural members.

3. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry: Metal framing anchors.

4. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating: Field priming; field-applied finish on interior metal fabrications.
05500 -1 METAL FABRICATION
TP-204
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.2 References:

A. 2001 California Building Code
B. Aluminum Association (AA):

1. AA - Standards for Architectural Aluminum.

2. AA - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

C. American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association (AHDGA): Recommended Details for Galvanized Structures.

D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction.

2. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.

E. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code--Steel.

2. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code--Aluminum.

3. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel.

F. National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers (NAAMM):

Manual.

Metal Finishes
G. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): SSPC Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and 2.

1.3 Submittals:

A. Product Data: Submit catalog data for all standard production products.

B. Shop drawings:

1. Indicate fabrication and installation of metal fabrications.

2. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.

3. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 05500 -2 METAL FABRICATION
TP-205
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

5. For products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by a Professional Structural Engineer registered to practice in the State of California, who was responsible for their preparation.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog data for all standard production products.

D. Coating Submittals:

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each coating, Including generic description, complete technical data, surface preparation, and application instructions.

2. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer’s color samples showing full range of standard colors.

3. Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance: Submit manufacturer’s certification that coatings comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.

4. Applicator’s Quality Assurance: Submit list of a minimum of 5 completed projects of similar size and complexity to this Work. Include for each project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

Project name and location.

Name of owner.

Name of contractor.

Name of architect.

Name of coating manufacturer.

Approximate area of coatings applied.

Date of completion.

5. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.

1.4 Quality Assurance:

A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to Uniform Building Code (UBC), Chapter 22.

B. Fabricator's Qualifications: Fabricator of light structural steel framing members and other miscellaneous metal fabrications of structural character shall be approved by the Building Official in accordance with applicable code provisions.

C. Welder's Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by certified welders qualified in accordance with procedures specified in applicable referenced AWS standard, using materials, procedures and equipment of the type required for the Work. Certify that 05500 -3 METAL FABRICATION
TP-206
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.

D. Coordination: Provide templates and sleeves for incorporation of embedded items into the work specified elsewhere herein.

E. Coordination: Provide templates and sleeves for incorporation of embedded items into the Work specified in other sections.

F. Field-Verified Dimensions: Prior to fabrication, field verify dimensions and details of construction. Immediately report variances in writing to Engineer.

1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling:

A. Storage, General: Store products in enclosed, well-ventilated spaces, not in contact with soil or vegetation and not subject to inclement weather.

B. Delivery, Storage and Handling, Galvanized Products:

1. Stack and bundle during transport and store to allow air flow between galvanized surfaces.

2. Load for transport to permit continuous drainage should wetting occur.

3. Do not rest galvanized products on cinders or clinkers.

1.6 Project Conditions:

A. Field Inspection of Fabricated Products: Prior to installation, inspect products for damage and verify markings and dimensions against reviewed submittals.

B. Environmental Conditions: Do not install products intended for interior locations when spaces are uncovered and unprotected from inclement weather.

C. Coordination: Coordinate metal fabrications Work with Work specified in other sections so that related Work shall be accurately and properly joined.

PART - 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Ferrous Metals:

A. Ferrous Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide ferrous metals materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. 05500 -4 METAL FABRICATION
TP-207
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Steel Shapes: Steel plates, bars, angles, channels, and H-sections: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Tube:

1. Hot-rolled: ASTM A501.

2. Cold-formed: ASTM A500.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 (black steel and hot-dip galvanized).

E. Steel Sheet:

1. For structural uses: Hot-rolled, ASTM A570; cold-rolled, ASTM A611.

2. For nonstructural uses: Cold-rolled, ASTM A366; hot-rolled, ASTM A569.

F. Steel for Galvanized Products:

1. Structural shapes, plates and bars: From fully killed or semi-killed steel, ASTM A36 or A572, except silicon content in the range 0 to 0.4 percent or

0.15 to 0.25 percent, as applicable, only.

2. Steel fasteners: ASTM 307, Grade A or B for bolts; ASTM A563, Grade A for nuts.

3. Sheet steel: ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, Coating Designation G90, for precoated sheet; ASTM A569 or A570 for sheet used in fabrications.

4. Steel for pipe and tubing: ASTM A53, A120 or A595 Grade A or B.

5. Galvanizing: See requirements specified below.

2.2 Corrosion-Resistant (Stainless) Steel:

A. Bars, Shapes and Forgings: ASTM A276, Type 302 or 304 as best suited for intended purpose.

B. Plates, Sheets and Strips: ASTM A167 or ASTM A176, Type 302 or 304 as best suited for intended purpose.

C. Finish: No. 4, polished, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 Aluminum Materials:

A. Aluminum Bars, Rod and Wire and Non-Structural Tubes: ASTM B211 for rolled or cold-finished; ASTM B221 for extruded. Provide alloy and temper best suited for 05500 -5 METAL FABRICATION
TP-208
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
purpose.

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209, temper best suited for purpose.

C. Cast Aluminum: ASTM B103, alloy and temper best suited for purpose.

D. Finishes:

1. Unexposed sheet and plate: Mill finish.

2. Castings: Sandblast finish, medium, equal to NAAMM Metal Finishing Manual, Designation AA-M43.

3. Anodizing: When indicated, AA Class I, except Class II for products in corrosive atmosphere, coating thickness in conformance to AA Designation System for Aluminum Finishes, polished satin finish on aluminum before coating, with clear lacquer overcoating.

2.4 Hardware and Industrial Cloth:

A. Hardware and Industrial Cloth (Wire Mesh): 4 mesh (1-inch square) by 23 gauge steel mesh, as produced by McNichols Co., Tampa, FL or approved equal.

2.5 Anchors, Fasteners and Accessory Materials:

A. Anchors and Fasteners, General: Same material, color and finish as the metal to which applied, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Exterior Exposure: Provide stainless steel.

C. Type, Size and Spacing: Unless otherwise indicated, provide fasteners of type, grade and class required for intended use and sized and spaced as required for loads and substrate.

D. Screw Head, Typical: Unless otherwise noted, exposed screws shall be phillips oval or flat head, countersunk.

E. Standard Bolts and Nuts, Steel: ASTM A307, Grade A, hexagonal head.

F. Lag Screws and Bolts, Steel: ANSI B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose, hexagonal or square head.

G. Plain Steel Screws: FS FF-S-85, FS FF-S-92 and FS FF-S-111; type and grade best suited for the purpose.

H. Stainless Steel Screws: AISI 300 Series.
05500 -6 METAL FABRICATION
TP-209
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I. Self-Drilling Metal Fasteners: TEKS by Buildex Division, Illinois Tool works, Inc.

J. Plain Steel Washers: FS FF-W-92, round, carbon steel.

K. Lock Washers: FS FF-W-84, helical spring, carbon steel.

L. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-W-588, type, class and style as required for substrate.

M. Concrete and Masonry Anchors, Wedge-Type: As indicated on the Plans or, if not indicated, Kwik-Bolt or Red Head, or approved equal; provide type and size as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.

N. Concrete and Masonry Anchors, Self-Threading: TAPCON, as manufactured by Buildex Division, Illinois Tool Works, Inc., or approved equal.

O. Fiber Plugs and Screws: Not permitted.

P. Lead Expansion Shields: Not Permitted.

Q. Power-Driven Fasteners: Use only if approved by Engineer, generally not permitted where not specifically indicated or in load-bearing installations; Fed Spec FF-P-395 or Fed Spec GGG-D-777; Hilti, RamSet or approved equal.

R. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.

2.6 Paints and Coatings:

A. Shop Primer Paint:

1. Shop primer, general: Coordinate primer with finish paint and coating, as applicable, to provide sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure during construction. Refer to Section 09905 - Field Painting and Section 09970 - Coatings for Exterior Steel.

2. Shop primer for ferrous metal at exposed exterior locations: Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc Organic Zinc-Rich Primer, as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO, or approved equal.

3. Shop primer for ferrous metal at concealed exterior locations and for interior locations: Tnemec Series 115, modified alkyd rust-inhibitive primer, or manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P645.

4. Shop primer for galvanized steel, for exposed exterior locations: Series 66 Epoxoline Two-Part Catalyzed Epoxy Coating, as manufactured by Tnemec 05500 -7 METAL FABRICATION
TP-210
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO, or approved equal.

B. Field Primer and Finish Paints: As specified in Section 09 90 00 - Field Painting and in Section 09 97 00 - Coatings for Exterior Steel.

C. Bituminous Coating: High-build mineral-filled coal tar pitch coating, 46-450 Heavy Tnemecol, as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO, or approved equal; or a cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers.

2.7 Grouting Compounds:

A. Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: For filling under equipment and interior miscellaneous metal fabrications; pre-mixed factory-packaged compound, metallic aggregate, minimum 7000 psi 28-day compressive strength. Confirm product selection with manufacturer's recommendations for intended use.

1. Firmix by Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH

2. Embeco 636 or Embeco 885 by Master Builders Technology, Inc., Cleveland, OH.

3. Kemox G by Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ

4. Ferrolith G by Sonneborn Building Products, Division of ChemRex, Inc., Minneapolis, MN.

5. Or approved equal.

B. Non-Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: For filling around anchors for exterior miscellaneous metal fabrications; pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, nonstaining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with CECRD-C621, minimum 7000 psi 28-day compressive strength.

1. Euco N.S. by Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH

2. Masterflow 713 or Masterflow 928 by Master Builders Technology, Inc., Cleveland, OH.

3. Or approved equal.

C. Shrinkage-Resistant Setting Grout: For setting railing posts and similar components in sleeves or blockouts in concrete; pre-mixed, natural aggregate, minimum 7000 psi 28-day compressive strength, Set Grout, as manufactured by Master Builders Technology, Inc., Cleveland, OH, or approved equal.
05500 -8 METAL FABRICATION
TP-211
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
D. Non-Shrink Polymer (Epoxy) Grout: For setting anchor bolts in concrete.

1. For anchor bolts for structural members: As noted on Plans.

2. For anchor bolts for non-structural components: Polymer (epoxy) grout, Brutem MP or AB, as recommended by manufacturer for intended use, as manufactured by Master Builders Technology, Inc., Cleveland, OH, or approved equal.

2.8 Metal Fabrications, General:

A. Metal Fabrications, General:
indicated for profiles shown.

Provide metal fabrications of shapes and sizes

1. Where specific sizes are not indicated, provide materials of sufficient size, thickness and type to provide necessary strength and durability.

2. Thickness of metal, details of metal, details of assembly and support shall give ample strength and stiffness for the intended purpose.

3. Provide brackets, flanges and anchors of cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish fabricated product, unless otherwise indicated.

4. For exterior fabrications, allow for thermal movement in the design, fabrication, and installation of metal fabrications, to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. temperature range of 100 degrees F.

Accommodate
B. Preparation Before Fabrication: Remove loose mill scale and rust and remove twists and bends in manners not injurious to materials and finishes.

C. Fabrication: Fabricate and finish metal items in accordance with the Plans and reviewed shop drawings.

1. Contractor shall verify measurements before fabrication.

2. Hot-dip galvanize fabricated ferrous items after fabrication. Field connections shall be bolted or screwed where possible. Avoid field cutting and welding which damage galvanized coating.

3. Fabricate and shop-assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.

4. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items.

D. Cutting and Fitting: Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces, true to the required lines and levels and as required to suit installation conditions. 05500 -9 METAL FABRICATION
TP-212
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

2. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline.

3. Punch, drill and reaming in manner to leave clean, true lines and surfaces. a. Oversize hole 1/16-inch by punching, when material thickness is equal to or less than bolt diameter plus 1/8-inch.
b. Sub-punch 1/16-inch smaller than bolt and drill or ream to oversize by 1/16-inch, when material thickness is thicker than bolt diameter plus 1/8-inch.

4. Gas cutting of steel will be acceptable where stress will not be transmitted through flame-cut surfaces.
a. Make cuts clean and to contour.
b. Deduct 1/8-inch from effective width of members cut by torch.

5. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

6. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorage provisions as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other Work.

E. Edges: Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.

F. Welding: Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

G. Coordination: Make provisions to connect metal fabrications with or to receive work specified in other sections.
05500 -10 METAL FABRICATION
TP-213
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
H. Connections, General: Component parts of built-up members shall be well-pinned with closely-fitted contact. Conceal connections where possible. Otherwise, make countersinks for concealment after fabrication, except where noted.

I. Joints, General: Fit or miter to hairline tolerances. Provide lugs, clips, anchors and miscellaneous fastenings necessary for complete assembly and installation.

Component parts of built up members shall be well pinned with closely fitted contact.

1. Joints on finished surfaces: Provide welds ground smooth and filled.

2. Joints exposed to weather or water: Form joints to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

3. Sheet metal joints: Hem exposed edges.

4. Bolted and Screwed Connections: Provide holes and connections for Work specified in other sections. Use bolts for field connections only. Provide washers under heads and nuts bearing on wood. Draw all nuts tight and nick threads of permanent connections. Use beveled washers where bearing is on sloped surfaces. Where screws must be used for permanent connections in ferrous metal, use flat head type, countersunk, with screw slots filled and finished smooth and flush.

J. Embedded Fabrications: For embedment in concrete, provide weld on lugs or anchors as detailed or required.

K. Brazing: Brazing shall be of adequate strength and durability with joints tight and flush, smooth and clean. All exposed surfaces shall be ground and finished flush, free of brazing discoloration and other marks. Brazing on finished surfaces shall be indistinguishable from parent metal.

L. Welding: Conform to AWS D1.1. Do not field weld galvanized components to remain unfinished. Grind welds smooth and flush with base material. Re weld to fill holes.

Putties and fillers will not be accepted.

M. Light Structural Steel Framing Fabrications: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges.

1. General: Design of fabrications shall be by licensed Professional Engineer, registered in the State of California. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specifications and the Uniform Building Code (UBC), Chapter 22.

2. Shop Connections: Make welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1.

3. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise indicated. 05500 -11 METAL FABRICATION
TP-214
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. All shop welding shall be continuously inspected.

5. Field Connections: Provide bolted connections, except where welded connections are indicated.

6. Column Bases: Provide base plates shop welded to columns.

7. Weld Finishing: Grind and dress smooth all welds exposed in finished Work to preserve shape and profile of welded item.

8. Shop Painting: Shop prime all structural steel, except steel to be encased in concrete or to be fireproofed. Apply one-coat shop primer paint system in accordance with SSPC Paint System PS 7.01.

N. Steel Tubing and Piping Fabrications: Close ends with plate stock, no exposed ends; grind edges.

O. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

2.9 Galvanizing:

A. Galvanizing, General:

1. Ferrous metal fabrications shall be galvanized only as specified or noted on the Plans.

2. Where galvanized finish is specified or noted, ferrous fabrications shall be galvanized in accordance with applicable referenced ASTM standards, after fabrication.

3. Galvanizing shall be by hot dip method only, unless otherwise specified.

B. Product Fabrication, General: Fabricate products to be galvanized in accordance with Recommended Details for Galvanized Structures by American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association, Inc.

1. Comply with applicable portions of ASTM A143, A384 and A385, except as otherwise specified herein. Avoid techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of steel.
05500 -12 METAL FABRICATION
TP-215
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Notify Engineer before and during submittals review and before fabrication proceeds, of potential warpage problems which may require design modification.

C. Product Preparation for Galvanizing:

1. Remove welding slag and burrs.

2. Provide holes and lifting lugs as necessary for handling during galvanizing process and only at positions approved by Engineer.

3. Remove grease, oil, paint and other deleterious materials.

4. Do not use unsuitable marking paints on steel prior to galvanizing.

5. Use blast cleaning or other method as necessary if surface contaminants and coatings cannot be removed by normal chemical cleaning process.

D. Surface preparation:

1. Pre-clean using caustic bath, acid pickle and flux.

2. Alternatively, pre-clean by blast cleaning and fluxing.

3. Conform to ASTM A123 and A386, as applicable, for steel members, fabrications and assemblies.

4. Conform to ASTM A153 for bolts, nuts and washers, and steel hardware components.

5. Conform to ASTM A143 for protection against embrittlement.

E. Galvanizing Bath: Use not less than 98.0 percent zinc.

F. Zinc Coating Weight: Conform to Paragraph 6.1 of ASTM A123, Table 1 of ASTM A153 and Table 1 of ASTM A386, as applicable.

G. Zinc Coating Surface Finish: Wipe down surfaces after dip to remove pin holes, scale, drips, runs and points. Finish shall be continuous, adherent, smooth and evenly distributed, free from defects detrimental to intended end use and finishing of coated product.

H. Zinc Coating Adhesion: Adhesion shall be sufficient to withstand normal handling during transport and erection.

I. Cold Galvanizing Compound: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in 05500 -13 METAL FABRICATION
TP-216
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20; ZRC Zinc Rich Coating, or approved equal.

J. Portions Not to Receive Galvanizing: Protect portions of parts to be embedded in concrete from galvanizing, except galvanize anchors and sleeves built into concrete.

2.10 Metalized Finish
A. Fabrication: Miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view shall only be fabricated with materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding prior to cleaning, treating, or applying surface finishes.

B. Shop Assembly: Work shall be fitted, shop assembled, and ready for erection whenever possible.

C. Workmanship: Form metals to shape and size with sharp lines and angles, and with smooth surfaces and faces free from distortion. Mill fastening to a close fit. Do all fitting true to line. Bend or form all tubing, pipe, and other members to continuous and true curves with all joints flush and neatly fastened together. All fabrications shall be square, plumb, straight, and true.

D. Jointing and Connections: Jointing and intersections shall be accurately made in true planes and tightly fitted to hairline joints. Connections shall be welded. Do not use screws unless specifically shown or required - if used, screws shall be countersunk with a metal compatible with the members being joined.

E. Welding: Welding shall conform to the requirements of the "Structural Welding Code" ASW D1.l. Where welds are exposed to views, bevel members prior to welding and weld full. Grind welds flush, smooth, level with the adjacent surfaces. Grind welds at intersecting members to sharp lines. Galvanized metal welds shall be steel brushed to remove excess residue. Touch up by brushing or spraying galvanized gray primer.

F. Holes: Accurately space to centers such that boles are not poorly or carelessly seamed.

G. Anchorage: Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

H. Insulation of metals from contact with masonry and different metals from contact with each other shall be provided where necessary to prevent corrosion.

I. Debur and grind smooth all welds and rough spots.
05500 -14 METAL FABRICATION
TP-217
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
J. All ornamental metal fabrications shall receive a sandblast finish to remove all oil, grease, lint, and rust.

K. All ornamental metal fabrications shall receive 91-2 mil. zinc thermal sprayed metalized finish per ANSI/AWS C218.93, ASTM C633, ASTM B833-93, and SSPCCS Guide 23.00, June 1, 1991. Contact: Zinc Nation Inc. (714) 239-6190 www.zincnation.com. Contractor shall submit sample of metalizing for review and approval prior to metalizing ornamental metal items.

L. Coating System

1. Manufacturer
a. Tnemec Company Incorporated, 417 East Weber Street, Compton, CA 90222. Phone 310-637-2363. Fax 310-637-4161. Web Site www.tnemec.com.
b. Equivalent materials of other manufacturers may be substituted only by approval of the architect. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer’s literature for each product giving the name, generic type, descriptive information solids by volume, recommended film thicknesses and a list of five projects where each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service. No request for substitution shall be considered that would decrease the film thickness or offer a change in the generic type of coating.

2. Coating System Type
a.
b.
c.
d.

System Type:. Hydrophobic Arcylic / HDP Pure Arcylic
Surface Preparation: Zinc thermal sprayed metalized finish Prime Coat: One coat Tnemec Intermediate, 115, 3 to 5 mils. DFT.[4] Finish coat: One coat Tnemec Urethane, 1028 or 1029, 2 to 3 mils.

3. Finish Color: ‘Dove Gray’ (38GR)

2.11 Shop Painting:

A. Shop Priming and Painting, General: Conform to SSPC Painting Manual.

B. Products to be Primed: Prime paint after fabrication all parts not otherwise shown as galvanized, stainless steel, anodized aluminum, polished brass or embedded in concrete.

C. Preparation for Priming: Prepare all surfaces to be coated, as follows.

1. Solvent-clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.
05500 -15 METAL FABRICATION
TP-218
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Exterior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 6.

3. Interior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 6.

D. Shop Priming: Comply with SSPC-PA 1.

1. Apply primer immediately following surface preparation.

2. Do not prime surfaces to be welded.

3. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or mortar.

4. Spray apply shop prime without holidays, drips, runs.

5. Provide two coats where product will not be finish painted or will be concealed in completed work.

6. Apply an additional coat to corners, welds, edges, and fasteners.

E. Drying: Allow paint to dry before handling.

F. Steel Embedded in Concrete: Coat concealed faces with asphalt paint.

G. Galvanizing Pre-Treatment: Where zinc-coated surfaces are specified to be shop primed, chemically treat surfaces to provide bond for paint before applying primer.

H. Shop Applied Finish Painting: Apply thermosetting enamel paint, gloss or semi gloss, of a type and color as selected and approved by Engineer, if not otherwise specified.

1. Shop applied finish paint shall be baked to set and cure.

2. Allow finish paint to thoroughly dry and cure before handling.

2.12 Rough Hardware:

A. Rough Hardware, General: Provide bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as indicated on Plans.

B. Rough Hardware Fabrication: Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Provide malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

2.13 Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates:

A. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, 05500 -16 METAL FABRICATION
TP-219
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize fabrications after fabrication.

2.14 Toilet Room Entrance Gates:

A. Toilet Room Entrance Gates: Metal grill gates, fabricated from stock steel shapes as detailed on Plans, hot-dipped galvanized finish after fabrication, with galvanized sheet steel panel infill at lockset.

B. Gate Hardware: As indicated on Plans, welded-on heavy weight butt hinges, minimum 3-hinges per gate leaf, hot-dipped galvanized finish.

2.15 Other Fabrications:

A. Other Fabrications: Provide fabrications not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Engineer.

PART - 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation:

A. Preparation for Cutting and Fitting: Obtain Engineer's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments not indicated.

B. Welding Preparation: Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is indicated.

C. Blocking and Bracing: Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing.

Keep work in alignment.

D. Coordination with Cast in Place Concrete: Furnish setting templates and place items required to be cast into concrete, as specified in Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcing Steel.

3.2 Installation, Typical:

A. Installation, General: Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Field Welding: Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

3.3 Cleaning and Touch-Up:

A. Cleaning: Perform initial cleaning immediately after completion of installation.

Prepare surfaces for finish painting as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Interior and Exterior Painting.
05500 -17 METAL FABRICATION
TP-220
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Galvanizing Touch-Up: Touch up galvanizing immediately after installation, including field welding. Prepare surface and apply cold galvanizing compound in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Primer Paint Touch-Up: Immediately after erection or installation, touch up shop paint. Use products as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Interior and Exterior Painting

1. Clean field welds, bolted joints, and areas where primer is damaged.

2. Clean and primer paint welds and surrounding areas affected by welding.

3. Paint with material used for shop painting, minimum 3 mils dry film thickness.

D. Painting of Metal Fabrications:

1. Exposed interior and exterior ferrous metal fabrications shall be coated (painted) as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Interior and Exterior Painting

3.4 Coatings System Application for Metalized Finish
A. Application

1. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Mix and thin coatings, including multi-component materials, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination.

4. Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits.

5. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings, and techniques in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT.

7. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

8. Stripe paint with brush critical locations on steel such as welds, corners, and edges using specified primer.

B. Repair

1. Materials and Surfaces Not Scheduled To Be Coated: Repair or replace damaged materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.

2. Damaged Coatings: Touch-up or repair damaged coatings. Touch-up of 05500 -18 METAL FABRICATION
TP-221
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
minor damage shall be acceptable where result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces. Recoat entire surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture, or color.

3. Coating Defects: Repair in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions coatings that exhibit film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

C. Cleaning

1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas surfaces.
and
D. Protection of coating systems

1. Protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION
05500 -19 METAL FABRICATION
TP-222
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 05 51 00

METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide steel stairs and landings, with stair handrails, and including plates, angles, hangers and struts for securing to building structure.

1. Provide additional steel as required for support of stairs and not otherwise indicated on Architectural or Structural Drawings.

2. Precast Concrete Treads: Metal stair systems include metal support systems with precast concrete stair treads.

B. Related Work:

1. 2.

3. Section 05 50 00: Metal handrails other than steel stair rails.

Section 05 73 00: Decorative metal railings.

Section 05 73 10: Cantilevered glass railings.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering for stairs and railings to ensure compliance with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. 2.

3. Metal Stairs Manual.

Pipe Rail Manual.

Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for products used in stair and rail fabrications, including paint, grout, and rail brackets.

Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and erection of stairs and handrails. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection, reinforcing, and anchorage.

1. Provide templates for anchorage installation by others.

C. Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements. 05 51 00 - 1 Metal Stairs
TP-223
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with not less than five years successful experience fabricating custom stairs for projects of similar size and scope.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Requirements: Provide steel stairs and landings, with stair handrails, and including plates, angles, hangers and struts for securing to building structure.

B. Regulatory Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of applicable codes for stair and railing design, except where more restrictive codes are specified.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Access: Comply with California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities. a. Refer to Section 01 41 10 – Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces. Hard surfaces include flooring and paving.
b. Manufacturer Representatives to verify each hard surface material provided for Project complies with Section 01 41 10 for slip-resistance based on each location hard surface materials are indicated in Project.
c. Subcontractor/Installer to verify hard surface material being installed has either manufacturer testing information indicating materials are suitable for locations indicated, or experience indicates such materials are appropriate. d. Notify Architect where hard surface materials may not be appropriate for applications indicated.

E. Design Requirements: Design stairs and railings to support following minimum loads.

1. Stairs: 100-psf loads, with individual stair treads designed to support a 300-pound concentrated load placed in a position which would cause maximum stress.

2. Railings: Support a lateral force of 50 lbs./lin. ft. uniform load and 200-lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage; ASTM E935. a. Top Rails: Design to support minimum 300-lb. concentrated single point load applied at any point vertically or horizontally.

F. Steel Sections, Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.

1. Steel Bar Grating: ASTM A36 or ASTM A1011.
05 51 00 - 2 Metal Stairs
TP-224
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
G. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A1011; or cold rolled, ASTM A1008, Class 1; or grade required for design loading.

H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S seamless, grade as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; minimum standard weight, STD or Schedule 40.

I. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; minimum Grade B; seamless where exposed.

J. Castings: Gray iron, ASTM A48, Class 30; malleable iron, ASTM A47.

K. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153.

L. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

M. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinccoated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.

N. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.

O. Paint: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of welds in galvanized steel.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Stairs: Comply with requirements of NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual", including components required for proper anchorage of metal stairs.

1. Types of Stairs: Refer to Drawings.

2. Stair Class: NAAMM Architectural Class.

3. Precast Concrete Tread Stairs: Provide minimum 5000 psi precast concrete treads shaped to provide integral tread and riser unit; conform to ACI 318 and Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL 117.
a. Treads: Non-slip finish.

4. Provide with abrasive nosing, 2" wide, contrasting color to tread.

B. Stair Railings: As indicated and as required by applicable codes and standards; comply with NAAMM "Pipe Railing Manual"; welded construction; cap exposed ends.

1. Handrail: Seamless steel tube, 1-1/2" outside diameter, continuous railings conforming to applicable code and design requirements.
05 51 00 - 3 Metal Stairs
TP-225
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Wall Rail Brackets: Castings as approved by Architect.

3. Wall Returns: 90° elbow return with 1/4" maximum clearance unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wall plates only where indicated and where required by applicable codes.

C. Fabricate stairs, landings and component connections to support live loads specified.

1. Provide closed riser stairs with nosing joined flush to riser.

2. Maximum Allowable Deflection:
a.
b.

Standard: Maximum L/240.

Where Underside of Stair is Finished: Maximum L/360.

3. Stringers: As indicated on Drawings; Contractor option where not otherwise indicated.

4. Reinforce underside of landings.

D. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.

E. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

G. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for site delivery.

H. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.

1. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water could accumulate.

I. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal stairs.

J. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal stairs and rails.

K. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finish.

L. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications; fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication.

M. Finishes: Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finish. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

1. Exterior Stairs and Rails: Hot dip galvanize and prime paint. 05 51 00 - 4 Metal Stairs
TP-226
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a. Provide minimum ASTM A123 or A924 and A653 G90 galvanized coating; iron and steel hardware galvanized conforming to ASTM A153.

2. Prime Painting: Comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating for preparation and priming.

N. Finishes: Prime paint metal surfaces. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finish. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

1. Prime Painting: Comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating for preparation and priming.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. Verify clearances, including code required head height clearances.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting and adjusting not part of scheduled work.

1. Perform necessary cutting and altering for installation of work of other sections.

B. Install steel stairs and railings square and level, plumb and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

C. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment.

D. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction; coordinate with related work to ensure no interruption in installation.

E. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings.

1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

F. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use primer consistent with shop coat or recommended for galvanized surfaces, as applicable.

G. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction.

END OF SECTION
05 51 00 - 5 Metal Stairs
TP-227
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 05 70 00

DECORATIVE METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide decorative (ornamental) metal items including attachment devices and accessories, as required for complete, finished installation.

1. Provide custom stainless-steel railings.

B. Related Work:

1. 2.

3. Section 05 50 00: Metal fabrications including steel railings.

Division 14: Decorative metal at elevators.

Section 32 31 20: Decorative metal fences and gates.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers: Metal Finishes Manual.

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): BHMA 1301/ ANSI A156.18 Standard for Materials and Finishes.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering to ensure compliance with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature including recommendations for cleaning.

B. Shop Drawings: Show detailing including anchorage, accessories, and supporting members.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each exposed metal finish.

D. Design/Build Certificates: Submit engineer certification by California licensed structural engineer indicating decorative metal complies with Contract Documents and applicable code requirements.
05 70 00 - 1 Decorative Metal
TP-228
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience fabricating decorative metal items like those required for Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide decorative (ornamental) metal items specified including attachment devices and accessories.

B. Rail Regulatory Requirements:

1. Access: Comply with California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for railing design to provide access for persons with disabilities.

2. Building Code: Comply with requirements of applicable building codes for railing design, except where more restrictive codes are specified.

C. Design Requirements, General: Drawings indicate decorative metal sizes and shapes; unless otherwise specifically indicated, design components and fabrications of gages and thicknesses to withstand anticipated loads.

1. Cladding: Where permitted, cladding to be minimum 0.025" thick unless otherwise approved in advance.

D. Rail Design Requirements: Design railings to support following minimum loads.

1. Railings: Support a lateral force of 50 lbs./lin. ft. uniform load and 200 lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage; ASTM E935. a. Top Rails: Design to support minimum 300 lb. concentrated single point load applied at any point vertically or horizontally.

E. Galvanized Steel
F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27.

1. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153. 05 70 00 - 2 Decorative Metal
TP-229
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
G. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

1. Manufactures:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Master Builders/Masterflow 713.

Five Star Products, Inc./Five Star Grout.

Bostik Construction Products/Upcon Grout.

Protex Industries, Inc./Propak.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

H. Brackets and Anchors: Unexposed plates, angles and supports may be steel; exposed items to match decorative metal type and finish.

I. Fasteners: Type required for specific usage; provide concealed fasteners except where specifically approved; where exposed match type and finish of metal being fastened.

1. Concealed Steel Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized minimum G90 where built into exterior walls or subject to high humidity.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Stainless Steel Countertops: Not less than 16-gage, with No. 4 satin directional polish finish.

1. Fabricate to furniture quality construction, assembled and welded in manner consistent with recognized steel furniture standards; grind joints smooth and flush and finish to match adjacent finish on exposed surfaces.

2. Provide maximum sizes available. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts where more than one-piece countertops are required.
a. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

3. Fabricate corners, joints, and finish such that no gaps, spaces, cavities, crevices, or inaccessible spaces or areas are present in which dirt, dust, debris, or moisture can accumulate.

4. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

5. Sound Deadening: Heavy-bodied resinous coating, filled with granulated cork or other resilient material, compounded for permanent, non-flaking adhesion to metal in 1/8" thick coating.
a. Apply coating of sound deadening material to underside of tops, drainboards, dishtables and sinks.

B. Fabricate component connections to support specified design loads. 05 70 00 - 3 Decorative Metal
TP-230
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Select materials for straightness, free of defects and irregularities.

1. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil canning," stains, discolorations, and imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

D. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened; provide concealed connection devices with hidden fasteners.

1. Fabricate continuous items with joints neatly fitted and secured.

2. Ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

3. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water could accumulate.

E. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding each type of material; provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration on exposed side; dress exposed and contact surfaces.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

G. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for site delivery.

H. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint where concealed, with preformed separators, or similar method to prevent corrosion.

I. Decorative Steel Field Finishes: Galvanize and prime paint exterior work and prime paint interior work unless otherwise noted in Schedule; comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating for preparation and priming.

1. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finish.

2. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

3. Galvanized Coating: Provide coating comparable to ASTM A924 and A653, minimum G90 hot dip galvanized coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary.
05 70 00 - 4 Decorative Metal
TP-231
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install decorative metal items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions, and approved shop drawings.

B. Install plumb, true and in correct relation to adjacent work, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

C. Prior to securing continuous items, adjust to ensure proper matching at butt joints and correct alignment throughout their length.

D. Tolerances: Accurately align and locate components to column lines and floor levels; adjust work to conform to following tolerances.

1. Plumb: 1/8" in 10'-0"; 1/4" in 40'-0"; non-cumulative.

2. Level: 1/8" in 20'-0"; 1/4" in 40'-0"; non-cumulative.

3. Alignment: Limit offset to 1/16" where surfaces are flush or less than 1/2" out of flush and separated by less than 2" (by reveal or protruding work); otherwise limit offsets to 1/8".

4. Location: 3/8" maximum deviation from measured theoretical location (any member, and location).

E. Install anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten system to building.

F. Provide anchors to be installed in other work, and setting details, in time for proper installation by trades concerned; verify correct placement.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean decorative metal surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to avoid damage of finish.

B. Remove excess sealant compounds, dirt and other foreign substances.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Repair or replace items damaged or marred during construction.

END OF SECTION
05 70 00 - 5 Decorative Metal
TP-232
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 06 10 50

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide miscellaneous wood blocking and plywood, including blocking for roofing system and related flashing.

1. 2.

Provide plywood panel boards.

Preservative treat wood members as indicated.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 06 20 00: Finish carpentry.

Section 06 40 00: Architectural woodwork.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Forest Products Society (FPS): National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastening.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit wood treatment certifications and instructions for proper use of each type of treated material.

B. Wood Product Certification: Furnish certification indicating wood products are from “well-managed” forests.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grades: Provide visible grade stamp of an agency certified by FPS.

B. Lumber Standard: Comply with US Product Standard PS20 for each indicated use, including moisture content and actual sizes related to indicated nominal sizes.

C. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS1 (ANSI A199.1).

D. Certified Wood Products: Wood products to be from forests certified “well-managed” by an agency accredited by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) including SmartWood Program and Forest Conservation Program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Requirements: Provide miscellaneous wood blocking and plywood, including blocking for roofing system and related flashing.
06 10 50 - 1 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
TP-233
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable code requirements for miscellaneous rough carpentry.

C. Blocking: Provide dimensional lumber graded in accordance with FPS Grading Rules; Construction Grade, Douglas Fir; minimum S-Dry.

D. Plywood: Provide minimum APA C-D exterior (CDX) plywood; stress rated where spanning between supporting members; fire retardant treated; minimum 3/4" thick unless otherwise indicated.

E. Plywood Panel Boards: Provide panel boards for electrical and communication panel boards; APA C-D plugged, interior type plywood with exterior glue, fire retardant treated; minimum 1/2" thick.

F. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized; size and type to suit application.

G. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; galvanized; size and type to suit application.

H. Fasteners: Provide fasteners as required for complete, secure installation of miscellaneous rough carpentry.

1. Solid Masonry or Concrete: Expansion shield and lag bolt type.

2. Steel: Bolts or powder activated type.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Wood Preservation: Treat lumber and plywood to comply with applicable requirements of American Wood Preservers Association and applicable codes.

1. Decay Resistance Treatment: Pressure treat wood in accordance with AWPA U1 using preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
a. Treat wood members based on AWPA U1 Use Categories as appropriate to Project location and exposure.
b. Kiln-dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment with water-borne preservative.

2. Fire Retardant Treatment: Comply with AWPA standards for pressure impregnation with fire-retardant chemicals to achieve flame-spread rating of not more than 25 in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL Test 723. a. Treat interior wood and plywood complying with applicable code requirements for Interior FRTW.
1) Exterior Type: Where indicated for exterior applications, provide fire treated wood passing ASTM D2898 rain test.
b. Provide UL label on each piece of fire-retardant wood and plywood. 06 10 50 - 2 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
TP-234
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
c. Kiln-dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19%.

3. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, wherever possible; if cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment.

4. Inspect each piece after drying and discard damaged and defective pieces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACEMENT
A. Place miscellaneous rough carpentry true to lines and levels.

B. Correlate location so attached work will comply with design requirements and be properly located.

C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.

D. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.

E. Shim with metal or slate for bearing on concrete and masonry.

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by recognized standards.

1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood.

G. Wood Blocking: Provide blocking of S4S lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to provide adequate support or to properly locate attached material.

1. Provide attachment to other work; form to shapes shown.

2. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces.

3. Remove temporary blocking when no longer needed.

4. Anchor to formwork before concrete placement.

5. Build into masonry as work progresses, cutting to fit masonry unit size involved.

H. Plywood: Comply with recommendations of American Plywood Association (APA) for fabrication and installation of plywood work.

END OF SECTION
06 10 50 - 3 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
TP-235
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 06 18 00

STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.

B. Section Includes:

1. Glued Laminated Wood Beams
C. Referenced Standards

1. ANSI/ AITC Standard A190.1 and ASTM D3737

2. NDS- National Design Specification for Wood Construction.

3. PS-56 Structural Glued Laminated Timber

4. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code Chapter 23

5. ASTM D3024 – Dry Use Adhesive with Protein Base, Casein Type.

ASTM D2559- Wet Use Adhesive. APA Specification AFG-01 – Adhesive for Field Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing.

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in required work. Including large-scale details of connections.
06 18 00- 1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER TP-236
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA-licensed firm.

B. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed work.

C. Quality Standard:

Timber."
Comply with AITC A190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111, "Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber during Transit, Storage, and Erection."
B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with waterresistant seams.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117-- MANUFACTURING or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from a single species.

B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from Douglas fir-larch that complies with combination symbols indicated.

C. Appearance Grade: Architectural appearance grade, complying with AITC 110.

D. Adhesive: Wet-use type complying with ASTM D 2559.

E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish.

F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish.
06 18 00- 2 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER TP-237
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. Dress exposed surfaces to remove planning or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper.

B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span.

C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end-cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood-coated for not less than 10 minutes.

D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit.

2.03 COMBINATION AND APPERANCE GRADE:

A. AITC 24F-V4 & 24F-V8 in conformance with AITC 110.

B. Appearance of Members: Industrial Grade where concealed, Architectural Grade surfaced all sides where exposed.

C. Unit shall be fabricated for wet use.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of structural glued-laminated timber.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, with uniform, close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place.

1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. 06 18 00- 3 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER TP-238
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Install structural glued-laminated timber to comply with Shop Drawings.

3. Install timber connectors as indicated.

B. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication.

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 9. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield.

END OF SECTION
06 18 00- 4 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER TP-239
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 06 20 00

FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide finish carpentry with accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Provide Janitor closet mop holders.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories

1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 3.1 (NAAWS).

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit literature for manufactured items.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver materials until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Janitor Closet Mop Holders: Spring loaded anti-slip mop holders with rubber cam, with three mop holders on stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc./Model B-223.

Bradley Corp./Model 9953.

American Specialties Inc./Model 0796A.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
06 20 00 - 1 Finish Carpentry
TP-240
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Anchors: Select the material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled-inplace anchors.

2.1 FABRICATION
A. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable; arrange neatly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.

1. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by applicable authorities prior to commencement of installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Secure work to blocking or backing.

B. Acceptable Tolerances:

1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8" in any 10'-0" length.

END OF SECTION
06 20 00 - 2 Finish Carpentry
TP-241
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 06 40 00

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork with accessories as required for complete finished installation including cabinetwork hardware.

1. 2.

Provide plastic laminate clad cabinetwork.

Provide countertops.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 10 50: Miscellaneous rough carpentry.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, 3.1 (NAAWS).

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature for manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles, fastening, joining details, finishes, and accessories.

1. Certification: Provide Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance Label on shop drawings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks, for composite wood products formaldehyde limitations, and for paints and coatings.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Member of Sponsor of North American Architectural Woodwork Standards with minimum five years successful experience fabricating woodwork like that required for Project.

C. Standards: Perform architectural woodwork in accordance with North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS).

1. Certified Compliance Program (CCP): Comply with Woodwork Institute “Certified Compliance Program (CCP) as defined in NAAWS.

2. Monitored Compliance Program (MCP): Comply with Woodwork Institute “Monitored Compliance Program (MCP) as defined in NAAWS. 06 40 00 - 1 Architectural Woodwork
TP-242
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Certified Seismic Installation Program (CSIP): Comply with Woodwork Institute Certified Seismic Installation Program.
a. Seismic Anchorage: Provide seismic anchorage for wall cabinets as required by California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 2.

D. Certified Wood Products: Wood products to be from forests certified “well-managed” by an agency accredited by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).

E. Field Sample: Provide one full size field sample of base and wall cabinet and countertop, including drawer, doors and shelves.

F. Seismic Anchorage: Provide seismic anchorage for wall cabinets as required by California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 2.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver architectural woodwork until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit.

1. Allow architectural woodwork shop finish to completely dry prior to delivery to site; allow materials to off-gas volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions off site.

B. Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60-degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.

C. Do not begin installation of architectural woodwork until space is fully enclosed and mechanical systems are fully operational.

1. Maintain interior installation areas at 70 degrees F and 50% to 55% relative humidity.

D. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork with accessories as required for complete finished installation including cabinetwork hardware.

B. Plastic Laminate Finished Casework:

1. Quality: NAAWS/Custom Grade frameless, flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Special: Provide each single length section of casework in largest such sections as access and openings allow.
1) Multiple self-supporting units fastened together to form larger unit allowed only where access and openings do not allow single lengths.

2. Plastic Laminates:
06 40 00 - 2 Architectural Woodwork
TP-243
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a. Types: NEMA LD-3.1 high pressure laminates.
1) Horizontal Surfaces: General Purpose Type, nominal 0.050". 2) Vertical Surfaces: Vertical Surface Type, nominal 0.032". 3) Unexposed Surfaces: Balanced with 0.030" melamine backing sheet. 4) Formed Surfaces: Postforming Type, nominal 0.042".
b. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Formica Corp.

Wilsonart, Wilsonart Engineered Surfaces.

Nevamar Corp.

Abet Laminati Co.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
c. Solid Color Laminates:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Formica Corp./ColorCore2.

Wilsonart, Wilsonart Engineered Surfaces/Solicore.

Abet Laminati Co/Solid Colors.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
d. Chemical Resistant Laminates:
1) Wilsonart, Wilsonart Engineered Surfaces/Chemsurf.
2) Nevamar/Chemarmor Chemical Resistant Decorative Laminate. 3) Arborite/ArboChem.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
e. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

3. Wood Core: Plywood or medium density fiberboard (MDF) or particleboard, with no added formaldehyde and free of toxic materials.

C. Casework Hardware: Provide casework hardware items as required for complete installation as indicated; provide types as listed in North American Architectural Woodwork Standards for casework, but no less than following types.

1. Plug-In Pin Type Shelf Supports (Transparent Finished Casework): Match BHMA A156.9 B04013 spoon type plug-in supports; provide holes 1" on center.

Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports (Plastic Laminate and Opaque Painted Casework): Match BHMA A156.9 B04073 adjustable standards and B04083 closed shelf rest brackets for mortis mounting; flush mounted in cabinet.

2. 3. Cabinet Hinges: BHMA A156.9 B01602 or B01603 frameless European concealed type, minimum 160 degree opening, with spring closer.

Cabinet Hinges: BHMA A156.9 B01602 or B01603 frameless European concealed type, minimum 160 degree opening, without spring closer.

Cabinet Hinges: BHMA A156.9 B014xx pivot (knife) type, polished chrome finish.

4. 5.
06 40 00 - 3 Architectural Woodwork
TP-244
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

6. Cabinet Pulls: Back mounted wire type, 4" center to center, clear aluminum; as approved by Architect.

7. Drawer Slides: Full extension, rail mounted type, minimum 100 lb. capacity with ball-bearing rollers; self-closing.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Accuride.
2) Knape & Vogt.
3) Blum.
4) Hettich International.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

Cabinet Locks: Pin and tumbler slide bolt lock with five pin tumblers as approved by Architect, two keys each.

Magnetic Catches: BHMA 156.9 B03141.

8. 9.

D. Quartz-Based Solid Polymer Countertops: Manufacturer's standard quartz-based polymer system with color throughout thickness; provide manufacturer recommended joint adhesive; exposed surfaces finished to match top.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

CaesarStone USA/CaesarStone.

Silstone USA/Silstone Countertops.

DuPont Co./Zodiaq.

Cambria USA/Cambria Countertops.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Quality: NAAWS/Premium Grade.

3. Type: Not less than 1/2" thick sheet; coordinate with bowls as indicated and as specified in Division 22.

4. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate architectural woodwork in accordance with specified North American Architectural Woodwork Standards.

B. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

1. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts.

2. Cap exposed edges with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern.

3. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of laminate surfaces. 06 40 00 - 4 Architectural Woodwork
TP-245
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

5. Prime paint contact surfaces of cutouts.

C. Countertops: Provide maximum sizes available. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts where more than one-piece countertops are required.

1. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

2. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

3. Splashes and edges as indicated or as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

D. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable; arrange neatly.

E. Assemble woodwork in shop in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible; do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work consistent with Architectural Woodwork Standards specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required, using concealed shims.

B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting architectural woodwork are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation.

C. Secure work to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

D. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.

E. Install architectural woodwork under supervision of factory-trained mechanics.

F. Attach architectural woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements.

G. Paneling: Provide fire-treated wood stops eight feet on center at paneling where required by applicable codes when paneling is not direct applied to substrate. 06 40 00 - 5 Architectural Woodwork
TP-246
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
H. Acceptable Tolerances:

1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8" in any 10'-0" length.

2. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted.

3. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32".

I. Preparation for Field Finishing:

1. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

2. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site-applied finishes.

3. Seal concealed and semi-concealed surfaces; brush apply only, using primer consistent with finish coats specified under Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.

END OF SECTION
06 40 00 - 6 Architectural Woodwork
TP-247
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
SECTION 07 13 00

SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide self-adhesive sheet membrane waterproofing system, including sealing joints and protrusions through waterproofing, with protective board, drainage composite covering, and accessories for complete watertight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 07 16 00: Cementitious and reactive waterproofing at elevator pits.

Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier/underlayment including sheet membranes.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for waterproofing system and protection board.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate flashings, joints, sealing at openings, projections, and waterproofing of holes, slots and sleeves.

C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's representative's certification work has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installers: Minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar scope.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, except where specifically authorized by manufacturer's representative for specific materials.

B. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, dirty, dusty, or otherwise unsuitable surfaces.

1. Allow concrete surfaces to cure minimum 28 days.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist water penetration except where failure is result of structural failure of building. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered structural failure.
07 13 00 - 1 Sheet Waterproofing
TP-248
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023

2. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 5 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. GCP Applied Technologies (Grace) / Bituthene 4000 Waterproofing System.

B. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing / CCW Miradri 860/861 or CCW 701 C. Polyguard Products, Inc./Polyguard No. 650
D. Meadows, W.R. Inc. / Mel-Rol
E. American Hydrotech, Inc. / VW 75
F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide 60-Mil self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene film with release mils of
liner on
adhesive side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. System including sealing joints and protrusions through waterproofing, protective covering, and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Waterproofing System: System consisting of sheet membrane of rubberized asphalt and polyethylene film, total thickness approximately 60 mil, and fluid applied rubberized asphalt for sealing system.

1. Low Temperature Applications: Where temperatures are between 25 degrees F and 40 degrees F, use manufacturer's special membrane and primer for low temperature applications.

D. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer of applications involved; primer is required for waterproofing applications.

E. Crack and Expansion Joint Sealants: Types as recommended by waterproofing system manufacturer, compatible with waterproofing system.
07 13 00 - 2 Sheet Waterproofing
TP-249
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
F. Protective Covering:

1. Protection Board: Preformed asphalt impregnated board or similar protective cover recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
a.
b.

Vertical Applications: Minimum 1/8" thick protective cover.

Horizontal Applications: Minimum 1/4" thick protective cover.

2. Drainage Composite: Formed plastic with filter fabric designed to allow penetration and drainage of water while retaining silts, soils, and similar particulate matter; type recommended by manufacturer for application. a. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Grace / Hydroduct 660 Drainage Composite.

Carlisle / CCW MiraDRAIN 8000.

Colbond, Inc. / Enkadrain 3611R.

Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Mel-Drain
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Ensure sleeves, curbs and projections which pass through waterproofing are properly and rigidly installed.

C. Ensure surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves and projections which may be detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing.

1. Repair surfaces as required by manufacturer's representative.

D. Seal cracks and expansion joints with recommended backup material and sealant; ensure proper depth-width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

E. Ensure expansion joints are sharply formed, free of broken edges and loose aggregates.

F. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt and foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing.

G. Prime surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions as required for watertight installation.

1. Seal joints and items projecting through waterproofing. 07 13 00 - 3 Sheet Waterproofing
TP-250
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
B. Seam Overlap: Minimum 2-1/2".

1. Stagger end laps.

C. Reinforce corners with double applications of waterproofing unless otherwise specifically recommended by manufacturer's representative.

D. Allow extra materials at joints with anticipated movement to permit movement without stressing waterproofing.

E. Roll waterproofing membrane smooth, firmly and completely to surfaces indicated, with no fish-mouths or bunches of material.

F. Inspect and repair waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to application of protection board and backfill.

G. As soon as possible after installation and inspection apply protection boards and drainage composites in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Neatly fit around pipes and penetrations.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Flood Test: Test horizontal applications of waterproofing before completed membrane is covered by protection course or other work.

1. Test for leaks with 2" depth of water maintained for 24 hours; do not overload structure.

2. Repair leaks revealed by examination of substructure and repeat test until no leakage is observed.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall inspect work of Project on regular basis and provide certification waterproofing has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Provide unobstructed access to waterproofing work.

2. Correct defects and irregularities as advised by manufacturer's representative.

END OF SECTION
07 13 00 - 4 Sheet Waterproofing
TP-251
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 14 10

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide cold fluid-applied membrane waterproofing system, with internal corners, and accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

1. Location: Provide fluid-applied waterproofing at planters B. Related Work:

1. Section 09 30 00: Waterproofing beneath tile.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature, recommendations for surface conditioner, flashing, joint cover sheet and crack sealants, and temperature range for application of waterproofing.

B. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's representative's certification indicating work has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.

B. Qualification of Installer: Minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar scope.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

B. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, dirty, dusty or otherwise unsuitable surfaces.

1. Allow concrete surfaces to cure minimum 28 days.
07 14 00 - 1 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
TP-252
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist water penetration except where failure is result of structural failure of building. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered structural failure.

2. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 5 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Tremco Incorporated.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Section Includes: Provide cold fluid-applied membrane waterproofing system with accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements limiting volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

1. Comply with applicable Air Quality Management District limitations for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Fluid-applied Waterproofing: Manufacturer’s standard fluid-applied elastomeric waterproofing membrane system as specified.

1. Horizontal Waterproofing beneath Pavers at Podium: Tremco/250GC fluidapplied waterproofing applied to thickness of 60 mils over non-occupied spaces, 90 mils thickness over occupied spaces.
a. Drainage Board: Tremco/Tremdrain 1000 drainage board over waterproofing.
07 14 00 - 2 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
TP-253
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Horizontal and Vertical Waterproofing at Planters: Tremco/250GC fluid-applied waterproofing applied to thickness of 60 mils over non-occupied spaces, 90 mils thickness over occupied spaces.
a. Drainage Board: Tremco/Tremdrain S drainage board over waterproofing.

D. Surface Conditioners, Primers, and Accessories: Materials compatible with membrane compound; as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Joint Cover Sheet: Uncured neoprene or woven uncoated fiberglass mesh designed for and compatible with waterproofing as recommended by system manufacturer.

2. Joint and Crack Sealant: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ensure drains, sleeves, curbs and projections which pass through waterproofing are properly and rigidly installed.

B. Ensure surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves or projections which may be detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing; repair surfaces as required by manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Seal cracks and joints with recommended backup material and sealant. Ensure proper depth-width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

1. Rout or sawcut cracks exceeding 1/16" in width and fill with sealant.

D. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt and foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing.

E. Metal Surfaces: Remove contaminants which may adversely affect adhesion or performance of waterproofing; apply metal primer.

F. Use drop cloths or masking to protect adjacent surfaces.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply waterproofing system, including surface conditioner, primers, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Apply not less than 55-mil coat of waterproofing over cracks and joints not less than 2" on either side.

2. Allow preparatory work to cure minimum 16 hours prior to application of waterproofing membrane.

B. Seal items projecting through waterproofing.
07 14 00 - 3 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
TP-254
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Install membrane flashings and seal into membrane.

D. After complete installation, close off area to prevent unauthorized traffic or work over waterproofing.

3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flood Testing: Flood test fluid-applied waterproofing; if defects are revealed, repair and repeat flood test until no defects are revealed.

1. Allow waterproofing to cure minimum 72 hours prior to flood testing.

2. Do not overload structure with flood test; if necessary, section off areas as approved by Architect.

3. Install protection board over waterproofing membrane system after system passes flood test; comply with manufacturer recommendations for installation of protection board.

END OF SECTION
07 14 00 - 4 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
TP-255
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 16 00

CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide crystalline type reactive waterproofing system applied to interior (negative) side of concrete surfaces.

1. Locations: Apply at pits

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's representative's certification work has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installers: Minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar scope.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

B. Do not apply waterproofing to dirty, dusty, or otherwise unsuitable surfaces.

1. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered structural failure.

2. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 10 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty. 07 16 00 - 1 Cementitious & Reactive Waterproofing
TP-256
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Xypex/Concentrate, with the "Architectural Finish".

B. Vandex, Inc./Super.

C. Kryton Group of Companies/Krystol T1 and T2.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide crystalline type reactive waterproofing system applied to interior (negative) side of concrete surfaces.

B. Waterproofing: Crystalline type waterproofing designed to resist water penetration when applied to wall or floor negative side (side away from water pressure).

1. Provide system with integral finish or capable of being painted.

2. Floor applications shall be designed for pedestrian traffic.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, white where available.

C. Accessory Materials: Provide accessory materials as required and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer to assure complete, watertight installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ensure sleeves, curbs, and projections that penetrate waterproofing are properly and rigidly installed.

B. Ensure surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves or projections which may be detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing.

1. Repair surfaces as required by manufacturer's representative.

C. Seal cracks and expansion joints as recommended.

D. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt and foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions for watertight installation.

B. Seal items projecting through waterproofing.
07 16 00 - 2 Cementitious & Reactive Waterproofing
TP-257
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer’s representative to inspect work of Project and provide certification waterproofing has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Provide unobstructed access to waterproofing work for inspection.

2. Correct defects and irregularities as advised by manufacturer's representative.

END OF SECTION
07 16 00 - 3 Cementitious & Reactive Waterproofing
TP-258
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide insulation and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Provide thermal batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.

Provide poly-scrim faced batt insulation for exposed interior applications.

Provide thermal board insulation with integral vapor retarder.

Provide nailable surface polyisocyanurate thermal board roof insulation.

Provide foil faced polyisocyanurate thermal board insulation.

Provide extruded polystyrene thermal insulation.

B. Related Work:

1. 2.

Section 07 53 10: Insulation integral with elastomeric PVC membrane roofing.

Section 09 21 00: Acoustical insulation concealed in gypsum board systems.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Interior Vapor Retarders: Where specifications require foil faced vapor retarders as part of building thermal insulation system, intent is to prevent migration of spores from mold and mildew into interior building spaces.

Intent is to provide air barrier and vapor retarder on interior surface while allowing vapor to move through exterior wall vapor permeable surfaces, while vapor permeable water barriers are maintained at exterior side of wall.

1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of insulation.

1. Submit Underwriter's Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings; approvals of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable authorities.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide thermal insulation with accessories. 07 21 00 - 1 Thermal Insulation
TP-259
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Thermal Batt Insulation: Preformed slag mineral or glass fiber with thermosetting resin binders, conforming to ASTM C665; formaldehyde-free.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Johns Manville/FSK-25 Thermal-Shield Insulation.

Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp./Fiberglas FS-25 Insulation.

CertainTeed/Thermafiber FS25 Insulation.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
a.
b.
c.
d.

Johns Manville/Thermal-Shield Insulation.

Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp./Fiberglas Insulation.

CertainTeed/Thermafiber Insulation.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. R-Value: Minimum R-19 at walls, R-38 at horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating: Maximum 25/450, ASTM E84.

4. Vapor Retarder: Type III, aluminum vapor retarder on one side.

5. Vapor Retarder: Type I: No vapor retarder.

6. Combustibility: Pass ASTM E136.

C. Thermal Batt Insulation (LEED): Preformed batt insulation.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Bonded Logic (602.812.9114)/Ultratouch cotton insulation.

U.S. Greenfiber (Greenstone)/Cocoon Cellulose Insulation.

Johns Manville Corp. (800.654.3103)/Grid-Shield Rx fiberglass insulation.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. R-Value: Minimum R-19, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Hi Density R-38 Thermal Batt Insulation: Preformed slag mineral or glass fiber with thermosetting resin binders, conforming to ASTM C665; formaldehyde-free.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.

Knauf Insulation/High Density EcoBatt ECOSE FSK-25Insulation.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. R-Value: Minimum R-38.

3. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating: Maximum 25/450, ASTM E84.

4. Vapor Retarder: Type III, aluminum vapor retarder on one side. 07 21 00 - 2 Thermal Insulation
TP-260
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Thermal Batt Exposed Ceiling Insulation: Preformed batt insulation with white polyscrim-kraft or similar vapor retarder facing meeting specified fire rating and intended for exposed applications.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.

CertainTeed/Post Frame Poly-Scrim-Kraft (PSK) Fiber Glass Insulation.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. R-Value: Minimum R-38, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating: Maximum 25/450, ASTM E84.

F. Thermal Board Insulation: Preformed slag mineral or glass fiber with thermosetting resin binders forming rigid board, conforming to ASTM C612.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Johns Manville/Insul-Shield Insulation.

Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp./Fiberglas 700 Series Insulation.

CertainTeed/CertaPro Commercial Board Insulation.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Thickness: Minimum 1" unless otherwise indicated; fill furring channel space between wall and gypsum board.

3. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating: Maximum 25/450, ASTM E84.

4. Combustibility: Pass ASTM E136.

5. Vapor Retarder: Type I, unfaced.

6. Vapor Retarder: Type III: Aluminum vapor retarder on one side.

G. Thermal Board Insulation with Nailable Surface: Provide foam insulation intended for use with sloped nailable type roofing systems; with minimum 7/16” oriented strand board (OSB) surface and glass fiber mat facer, conform to ASTM C1289, Type V.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Johns Manville/NailBoard.

Dow Chemical Co./Hy-Therm Nail-Line.

Atlas Roofing Corp./ACFoam Nail Base.

RMAX, Inc./Nailable Base-3.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Thermal Resistance: Not less than R-38 total Long-Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) unless otherwise indicated.
07 21 00 - 3 Thermal Insulation
TP-261
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
H. Thermal Board Insulation with Foil Face: Provide foam insulation intended for use with roofing systems; with foil facing, conform to ASTM C1289, Type I, Class I.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Dow Chemical Co./Thermax Metal Building Board or Thermax Sheathing.

Atlas Roofing Corp./ACFoam Supreme.

RMAX, Inc./Thermaroof Plus-3.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Thermal Resistance: Not less than R-30 total Long-Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) unless otherwise indicated.

I. Blown-In Insulation: Glass fiber blown-in insulation.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Johns Manville/Climate Pro Loose Fill Blow-In Fiber Glass Insulation.

Owens Corning/AttiCat Expanding Blown-In Pink Fiberglas.

CertainTeed/InsulSafe or OPTIMA Blow-in Insulation.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. R-Value/Thickness: As indicated, maximum possible for spaces indicated to be insulated where not specifically indicated.

J. Accessories: Furnish as recommended by insulation manufacturer for insulation types, substrates, and conditions involved.

1. Fasteners and Attachment Devices: Comply with insulation manufacturer recommendations for attachment of insulation.

2. Fasteners to withstand loads specified for system.

3. Vapor Retarder Tape: Minimum 2" wide self-adhering type designed to maintain vapor retarder integrity and complying with fire resistance ratings as required by applicable codes.

4. Penetration Type Insulation Supports: Galvanized or electroplated steel penetration supports with adhesive attachment to substrate and support disc.

5. Hat Channels for Special Fiberous Continuous Insulation: Types as indicated and as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

Thermal Break Insulation Supports for Continuous Insulation: Provide attachment system designed specifically for supporting both continuous insulation and exterior building cladding systems indicated.

6. a. Manufacturers:
1) Armatherm (844.360.1036)/Armatherm Z Girt Structural Thermal Break. 2) Knight Wall Systems (855.597.9255)/CI or HCI System. 3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
07 21 00 - 4 Thermal Insulation
TP-262
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
b. Provide system recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated with accessories as required for complete thermally-broken continuous insulation system in configurations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation; beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable code requirements. Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces.

1. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical services within insulation plane; leave no gaps or voids; maintain integrity of thermal barrier.

2. Backed Insulation: Use insulation free of ripped backs and edges.

3. Insulations with Vapor Retarder Facing: Install insulation with integral vapor retarder with vapor retarder toward inside of building.

B. Batt Insulation: Friction fit batt insulation in place; use tape or penetration supports as necessary to assure permanent installation.

1. Taping: Tape joints and tears in integral vapor retarder, including joints between insulation and surrounding construction, to ensure vapor-tight installation.

2. Taping: Tape tears in integral vapor retarder.

3. Penetration Supports: Cut or bend pins in locations accessible to maintenance personnel, to eliminate potential hazards from exposed pin points.

C. Nailable Surface Roof Insulation: Secure using fasteners recommended by insulation manufacturer for application indicated and capable of resisting wind loads specified for roofing systems applied over nailable surfaced roof board insulation.

END OF SECTION
07 21 00 - 5 Thermal Insulation
TP-263
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 26 00

BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDER
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide vapor retarder system for below grade and slab-on-grade concrete, including sealing joints and protrusions through vapor retarder and sand bed below vapor retarder.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

1.3 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply vapor retarder during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Fortifiber Corp./Ultra 15.

B. Raven Industries, Inc./Vapor Block # VB 15 (15 mil Blue).

C. Stego Industries, Inc./Stego Wrap (15 mil).

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide vapor retarder system for below grade and slab-on-grade concrete, including sealing joints and protrusions through vapor retarder and sand bed below vapor retarder.

B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A vapor retarder consisting of 15 mil polyolefin film.

1. Permeance: Maximum 0.025 perms, ASTM F1249 and E154 tests.

2. Resistance to Puncture: Minimum 2200 grams, ASTM D1709, Method B.

3. Tear Resistance: Minimum 8.74 lbs., ASTM D1004.

4. Tensile Strength: Minimum 35 lbs/in., ASTM E154, Section 9, Method D-882, in both directions.
07 26 00 - 1 Below-Grade Vapor Retarder
TP-264
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Joint Sealer: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer and providing comparable permeance to vapor retarder.

D. Sand Bed: Clean natural sand; free from silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ensure sleeves, curbs and projections that penetrate vapor retarder are properly and rigidly installed.

B. Ensure substrate is free of projections and irregularities that may be detrimental to proper installation of vapor retarder.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Spread and roll sand to provide smooth, even bed for vapor retarder.

B. Apply vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and in accordance with ASTM E1643; comply with most restrictive where conflicts occur.

1. Seal items projecting through vapor retarder with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Seams: Minimum 12" overlap, sealed with pressure sensitive tape for vapor tight seal.

D. Lay vapor retarder membrane smooth with no fish-mouths or bunches of material.

E. Inspect and repair vapor retarder prior to application of concrete slab; tape tears and repair damage.

END OF SECTION
07 26 00 - 2 Below-Grade Vapor Retarder
TP-265
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 28 00

WEATHER BARRIER/UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide weather barrier/underlayment air and water barrier systems for siding, sloped roofing, flashing and sheet metal, and penetrations with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

1. Sloped Roofing Underlayment: Provide self-adhering sheet membrane underlayment at sloped roofing systems, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

2. Flashings and Sheet Metal Underlayment: Provide self-adhering sheet membrane underlayment at flashings and sheet metal, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

3. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane (SASM) Flashing at Penetrations: Provide SASM flashing for around penetrations through building paper including windows and doors, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 60 00: Exposed metal flashing.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Weather Barriers: Provide weather barrier/underlayment systems which, with other building components, comply with applicable code requirements for air barriers and water barriers.

1. Air Barriers: Air barriers shall be as defined by applicable Energy Code requirements and shall include standard exterior wall components and air seal joint sealants specified in Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealants.

2. Water Barriers: Water barriers shall be as defined by applicable Building Code requirements and shall include vapor permeable systems with or without rainscreen barriers intended to extend amount of water drained to exterior.

3. Self-Adhering Flexible Flashings: Intent of flexible flashings at window openings, door openings, and other wall penetrations is to ensure water cannot move from exterior surface past water barriers and into building.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work; require attendance of parties directly affecting underlayment.

1. Review procedures and coordination required with related work. 07 28 00 - 1 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
TP-266
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer’s literature for each type of underlayment.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each material.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide weather barrier/underlayment air and water barrier systems for, sloped roofing, flashing and sheet metal, and penetrations with accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials with minimum volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions available.

D. High Temperature Metal Roofing Underlayment: Self-adhering sheet membrane with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.

GCP Applied Technologies (Grace).

Henry Company.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

E. Sheet Metal and Flashing Underlayment: Self-adhering rubberized sheet membrane with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.

GCP Applied Technologies (Grace).

Henry Company.

Carlisle Corp.
07 28 00 - 2 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
TP-267
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
d.
e.

Protecto Wrap Company.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for each type of application.

F. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane (SASM) Flashing at Penetrations: SASM with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

GCP Applied Techologies (Grace).

Henry Company.

Carlisle Corp.

Protecto Wrap Company.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for each type of application.

G. Concealed Metal Flashings Integral with Underlayment: Minimum 26 gage thick steel with minimum 0.90 oz/sf galvanized coating; ASTM A653.

1. Fasteners: Standard round wire type of hot dipped galvanized steel; minimum 19/64" head diameter and 0.104" shank diameter; minimum 7/8" long.

H. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.

I. Accessories: Provide as recommended by underlayment manufacturers for specific applications.

1. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type with mineral fiber components, for sealing and coating flashings; free of toxic solvents and free of asbestos. Capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of approximately 75 degrees F and 50% R.H.

2.2 FLASHING FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".

B. Form flashings to drain water to exterior at roofing and siding construction for penetrations, sill and header flashings.

C. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, in maximum possible lengths and free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

D. Hem exposed edges of metal flashings minimum 1/4" on underside.

E. Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of metal flashings. 07 28 00 - 3 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
TP-268
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install underlayment over surfaces that are dry, free of ridges, warps and voids that could damage paper.

B. Coordinate installation with installation of components and items projecting through underlayment.

3.2 FLASHINGS INSTALLATION
A. Install flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".

B. Weatherlap joints minimum 2" and seal with plastic cement; secure in place.

C. Fastenings: Concealed in completed installation.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install weather barrier/underlayment in accordance with installation instructions and recommendations of each manufacturer and of manufacturers of products to cover weather barrier/underlayment; comply with applicable code requirements.

1. Wall Underlayment: Provide one-layer No. 15 building paper underlayment.

2. Wall Underlayment: Provide two-layers Grade D building paper underlayment.

3. Wall Underlayment: Provide fluid applied underlayment.

4. Wall Underlayment: Provide one-layer sheet membrane underlayment.

5. Sloped Roofing: Provide one-layer sheet membrane underlayment.

6. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Provide one-layer sheet membrane underlayment.

7. Penetrations: Apply one-layer of self-adhering sheet membrane extending minimum 18" from penetrations, including windows and doors; start at bottom of penetration and weatherlap joints.
a. Apply top layer over metal flashing to direct water to exterior.

8. Weatherlap joints as recommended by system manufacturer. a. Weatherlap joints not less than 2” at building paper.

9. Secure underlayment in place, stagger joints between sheet membrane layers; lap ends minimum 6"; stagger end joints.
07 28 00 - 4 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
TP-269
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Building Paper Underlayment: Prime substrates and roll sheet membrane underlayment smooth, firmly and completely to surfaces indicated, with no fishmouths or bunches of material.

1. Apply plastic cement to substrate prior to application of underlayment starter strips to prevent capillary movement of water back up beneath underlayment.

2. Weatherlap items projecting through building paper underlayment and seal with plastic cement.

C. Sheet Membranes: Weatherlap items projecting through sheet membrane underlayment and seal with sealer recommended by sheet membrane underlayment manufacturer.

END OF SECTION
07 28 00 - 5 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
TP-270
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 41 15

MANUFACTURED BATTEN SEAM ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide factory finished manufactured metal batten seam type roofing including integral metal flashings and sealants, and accessories as required for complete weather-tight installation.

B. Related Work:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 07 21 00: Thermal insulation.

Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier/underlayment.

Section 07 60 00: Flashing and sheet metal not integral with roofing.

Section 07 95 00: Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene pre-construction conference one week prior to metal roofing work to coordinate roofing with other trades; require attendance of parties directly affecting metal roofing work.

1. Review installation and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for prefabricated components, and recommendations for cleaning and protection.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioning, panel layout, general construction details including closures, flashings, locations of and types of sealants, and anchorage.

C. Samples: Furnish finished preformed metal roofing and each type of exposed metal flashing.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installer: Company with minimum five years successful experience in work of comparable scope.

B. Mock-Up: Provide 200 square foot mock-up of metal roofing construction at location approved by Architect; approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project. 07 41 15 - 1 Manufactured Batten seam Roofing
TP-271
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide protective covering on finished flashing materials to protect them through installation.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Three years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 20 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. AEP Span.

B. Berridge Manufacturing Co. (Basis of Design)

1. Color 1: High Roof: Lead Cote

2. Color 2: Low Roof: Charcoal Grey
C. ATAS International, Inc.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide factory finished manufactured metal batten seam type roofing including integral metal flashings and sealants, and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Building Standards Code requirements for metal roofing systems.

1. Cool Roof System: Comply with California Building Standards Code requirements for “Cool Roof” system including three-year aged solar reflectance value requirements.
a. Label: System to have Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) label. 07 41 15 - 2 Manufactured Batten seam Roofing
TP-272
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Design Criteria: Design system to provide movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100-year seasonal temperature ranges.

1. Design system to accommodate tolerances of structure, provided irregularities do not exceed industry recognized standards and clearances are maintained.

2. Provide for positive drainage of water entering or occurring within preformed metal roofing system.

D. Batten Seam Metal Roofing System: Preformed metal roofing system complete with anchoring assembly and accessory components.

1. Type: Basis of Design: Tee-Panel, 12 ¾” coverage.

2. Type: Manufacturer's standard batten seam system specified with pans approximately 12" on center unless otherwise indicated.

3. Sheet Metal: Minimum 24 gage galvanized steel, minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard kynar/hylar coil coat finish complying with AAMA 605.2.

5. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

E. Sealants and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use in conjunction with installation of metal roofing.

1. Non-staining; non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior applications.

2. Color of exposed sealants and gaskets to match roofing.

F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard hot dip galvanized fasteners with not less than G90 galvanized coating.

1. Finish exposed fasteners to match roofing.

G. Underlayment: Specified in Section 07 28 00 – Weather Barrier/Underlayment.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Internal and External Corners: Same materials, material thickness and finish as roofing, profile to suit system, brake formed, shop cut and factory mitered to required angles.

B. Mitered internal corners shall be backed with minimum 22 gage galvanized steel sheet stock to maintain continuity of profile.

C. Expansion Joints: Provide concealed metal expansion control throughout roofing system.
07 41 15 - 3 Manufactured Batten seam Roofing
TP-273
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
D. Sheet Metal, Flashings, Gutters, Closures, expansion covers, and Other Components: Custom color to match adjacent roofing. Brake formed to required profiles; conform to SMACNA Manual.

1. Conform to requirements specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal E. Provide for positive drainage to exterior, any water entering or occurring within metal roofing systems.
.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate is free of elements that could be harmful to system.

B. Beginning of work signifies acceptance of conditions.

C. Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required to secure system to structure.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured metal batten seam roofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions, and approved shop drawings.

B. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Comply with installation requirements specified in Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finished surfaces.

D. Protect metal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint; allow protective coating to dry prior to installing members.

E. Permanently fasten roofing system to structural supports, properly aligned, leveled and plumb.

1. Maximum 1/16" offset from true alignment between adjacent members butting or in line.

2. Maximum 1/4" variation from plane or location indicated on Drawings.

F. Locate end laps over supports; end lap panels minimum 2"; ensure side-laps are over firm bearing.

G. Provide expansion joints at regular basis, concealed within system.

H. Use concealed fasteners except where specifically approved by Architect. 07 41 15 - 4 Manufactured Batten seam Roofing
TP-274
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I. Install sealants and gaskets where required to prevent direct weather penetration.

J. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement, and wind whistles.

K. Remove protective coating when no longer required to protect roofing and flashing from construction.

END OF SECTION
07 41 15 - 5 Manufactured Batten seam Roofing
TP-275
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
SECTION 07 46 40

FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide fiber reinforced cement siding with accessories for complete weathertight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier/underlayment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication details, connection details, pertinent dimensions, and erection support points.

1. Show precise locations of exposed fasteners, including drawings scaled to indicate exposed fastener patterns.

C. Samples: Submit sample of each type of panel with finish required.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.

B. Qualification of Installer: Firm with minimum five years successful experience installing architectural fiber cement building panels.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store in manufacturer's wrapping and crating.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years.

1. Repair or replace defective siding that fails through corrosion or finish damage because of manufacturing defects.
07 46 40 - 1 Fiber Cement Siding
TP-276
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. James Hardie Building Products.

B. GAF Materials Corp./GAF-ELK WeatherSide.

C. Plycem USA, Inc./Allura.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description Provide fiber cement siding with accessories.

B. Fiber Cement Panels: Provide systems as indicated on Drawings; not less than ASTM C1186, Type A with label listing an approved quality control agency per code.

1. Plank System: Match Hardie/Hardiplank, fiber-reinforced cement panels, with no asbestos content.
a. Thickness: Preformed 5/16" thick.
b. Finish: Smooth surface.
c. Size: 9-1/2" width (8-1/4" coverage), with planks available in up to 12'-0" lengths.

2. Panel System: Match Hardie/Hardipanel, fiber-reinforced cement panels, with no asbestos content.
a. Thickness: Preformed 5/16" thick.
b. Finish: Smooth surface.
c. Size: 4'-0" width by lengths appropriate for application, including 8', 9', and 10' lengths as required to minimize joints.

3. Panel Soffits and Trim: Match panel system as indicated and as required for complete installation.

4. Factory Prime Finish: Provide factory primed fiber cement panels using primer compatible with paints and coatings specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

5. Shop Finish: Provide manufacturer’s premium quality shop painted finished materials.
a. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.
07 46 40 - 2 Fiber Cement Siding
TP-277
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023

6. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant non-magnetic stainless-steel siding nails; types as recommended by system manufacturer.

7. Exposed Fastener Heads: Types as approved by Architect.

C. Accessories: Provide as indicated, as recommended by panel manufacturer and as required for complete finished siding installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install siding over surfaces which are dry, free of ridges, warps and voids.

B. Coordinate installation of siding with installation of items projecting through; ensure openings are properly sized and located prior to siding installation.

C. Underlayment: Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required to secure siding to structure.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide for installation procedures, temporary bracing and induced loads during erection; maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided.

1. Coordinate with building paper installation in Section 07 28 00; take special care not to damage building paper beyond required penetrations for fasteners.

B. Install siding in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, without damage to panel, panel shape or finish.

1. Carefully locate exposed fasteners to conform to Architectural Drawings and approved shop drawings; exposed fasteners to provide uniform pattern as approved.

C. Erect level, plumb, square, and true within allowable tolerances.

D. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints, as erection progresses.

E. Securely fasten units in place.

F. Seal exposed fastener heads using materials matching mineral-fiber cement siding and strike flush to match adjacent surfaces.

G. Site Tolerances: Maintain following joint tolerances of erected mineral-fiber units:

1. 2.

Face Width of Joint: Maximum plus or minus 1/16" (total 1/8").

Jog in Alignment of Edges: Maximum 1/8".
07 46 40 - 3 Fiber Cement Siding
TP-278
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean marks, debris, and dirt from exposed surfaces of mineral-fiber units using manufacturer recommended cleaning materials and procedures which do not stain nor damage panels or fasteners.

END OF SECTION
07 46 40 - 4 Fiber Cement Siding
TP-279
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 53 10

ELASTOMERIC PVC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide reinforced polyvinyl chloride (PVC) type elastomeric sheet membrane roofing system with base flashings, insulation, roof deck board, and accessories for complete, weather-tight installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 06 10 50: Wood blocking and plywood in conjunction with roofing.

Section 07 60 00: Flashing and sheet metal.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Roofing Contractors Association: The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting roofing work.

1. Review procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit membrane manufacturer's literature for membrane and base flashing materials; provide specific recommendations of insulation system manufacturer.

1. Submit membrane manufacturer's recommendations for surface conditioning, flashing, joint cover and crack sealants, and temperature range for application of materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for PVC sheet seams and insulation layout; indicate location and insulation type; provide cross section indicating layers of insulation along with Rvalue calculations.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each exposed material.

D. Certifications:

1. Installer: Submit certification installer is approved for roof system installation.

2. Materials: Submit certification materials and components conform to Specifications and are compatible with each other, roof substrate, and related work.
07 53 10 - 1 Elastomeric PVC Membrane Roofing
TP-280
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Fire and Wind: Submit manufacturer's certification system conforms to fire and wind requirements.

4. Manufacturer Representative: Submit certification by manufacturer's representative indicating work has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

B. Qualification of Installers: Company with minimum five years successful experienced in PVC membrane roof application on projects of similar scope.

1. Installer: Roofing and insulation manufacturer certified or approved.

C. Supervisor: Installer to maintain full-time supervisor/foreman who is on jobsite during roofing work who is experienced in installation of roofing system specified.

Gardena City CouncilDecember 12, 2023

Gardena City Council
December 12, 2023